Software Design by Example: a tool-based introduction with Python

🚀 The Architecture of Open Source Applications Volume 1 & 2, 500 Lines or Less, Software Design by Example, Performance of Open Source Applications (PDF)

NOTICE This repository contains the public FTC SDK for the SKYSTONE (2019-2020) competition season. If you are looking for the current season's FTC SDK software, please visit the new and permanent home of the public FTC SDK: FtcRobotController repository Welcome! This GitHub repository contains the source code that is used to build an Android app to control a FIRST Tech Challenge competition robot. To use this SDK, download/clone the entire project to your local computer. Getting Started If you are new to robotics or new to the FIRST Tech Challenge, then you should consider reviewing the FTC Blocks Tutorial to get familiar with how to use the control system: FTC Blocks Online Tutorial Even if you are an advanced Java programmer, it is helpful to start with the FTC Blocks tutorial, and then migrate to the OnBot Java Tool or to Android Studio afterwards. Downloading the Project If you are an Android Studio programmer, there are several ways to download this repo. Note that if you use the Blocks or OnBot Java Tool to program your robot, then you do not need to download this repository. If you are a git user, you can clone the most current version of the repository: git clone https://github.com/FIRST-Tech-Challenge/SKYSTONE.git Or, if you prefer, you can use the "Download Zip" button available through the main repository page. Downloading the project as a .ZIP file will keep the size of the download manageable. You can also download the project folder (as a .zip or .tar.gz archive file) from the Downloads subsection of the Releases page for this repository. Once you have downloaded and uncompressed (if needed) your folder, you can use Android Studio to import the folder ("Import project (Eclipse ADT, Gradle, etc.)"). Getting Help User Documentation and Tutorials FIRST maintains online documentation with information and tutorials on how to use the FIRST Tech Challenge software and robot control system. You can access this documentation using the following link: SKYSTONE Online Documentation Note that the online documentation is an "evergreen" document that is constantly being updated and edited. It contains the most current information about the FIRST Tech Challenge software and control system. Javadoc Reference Material The Javadoc reference documentation for the FTC SDK is now available online. Click on the following link to view the FTC SDK Javadoc documentation as a live website: FTC Javadoc Documentation Documentation for the FTC SDK is also included with this repository. There is a subfolder called "doc" which contains several subfolders: The folder "apk" contains the .apk files for the FTC Driver Station and FTC Robot Controller apps. The folder "javadoc" contains the JavaDoc user documentation for the FTC SDK. Online User Forum For technical questions regarding the Control System or the FTC SDK, please visit the FTC Technology forum: FTC Technology Forum Release Information Version 5.5 (20200824-090813) Version 5.5 requires Android Studio 4.0 or later. New features Adds support for calling custom Java classes from Blocks OpModes (fixes SkyStone issue #161). Classes must be in the org.firstinspires.ftc.teamcode package. Methods must be public static and have no more than 21 parameters. Parameters declared as OpMode, LinearOpMode, Telemetry, and HardwareMap are supported and the argument is provided automatically, regardless of the order of the parameters. On the block, the sockets for those parameters are automatically filled in. Parameters declared as char or java.lang.Character will accept any block that returns text and will only use the first character in the text. Parameters declared as boolean or java.lang.Boolean will accept any block that returns boolean. Parameters declared as byte, java.lang.Byte, short, java.lang.Short, int, java.lang.Integer, long, or java.lang.Long, will accept any block that returns a number and will round that value to the nearest whole number. Parameters declared as float, java.lang.Float, double, java.lang.Double will accept any block that returns a number. Adds telemetry API method for setting display format Classic Monospace HTML (certain tags only) Adds blocks support for switching cameras. Adds Blocks support for TensorFlow Object Detection with a custom model. Adds support for uploading a custom TensorFlow Object Detection model in the Manage page, which is especially useful for Blocks and OnBotJava users. Shows new Control Hub blink codes when the WiFi band is switched using the Control Hub's button (only possible on Control Hub OS 1.1.2) Adds new warnings which can be disabled in the Advanced RC Settings Mismatched app versions warning Unnecessary 2.4 GHz WiFi usage warning REV Hub is running outdated firmware (older than version 1.8.2) Adds support for Sony PS4 gamepad, and reworks how gamepads work on the Driver Station Removes preference which sets gamepad type based on driver position. Replaced with menu which allows specifying type for gamepads with unknown VID and PID Attempts to auto-detect gamepad type based on USB VID and PID If gamepad VID and PID is not known, use type specified by user for that VID and PID If gamepad VID and PID is not known AND the user has not specified a type for that VID and PID, an educated guess is made about how to map the gamepad Driver Station will now attempt to automatically recover from a gamepad disconnecting, and re-assign it to the position it was assigned to when it dropped If only one gamepad is assigned and it drops: it can be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have different VID/PID signatures, and only one drops: it will be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have different VID/PID signatures, and BOTH drop: both will be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have the same VID/PID signatures, and only one drops: it will be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have the same VID/PID signatures, and BOTH drop: neither will be recovered, because of the ambiguity of the gamepads when they re-appear on the USB bus. There is currently one known edge case: if there are two gamepads with the same VID/PID signature plugged in, but only one is assigned, and they BOTH drop, it's a 50-50 chance of which one will be chosen for automatic recovery to the assigned position: it is determined by whichever one is re-enumerated first by the USB bus controller. Adds landscape user interface to Driver Station New feature: practice timer with audio cues New feature (Control Hub only): wireless network connection strength indicator (0-5 bars) New feature (Control Hub only): tapping on the ping/channel display will switch to an alternate display showing radio RX dBm and link speed (tap again to switch back) The layout will NOT autorotate. You can switch the layout from the Driver Station's settings menu. Breaking changes Removes support for Android versions 4.4 through 5.1 (KitKat and Lollipop). The minSdkVersion is now 23. Removes the deprecated LinearOpMode methods waitOneFullHardwareCycle() and waitForNextHardwareCycle() Enhancements Handles RS485 address of Control Hub automatically The Control Hub is automatically given a reserved address Existing configuration files will continue to work All addresses in the range of 1-10 are still available for Expansion Hubs The Control Hub light will now normally be solid green, without blinking to indicate the address The Control Hub will not be shown on the Expansion Hub Address Change settings page Improves REV Hub firmware updater The user can now choose between all available firmware update files Version 1.8.2 of the REV Hub firmware is bundled into the Robot Controller app. Text was added to clarify that Expansion Hubs can only be updated via USB. Firmware update speed was reduced to improve reliability Allows REV Hub firmware to be updated directly from the Manage webpage Improves log viewer on Robot Controller Horizontal scrolling support (no longer word wrapped) Supports pinch-to-zoom Uses a monospaced font Error messages are highlighted New color scheme Attempts to force-stop a runaway/stuck OpMode without restarting the entire app Not all types of runaway conditions are stoppable, but if the user code attempts to talk to hardware during the runaway, the system should be able to capture it. Makes various tweaks to the Self Inspect screen Renames "OS version" entry to "Android version" Renames "WiFi Direct Name" to "WiFi Name" Adds Control Hub OS version, when viewing the report of a Control Hub Hides the airplane mode entry, when viewing the report of a Control Hub Removes check for ZTE Speed Channel Changer Shows firmware version for all Expansion and Control Hubs Reworks network settings portion of Manage page All network settings are now applied with a single click The WiFi Direct channel of phone-based Robot Controllers can now be changed from the Manage page WiFi channels are filtered by band (2.4 vs 5 GHz) and whether they overlap with other channels The current WiFi channel is pre-selected on phone-based Robot Controllers, and Control Hubs running OS 1.1.2 or later. On Control Hubs running OS 1.1.2 or later, you can choose to have the system automatically select a channel on the 5 GHz band Improves OnBotJava New light and dark themes replace the old themes (chaos, github, chrome,...) the new default theme is light and will be used when you first update to this version OnBotJava now has a tabbed editor Read-only offline mode Improves function of "exit" menu item on Robot Controller and Driver Station Now guaranteed to be fully stopped and unloaded from memory Shows a warning message if a LinearOpMode exists prematurely due to failure to monitor for the start condition Improves error message shown when the Driver Station and Robot Controller are incompatible with each other Driver Station OpMode Control Panel now disabled while a Restart Robot is in progress Disables advanced settings related to WiFi direct when the Robot Controller is a Control Hub. Tint phone battery icons on Driver Station when low/critical. Uses names "Control Hub Portal" and "Control Hub" (when appropriate) in new configuration files Improve I2C read performance Very large improvement on Control Hub; up to ~2x faster with small (e.g. 6 byte) reads Not as apparent on Expansion Hubs connected to a phone Update/refresh build infrastructure Update to 'androidx' support library from 'com.android.support:appcompat', which is end-of-life Update targetSdkVersion and compileSdkVersion to 28 Update Android Studio's Android plugin to latest Fix reported build timestamp in 'About' screen Add sample illustrating manual webcam use: ConceptWebcam Bug fixes Fixes SkyStone issue #248 Fixes SkyStone issue #232 and modifies bulk caching semantics to allow for cache-preserving MANUAL/AUTO transitions. Improves performance when REV 2M distance sensor is unplugged Improves readability of Toast messages on certain devices Allows a Driver Station to connect to a Robot Controller after another has disconnected Improves generation of fake serial numbers for UVC cameras which do not provide a real serial number Previously some devices would assign such cameras a serial of 0:0 and fail to open and start streaming Fixes ftc_app issue #638. Fixes a slew of bugs with the Vuforia camera monitor including: Fixes bug where preview could be displayed with a wonky aspect ratio Fixes bug where preview could be cut off in landscape Fixes bug where preview got totally messed up when rotating phone Fixes bug where crosshair could drift off target when using webcams Fixes issue in UVC driver on some devices (ftc_app 681) if streaming was started/stopped multiple times in a row Issue manifested as kernel panic on devices which do not have this kernel patch. On affected devices which do have the patch, the issue was manifest as simply a failure to start streaming. The Tech Team believes that the root cause of the issue is a bug in the Linux kernel XHCI driver. A workaround was implemented in the SDK UVC driver. Fixes bug in UVC driver where often half the frames from the camera would be dropped (e.g. only 15FPS delivered during a streaming session configured for 30FPS). Fixes issue where TensorFlow Object Detection would show results whose confidence was lower than the minimum confidence parameter. Fixes a potential exploitation issue of CVE-2019-11358 in OnBotJava Fixes changing the address of an Expansion Hub with additional Expansion Hubs connected to it Preserves the Control Hub's network connection when "Restart Robot" is selected Fixes issue where device scans would fail while the Robot was restarting Fix RenderScript usage Use androidx.renderscript variant: increased compatibility Use RenderScript in Java mode, not native: simplifies build Fixes webcam-frame-to-bitmap conversion problem: alpha channel wasn't being initialized, only R, G, & B Fixes possible arithmetic overflow in Deadline Fixes deadlock in Vuforia webcam support which could cause 5-second delays when stopping OpMode Version 5.4 (20200108-101156) Fixes SkyStone issue #88 Adds an inspection item that notes when a robot controller (Control Hub) is using the factory default password. Fixes SkyStone issue #61 Fixes SkyStone issue #142 Fixes ftc_app issue #417 by adding more current and voltage monitoring capabilities for REV Hubs. Fixes a crash sometimes caused by OnBotJava activity Improves OnBotJava autosave functionality ftc_app #738 Fixes system responsiveness issue when an Expansion Hub is disconnected Fixes issue where IMU initialization could prevent Op Modes from stopping Fixes issue where AndroidTextToSpeech.speak() would fail if it was called too early Adds telemetry.speak() methods and blocks, which cause the Driver Station (if also updated) to speak text Adds and improves Expansion Hub-related warnings Improves Expansion Hub low battery warning Displays the warning immediately after the hub reports it Specifies whether the condition is current or occurred temporarily during an OpMode run Displays which hubs reported low battery Displays warning when hub loses and regains power during an OpMode run Fixes the hub's LED pattern after this condition Displays warning when Expansion Hub is not responding to commands Specifies whether the condition is current or occurred temporarily during an OpMode run Clarifies warning when Expansion Hub is not present at startup Specifies that this condition requires a Robot Restart before the hub can be used. The hub light will now accurately reflect this state Improves logging and reduces log spam during these conditions Syncs the Control Hub time and timezone to a connected web browser programming the robot, if a Driver Station is not available. Adds bulk read functionality for REV Hubs A bulk caching mode must be set at the Hub level with LynxModule#setBulkCachingMode(). This applies to all relevant SDK hardware classes that reference that Hub. The following following Hub bulk caching modes are available: BulkCachingMode.OFF (default): All hardware calls operate as usual. Bulk data can read through LynxModule#getBulkData() and processed manually. BulkCachingMode.AUTO: Applicable hardware calls are served from a bulk read cache that is cleared/refreshed automatically to ensure identical commands don't hit the same cache. The cache can also be cleared manually with LynxModule#clearBulkCache(), although this is not recommended. (advanced users) BulkCachingMode.MANUAL: Same as BulkCachingMode.AUTO except the cache is never cleared automatically. To avoid getting stale data, the cache must be manually cleared at the beginning of each loop body or as the user deems appropriate. Removes PIDF Annotation values added in Rev 5.3 (to AndyMark, goBILDA and TETRIX motor configurations). The new motor types will still be available but their Default control behavior will revert back to Rev 5.2 Adds new ConceptMotorBulkRead sample Opmode to demonstrate and compare Motor Bulk-Read modes for reducing I/O latencies. Version 5.3 (20191004-112306) Fixes external USB/UVC webcam support Makes various bugfixes and improvements to Blocks page, including but not limited to: Many visual tweaks Browser zoom and window resize behave better Resizing the Java preview pane works better and more consistently across browsers The Java preview pane consistently gets scrollbars when needed The Java preview pane is hidden by default on phones Internet Explorer 11 should work Large dropdown lists display properly on lower res screens Disabled buttons are now visually identifiable as disabled A warning is shown if a user selects a TFOD sample, but their device is not compatible Warning messages in a Blocks op mode are now visible by default. Adds goBILDA 5201 and 5202 motors to Robot Configurator Adds PIDF Annotation values to AndyMark, goBILDA and TETRIX motor configurations. This has the effect of causing the RUN_USING_ENCODERS and RUN_TO_POSITION modes to use PIDF vs PID closed loop control on these motors. This should provide more responsive, yet stable, speed control. PIDF adds Feedforward control to the basic PID control loop. Feedforward is useful when controlling a motor's speed because it "anticipates" how much the control voltage must change to achieve a new speed set-point, rather than requiring the integrated error to change sufficiently. The PIDF values were chosen to provide responsive, yet stable, speed control on a lightly loaded motor. The more heavily a motor is loaded (drag or friction), the more noticable the PIDF improvement will be. Fixes startup crash on Android 10 Fixes ftc_app issue #712 (thanks to FROGbots-4634) Fixes ftc_app issue #542 Allows "A" and lowercase letters when naming device through RC and DS apps. Version 5.2 (20190905-083277) Fixes extra-wide margins on settings activities, and placement of the new configuration button Adds Skystone Vuforia image target data. Includes sample Skystone Vuforia Navigation op modes (Java). Includes sample Skystone Vuforia Navigation op modes (Blocks). Adds TensorFlow inference model (.tflite) for Skystone game elements. Includes sample Skystone TensorFlow op modes (Java). Includes sample Skystone TensorFlow op modes (Blocks). Removes older (season-specific) sample op modes. Includes 64-bit support (to comply with Google Play requirements). Protects against Stuck OpModes when a Restart Robot is requested. (Thanks to FROGbots-4634) (ftc_app issue #709) Blocks related changes: Fixes bug with blocks generated code when hardware device name is a java or javascript reserved word. Shows generated java code for blocks, even when hardware items are missing from the active configuration. Displays warning icon when outdated Vuforia and TensorFlow blocks are used (SkyStone issue #27) Version 5.1 (20190820-222104) Defines default PIDF parameters for the following motors: REV Core Hex Motor REV 20:1 HD Hex Motor REV 40:1 HD Hex Motor Adds back button when running on a device without a system back button (such as a Control Hub) Allows a REV Control Hub to update the firmware on a REV Expansion Hub via USB Fixes SkyStone issue #9 Fixes ftc_app issue #715 Prevents extra DS User clicks by filtering based on current state. Prevents incorrect DS UI state changes when receiving new OpMode list from RC Adds support for REV Color Sensor V3 Adds a manual-refresh DS Camera Stream for remotely viewing RC camera frames. To show the stream on the DS, initialize but do not run a stream-enabled opmode, select the Camera Stream option in the DS menu, and tap the image to refresh. This feature is automatically enabled when using Vuforia or TFOD—no additional RC configuration is required for typical use cases. To hide the stream, select the same menu item again. Note that gamepads are disabled and the selected opmode cannot be started while the stream is open as a safety precaution. To use custom streams, consult the API docs for CameraStreamServer#setSource and CameraStreamSource. Adds many Star Wars sounds to RobotController resources. Added SKYSTONE Sounds Chooser Sample Program. Switches out startup, connect chimes, and error/warning sounds for Star Wars sounds Updates OnBot Java to use a WebSocket for communication with the robot The OnBot Java page no longer has to do a full refresh when a user switches from editing one file to another Known issues: Camera Stream The Vuforia camera stream inherits the issues present in the phone preview (namely ftc_app issue #574). This problem does not affect the TFOD camera stream even though it receives frames from Vuforia. The orientation of the stream frames may not always match the phone preview. For now, these frames may be rotated manually via a custom CameraStreamSource if desired. OnBotJava Browser back button may not always work correctly It's possible for a build to be queued, but not started. The OnBot Java build console will display a warning if this occurs. A user might not realize they are editing a different file if the user inadvertently switches from one file to another since this switch is now seamless. The name of the currently open file is displayed in the browser tab. Version 5.0 (built on 19.06.14) Support for the REV Robotics Control Hub. Adds a Java preview pane to the Blocks editor. Adds a new offline export feature to the Blocks editor. Display wifi channel in Network circle on Driver Station. Adds calibration for Logitech C270 Updates build tooling and target SDK. Compliance with Google's permissions infrastructure (Required after build tooling update). Keep Alives to mitigate the Motorola wifi scanning problem. Telemetry substitute no longer necessary. Improves Vuforia error reporting. Fixes ftctechnh/ftc_app issues 621, 713. Miscellaneous bug fixes and improvements. Version 4.3 (built on 18.10.31) Includes missing TensorFlow-related libraries and files. Version 4.2 (built on 18.10.30) Includes fix to avoid deadlock situation with WatchdogMonitor which could result in USB communication errors. Comm error appeared to require that user disconnect USB cable and restart the Robot Controller app to recover. robotControllerLog.txt would have error messages that included the words "E RobotCore: lynx xmit lock: #### abandoning lock:" Includes fix to correctly list the parent module address for a REV Robotics Expansion Hub in a configuration (.xml) file. Bug in versions 4.0 and 4.1 would incorrect list the address module for a parent REV Robotics device as "1". If the parent module had a higher address value than the daisy-chained module, then this bug would prevent the Robot Controller from communicating with the downstream Expansion Hub. Added requirement for ACCESS_COARSE_LOCATION to allow a Driver Station running Android Oreo to scan for Wi-Fi Direct devices. Added google() repo to build.gradle because aapt2 must be downloaded from the google() repository beginning with version 3.2 of the Android Gradle Plugin. Important Note: Android Studio users will need to be connected to the Internet the first time build the ftc_app project. Internet connectivity is required for the first build so the appropriate files can be downloaded from the Google repository. Users should not need to be connected to the Internet for subsequent builds. This should also fix buid issue where Android Studio would complain that it "Could not find com.android.tools.lint:lint-gradle:26.1.4" (or similar). Added support for REV Spark Mini motor controller as part of the configuration menu for a servo/PWM port on the REV Expansion Hub. Provide examples for playing audio files in an Op Mode. Block Development Tool Changes Includes a fix for a problem with the Velocity blocks that were reported in the FTC Technology forum (Blocks Programming subforum). Change the "Save completed successfully." message to a white color so it will contrast with a green background. Fixed the "Download image" feature so it will work if there are text blocks in the op mode. Introduce support for Google's TensorFlow Lite technology for object detetion for 2018-2019 game. TensorFlow lite can recognize Gold Mineral and Silver Mineral from 2018-2019 game. Example Java and Block op modes are included to show how to determine the relative position of the gold block (left, center, right). Version 4.1 (released on 18.09.24) Changes include: Fix to prevent crash when deprecated configuration annotations are used. Change to allow FTC Robot Controller APK to be auto-updated using FIRST Global Control Hub update scripts. Removed samples for non supported / non legal hardware. Improvements to Telemetry.addData block with "text" socket. Updated Blocks sample op mode list to include Rover Ruckus Vuforia example. Update SDK library version number. Version 4.0 (released on 18.09.12) Changes include: Initial support for UVC compatible cameras If UVC camera has a unique serial number, RC will detect and enumerate by serial number. If UVC camera lacks a unique serial number, RC will only support one camera of that type connected. Calibration settings for a few cameras are included (see TeamCode/src/main/res/xml/teamwebcamcalibrations.xml for details). User can upload calibration files from Program and Manage web interface. UVC cameras seem to draw a fair amount of electrical current from the USB bus. This does not appear to present any problems for the REV Robotics Control Hub. This does seem to create stability problems when using some cameras with an Android phone-based Robot Controller. FTC Tech Team is investigating options to mitigate this issue with the phone-based Robot Controllers. Updated sample Vuforia Navigation and VuMark Op Modes to demonstrate how to use an internal phone-based camera and an external UVC webcam. Support for improved motor control. REV Robotics Expansion Hub firmware 1.8 and greater will support a feed forward mechanism for closed loop motor control. FTC SDK has been modified to support PIDF coefficients (proportional, integral, derivative, and feed forward). FTC Blocks development tool modified to include PIDF programming blocks. Deprecated older PID-related methods and variables. REV's 1.8.x PIDF-related changes provide a more linear and accurate way to control a motor. Wireless Added 5GHz support for wireless channel changing for those devices that support it. Tested with Moto G5 and E4 phones. Also tested with other (currently non-approved) phones such as Samsung Galaxy S8. Improved Expansion Hub firmware update support in Robot Controller app Changes to make the system more robust during the firmware update process (when performed through Robot Controller app). User no longer has to disconnect a downstream daisy-chained Expansion Hub when updating an Expansion Hub's firmware. If user is updating an Expansion Hub's firmware through a USB connection, he/she does not have to disconnect RS485 connection to other Expansion Hubs. The user still must use a USB connection to update an Expansion Hub's firmware. The user cannot update the Expansion Hub firmware for a downstream device that is daisy chained through an RS485 connection. If an Expansion Hub accidentally gets "bricked" the Robot Controller app is now more likely to recognize the Hub when it scans the USB bus. Robot Controller app should be able to detect an Expansion Hub, even if it accidentally was bricked in a previous update attempt. Robot Controller app should be able to install the firmware onto the Hub, even if if accidentally was bricked in a previous update attempt. Resiliency FTC software can detect and enable an FTDI reset feature that is available with REV Robotics v1.8 Expansion Hub firmware and greater. When enabled, the Expansion Hub can detect if it hasn't communicated with the Robot Controller over the FTDI (USB) connection. If the Hub hasn't heard from the Robot Controller in a while, it will reset the FTDI connection. This action helps system recover from some ESD-induced disruptions. Various fixes to improve reliability of FTC software. Blocks Fixed errors with string and list indices in blocks export to java. Support for USB connected UVC webcams. Refactored optimized Blocks Vuforia code to support Rover Ruckus image targets. Added programming blocks to support PIDF (proportional, integral, derivative and feed forward) motor control. Added formatting options (under Telemetry and Miscellaneous categories) so user can set how many decimal places to display a numerical value. Support to play audio files (which are uploaded through Blocks web interface) on Driver Station in addition to the Robot Controller. Fixed bug with Download Image of Blocks feature. Support for REV Robotics Blinkin LED Controller. Support for REV Robotics 2m Distance Sensor. Added support for a REV Touch Sensor (no longer have to configure as a generic digital device). Added blocks for DcMotorEx methods. These are enhanced methods that you can use when supported by the motor controller hardware. The REV Robotics Expansion Hub supports these enhanced methods. Enhanced methods include methods to get/set motor velocity (in encoder pulses per second), get/set PIDF coefficients, etc.. Modest Improvements in Logging Decrease frequency of battery checker voltage statements. Removed non-FTC related log statements (wherever possible). Introduced a "Match Logging" feature. Under "Settings" a user can enable/disable this feature (it's disabled by default). If enabled, user provides a "Match Number" through the Driver Station user interface (top of the screen). The Match Number is used to create a log file specifically with log statements from that particular Op Mode run. Match log files are stored in /sdcard/FIRST/matlogs on the Robot Controller. Once an op mode run is complete, the Match Number is cleared. This is a convenient way to create a separate match log with statements only related to a specific op mode run. New Devices Support for REV Robotics Blinkin LED Controller. Support for REV Robotics 2m Distance Sensor. Added configuration option for REV 20:1 HD Hex Motor. Added support for a REV Touch Sensor (no longer have to configure as a generic digital device). Miscellaneous Fixed some errors in the definitions for acceleration and velocity in our javadoc documentation. Added ability to play audio files on Driver Station When user is configuring an Expansion Hub, the LED on the Expansion Hub will change blink pattern (purple-cyan) to indicate which Hub is currently being configured. Renamed I2cSensorType to I2cDeviceType. Added an external sample Op Mode that demonstrates localization using 2018-2019 (Rover Ruckus presented by QualComm) Vuforia targets. Added an external sample Op Mode that demonstrates how to use the REV Robotics 2m Laser Distance Sensor. Added an external sample Op Mode that demonstrates how to use the REV Robotics Blinkin LED Controller. Re-categorized external Java sample Op Modes to "TeleOp" instead of "Autonomous". Known issues: Initial support for UVC compatible cameras UVC cameras seem to draw significant amount of current from the USB bus. This does not appear to present any problems for the REV Robotics Control Hub. This does seem to create stability problems when using some cameras with an Android phone-based Robot Controller. FTC Tech Team is investigating options to mitigate this issue with the phone-based Robot Controllers. There might be a possible deadlock which causes the RC to become unresponsive when using a UVC webcam with a Nougat Android Robot Controller. Wireless When user selects a wireless channel, this channel does not necessarily persist if the phone is power cycled. Tech Team is hoping to eventually address this issue in a future release. Issue has been present since apps were introduced (i.e., it is not new with the v4.0 release). Wireless channel is not currently displayed for WiFi Direct connections. Miscellaneous The blink indication feature that shows which Expansion Hub is currently being configured does not work for a newly created configuration file. User has to first save a newly created configuration file and then close and re-edit the file in order for blink indicator to work. Version 3.6 (built on 17.12.18) Changes include: Blocks Changes Uses updated Google Blockly software to allow users to edit their op modes on Apple iOS devices (including iPad and iPhone). Improvement in Blocks tool to handle corrupt op mode files. Autonomous op modes should no longer get switched back to tele-op after re-opening them to be edited. The system can now detect type mismatches during runtime and alert the user with a message on the Driver Station. Updated javadoc documentation for setPower() method to reflect correct range of values (-1 to +1). Modified VuforiaLocalizerImpl to allow for user rendering of frames Added a user-overrideable onRenderFrame() method which gets called by the class's renderFrame() method. Version 3.5 (built on 17.10.30) Changes with version 3.5 include: Introduced a fix to prevent random op mode stops, which can occur after the Robot Controller app has been paused and then resumed (for example, when a user temporarily turns off the display of the Robot Controller phone, and then turns the screen back on). Introduced a fix to prevent random op mode stops, which were previously caused by random peer disconnect events on the Driver Station. Fixes issue where log files would be closed on pause of the RC or DS, but not re-opened upon resume. Fixes issue with battery handler (voltage) start/stop race. Fixes issue where Android Studio generated op modes would disappear from available list in certain situations. Fixes problem where OnBot Java would not build on REV Robotics Control Hub. Fixes problem where OnBot Java would not build if the date and time on the Robot Controller device was "rewound" (set to an earlier date/time). Improved error message on OnBot Java that occurs when renaming a file fails. Removed unneeded resources from android.jar binaries used by OnBot Java to reduce final size of Robot Controller app. Added MR_ANALOG_TOUCH_SENSOR block to Blocks Programming Tool. Version 3.4 (built on 17.09.06) Changes with version 3.4 include: Added telemetry.update() statement for BlankLinearOpMode template. Renamed sample Block op modes to be more consistent with Java samples. Added some additional sample Block op modes. Reworded OnBot Java readme slightly. Version 3.3 (built on 17.09.04) This version of the software includes improves for the FTC Blocks Programming Tool and the OnBot Java Programming Tool. Changes with verion 3.3 include: Android Studio ftc_app project has been updated to use Gradle Plugin 2.3.3. Android Studio ftc_app project is already using gradle 3.5 distribution. Robot Controller log has been renamed to /sdcard/RobotControllerLog.txt (note that this change was actually introduced w/ v3.2). Improvements in I2C reliability. Optimized I2C read for REV Expansion Hub, with v1.7 firmware or greater. Updated all external/samples (available through OnBot and in Android project folder). Vuforia Added support for VuMarks that will be used for the 2017-2018 season game. Blocks Update to latest Google Blockly release. Sample op modes can be selected as a template when creating new op mode. Fixed bug where the blocks would disappear temporarily when mouse button is held down. Added blocks for Range.clip and Range.scale. User can now disable/enable Block op modes. Fix to prevent occasional Blocks deadlock. OnBot Java Significant improvements with autocomplete function for OnBot Java editor. Sample op modes can be selected as a template when creating new op mode. Fixes and changes to complete hardware setup feature. Updated (and more useful) onBot welcome message. Known issues: Android Studio After updating to the new v3.3 Android Studio project folder, if you get error messages indicating "InvalidVirtualFileAccessException" then you might need to do a File->Invalidate Caches / Restart to clear the error. OnBot Java Sometimes when you push the build button to build all op modes, the RC returns an error message that the build failed. If you press the build button a second time, the build typically suceeds. Version 3.2 (built on 17.08.02) This version of the software introduces the "OnBot Java" Development Tool. Similar to the FTC Blocks Development Tool, the FTC OnBot Java Development Tool allows a user to create, edit and build op modes dynamically using only a Javascript-enabled web browser. The OnBot Java Development Tool is an integrated development environment (IDE) that is served up by the Robot Controller. Op modes are created and edited using a Javascript-enabled browser (Google Chromse is recommended). Op modes are saved on the Robot Controller Android device directly. The OnBot Java Development Tool provides a Java programming environment that does NOT need Android Studio. Changes with version 3.2 include: Enhanced web-based development tools Introduction of OnBot Java Development Tool. Web-based programming and management features are "always on" (user no longer needs to put Robot Controller into programming mode). Web-based management interface (where user can change Robot Controller name and also easily download Robot Controller log file). OnBot Java, Blocks and Management features available from web based interface. Blocks Programming Development Tool: Changed "LynxI2cColorRangeSensor" block to "REV Color/range sensor" block. Fixed tooltip for ColorSensor.isLightOn block. Added blocks for ColorSensor.getNormalizedColors and LynxI2cColorRangeSensor.getNormalizedColors. Added example op modes for digital touch sensor and REV Robotics Color Distance sensor. User selectable color themes. Includes many minor enhancements and fixes (too numerous to list). Known issues: Auto complete function is incomplete and does not support the following (for now): Access via this keyword Access via super keyword Members of the super cloass, not overridden by the class Any methods provided in the current class Inner classes Can't handle casted objects Any objects coming from an parenthetically enclosed expression Version 3.10 (built on 17.05.09) This version of the software provides support for the REV Robotics Expansion Hub. This version also includes improvements in the USB communication layer in an effort to enhance system resiliency. If you were using a 2.x version of the software previously, updating to version 3.1 requires that you also update your Driver Station software in addition to updating the Robot Controller software. Also note that in version 3.10 software, the setMaxSpeed and getMaxSpeed methods are no longer available (not deprecated, they have been removed from the SDK). Also note that the the new 3.x software incorporates motor profiles that a user can select as he/she configures the robot. Changes include: Blocks changes Added VuforiaTrackableDefaultListener.getPose and Vuforia.trackPose blocks. Added optimized blocks support for Vuforia extended tracking. Added atan2 block to the math category. Added useCompetitionFieldTargetLocations parameter to Vuforia.initialize block. If set to false, the target locations are placed at (0,0,0) with target orientation as specified in https://github.com/gearsincorg/FTCVuforiaDemo/blob/master/Robot_Navigation.java tutorial op mode. Incorporates additional improvements to USB comm layer to improve system resiliency (to recover from a greater number of communication disruptions). Additional Notes Regarding Version 3.00 (built on 17.04.13) In addition to the release changes listed below (see section labeled "Version 3.00 (built on 17.04.013)"), version 3.00 has the following important changes: Version 3.00 software uses a new version of the FTC Robocol (robot protocol). If you upgrade to v3.0 on the Robot Controller and/or Android Studio side, you must also upgrade the Driver Station software to match the new Robocol. Version 3.00 software removes the setMaxSpeed and getMaxSpeed methods from the DcMotor class. If you have an op mode that formerly used these methods, you will need to remove the references/calls to these methods. Instead, v3.0 provides the max speed information through the use of motor profiles that are selected by the user during robot configuration. Version 3.00 software currently does not have a mechanism to disable extra i2c sensors. We hope to re-introduce this function with a release in the near future. Version 3.00 (built on 17.04.13) *** Use this version of the software at YOUR OWN RISK!!! *** This software is being released as an "alpha" version. Use this version at your own risk! This pre-release software contains SIGNIFICANT changes, including changes to the Wi-Fi Direct pairing mechanism, rewrites of the I2C sensor classes, changes to the USB/FTDI layer, and the introduction of support for the REV Robotics Expansion Hub and the REV Robotics color-range-light sensor. These changes were implemented to improve the reliability and resiliency of the FTC control system. Please note, however, that version 3.00 is considered "alpha" code. This code is being released so that the FIRST community will have an opportunity to test the new REV Expansion Hub electronics module when it becomes available in May. The developers do not recommend using this code for critical applications (i.e., competition use). *** Use this version of the software at YOUR OWN RISK!!! *** Changes include: Major rework of sensor-related infrastructure. Includes rewriting sensor classes to implement synchronous I2C communication. Fix to reset Autonomous timer back to 30 seconds. Implementation of specific motor profiles for approved 12V motors (includes Tetrix, AndyMark, Matrix and REV models). Modest improvements to enhance Wi-Fi P2P pairing. Fixes telemetry log addition race. Publishes all the sources (not just a select few). Includes Block programming improvements Addition of optimized Vuforia blocks. Auto scrollbar to projects and sounds pages. Fixed blocks paste bug. Blocks execute after while-opModeIsActive loop (to allow for cleanup before exiting op mode). Added gyro integratedZValue block. Fixes bug with projects page for Firefox browser. Added IsSpeaking block to AndroidTextToSpeech. Implements support for the REV Robotics Expansion Hub Implements support for integral REV IMU (physically installed on I2C bus 0, uses same Bosch BNO055 9 axis absolute orientation sensor as Adafruit 9DOF abs orientation sensor). - Implements support for REV color/range/light sensor. Provides support to update Expansion Hub firmware through FTC SDK. Detects REV firmware version and records in log file. Includes support for REV Control Hub (note that the REV Control Hub is not yet approved for FTC use). Implements FTC Blocks programming support for REV Expansion Hub and sensor hardware. Detects and alerts when I2C device disconnect. Version 2.62 (built on 17.01.07) Added null pointer check before calling modeToByte() in finishModeSwitchIfNecessary method for ModernRoboticsUsbDcMotorController class. Changes to enhance Modern Robotics USB protocol robustness. Version 2.61 (released on 16.12.19) Blocks Programming mode changes: Fix to correct issue when an exception was thrown because an OpticalDistanceSensor object appears twice in the hardware map (the second time as a LightSensor). Version 2.6 (released on 16.12.16) Fixes for Gyro class: Improve (decrease) sensor refresh latency. fix isCalibrating issues. Blocks Programming mode changes: Blocks now ignores a device in the configuration xml if the name is empty. Other devices work in configuration work fine. Version 2.5 (internal release on released on 16.12.13) Blocks Programming mode changes: Added blocks support for AdafruitBNO055IMU. Added Download Op Mode button to FtcBocks.html. Added support for copying blocks in one OpMode and pasting them in an other OpMode. The clipboard content is stored on the phone, so the programming mode server must be running. Modified Utilities section of the toolbox. In Programming Mode, display information about the active connections. Fixed paste location when workspace has been scrolled. Added blocks support for the android Accelerometer. Fixed issue where Blocks Upload Op Mode truncated name at first dot. Added blocks support for Android SoundPool. Added type safety to blocks for Acceleration. Added type safety to blocks for AdafruitBNO055IMU.Parameters. Added type safety to blocks for AnalogInput. Added type safety to blocks for AngularVelocity. Added type safety to blocks for Color. Added type safety to blocks for ColorSensor. Added type safety to blocks for CompassSensor. Added type safety to blocks for CRServo. Added type safety to blocks for DigitalChannel. Added type safety to blocks for ElapsedTime. Added type safety to blocks for Gamepad. Added type safety to blocks for GyroSensor. Added type safety to blocks for IrSeekerSensor. Added type safety to blocks for LED. Added type safety to blocks for LightSensor. Added type safety to blocks for LinearOpMode. Added type safety to blocks for MagneticFlux. Added type safety to blocks for MatrixF. Added type safety to blocks for MrI2cCompassSensor. Added type safety to blocks for MrI2cRangeSensor. Added type safety to blocks for OpticalDistanceSensor. Added type safety to blocks for Orientation. Added type safety to blocks for Position. Added type safety to blocks for Quaternion. Added type safety to blocks for Servo. Added type safety to blocks for ServoController. Added type safety to blocks for Telemetry. Added type safety to blocks for Temperature. Added type safety to blocks for TouchSensor. Added type safety to blocks for UltrasonicSensor. Added type safety to blocks for VectorF. Added type safety to blocks for Velocity. Added type safety to blocks for VoltageSensor. Added type safety to blocks for VuforiaLocalizer.Parameters. Added type safety to blocks for VuforiaTrackable. Added type safety to blocks for VuforiaTrackables. Added type safety to blocks for enums in AdafruitBNO055IMU.Parameters. Added type safety to blocks for AndroidAccelerometer, AndroidGyroscope, AndroidOrientation, and AndroidTextToSpeech. Version 2.4 (released on 16.11.13) Fix to avoid crashing for nonexistent resources. Blocks Programming mode changes: Added blocks to support OpenGLMatrix, MatrixF, and VectorF. Added blocks to support AngleUnit, AxesOrder, AxesReference, CameraDirection, CameraMonitorFeedback, DistanceUnit, and TempUnit. Added blocks to support Acceleration. Added blocks to support LinearOpMode.getRuntime. Added blocks to support MagneticFlux and Position. Fixed typos. Made blocks for ElapsedTime more consistent with other objects. Added blocks to support Quaternion, Velocity, Orientation, AngularVelocity. Added blocks to support VuforiaTrackables, VuforiaTrackable, VuforiaLocalizer, VuforiaTrackableDefaultListener. Fixed a few blocks. Added type checking to new blocks. Updated to latest blockly. Added default variable blocks to navigation and matrix blocks. Fixed toolbox entry for openGLMatrix_rotation_withAxesArgs. When user downloads Blocks-generated op mode, only the .blk file is downloaded. When user uploads Blocks-generated op mode (.blk file), Javascript code is auto generated. Added DbgLog support. Added logging when a blocks file is read/written. Fixed bug to properly render blocks even if missing devices from configuration file. Added support for additional characters (not just alphanumeric) for the block file names (for download and upload). Added support for OpMode flavor (“Autonomous” or “TeleOp”) and group. Changes to Samples to prevent tutorial issues. Incorporated suggested changes from public pull 216 (“Replace .. paths”). Remove Servo Glitches when robot stopped. if user hits “Cancels” when editing a configuration file, clears the unsaved changes and reverts to original unmodified configuration. Added log info to help diagnose why the Robot Controller app was terminated (for example, by watch dog function). Added ability to transfer log from the controller. Fixed inconsistency for AngularVelocity Limit unbounded growth of data for telemetry. If user does not call telemetry.update() for LinearOpMode in a timely manner, data added for telemetry might get lost if size limit is exceeded. Version 2.35 (released on 16.10.06) Blockly programming mode - Removed unnecesary idle() call from blocks for new project. Version 2.30 (released on 16.10.05) Blockly programming mode: Mechanism added to save Blockly op modes from Programming Mode Server onto local device To avoid clutter, blocks are displayed in categorized folders Added support for DigitalChannel Added support for ModernRoboticsI2cCompassSensor Added support for ModernRoboticsI2cRangeSensor Added support for VoltageSensor Added support for AnalogInput Added support for AnalogOutput Fix for CompassSensor setMode block Vuforia Fix deadlock / make camera data available while Vuforia is running. Update to Vuforia 6.0.117 (recommended by Vuforia and Google to close security loophole). Fix for autonomous 30 second timer bug (where timer was in effect, even though it appeared to have timed out). opModeIsActive changes to allow cleanup after op mode is stopped (with enforced 2 second safety timeout). Fix to avoid reading i2c twice. Updated sample Op Modes. Improved logging and fixed intermittent freezing. Added digital I/O sample. Cleaned up device names in sample op modes to be consistent with Pushbot guide. Fix to allow use of IrSeekerSensorV3. Version 2.20 (released on 16.09.08) Support for Modern Robotics Compass Sensor. Support for Modern Robotics Range Sensor. Revise device names for Pushbot templates to match the names used in Pushbot guide. Fixed bug so that IrSeekerSensorV3 device is accessible as IrSeekerSensor in hardwareMap. Modified computer vision code to require an individual Vuforia license (per legal requirement from PTC). Minor fixes. Blockly enhancements: Support for Voltage Sensor. Support for Analog Input. Support for Analog Output. Support for Light Sensor. Support for Servo Controller. Version 2.10 (released on 16.09.03) Support for Adafruit IMU. Improvements to ModernRoboticsI2cGyro class Block on reset of z axis. isCalibrating() returns true while gyro is calibration. Updated sample gyro program. Blockly enhancements support for android.graphics.Color. added support for ElapsedTime. improved look and legibility of blocks. support for compass sensor. support for ultrasonic sensor. support for IrSeeker. support for LED. support for color sensor. support for CRServo prompt user to configure robot before using programming mode. Provides ability to disable audio cues. various bug fixes and improvements. Version 2.00 (released on 16.08.19) This is the new release for the upcoming 2016-2017 FIRST Tech Challenge Season. Channel change is enabled in the FTC Robot Controller app for Moto G 2nd and 3rd Gen phones. Users can now use annotations to register/disable their Op Modes. Changes in the Android SDK, JDK and build tool requirements (minsdk=19, java 1.7, build tools 23.0.3). Standardized units in analog input. Cleaned up code for existing analog sensor classes. setChannelMode and getChannelMode were REMOVED from the DcMotorController class. This is important - we no longer set the motor modes through the motor controller. setMode and getMode were added to the DcMotor class. ContinuousRotationServo class has been added to the FTC SDK. Range.clip() method has been overloaded so it can support this operation for int, short and byte integers. Some changes have been made (new methods added) on how a user can access items from the hardware map. Users can now set the zero power behavior for a DC motor so that the motor will brake or float when power is zero. Prototype Blockly Programming Mode has been added to FTC Robot Controller. Users can place the Robot Controller into this mode, and then use a device (such as a laptop) that has a Javascript enabled browser to write Blockly-based Op Modes directly onto the Robot Controller. Users can now configure the robot remotely through the FTC Driver Station app. Android Studio project supports Android Studio 2.1.x and compile SDK Version 23 (Marshmallow). Vuforia Computer Vision SDK integrated into FTC SDK. Users can use sample vision targets to get localization information on a standard FTC field. Project structure has been reorganized so that there is now a TeamCode package that users can use to place their local/custom Op Modes into this package. Inspection function has been integrated into the FTC Robot Controller and Driver Station Apps (Thanks Team HazMat… 9277 & 10650!). Audio cues have been incorporated into FTC SDK. Swap mechanism added to FTC Robot Controller configuration activity. For example, if you have two motor controllers on a robot, and you misidentified them in your configuration file, you can use the Swap button to swap the devices within the configuration file (so you do not have to manually re-enter in the configuration info for the two devices). Fix mechanism added to all user to replace an electronic module easily. For example, suppose a servo controller dies on your robot. You replace the broken module with a new module, which has a different serial number from the original servo controller. You can use the Fix button to automatically reconfigure your configuration file to use the serial number of the new module. Improvements made to fix resiliency and responsiveness of the system. For LinearOpMode the user now must for a telemetry.update() to update the telemetry data on the driver station. This update() mechanism ensures that the driver station gets the updated data properly and at the same time. The Auto Configure function of the Robot Controller is now template based. If there is a commonly used robot configuration, a template can be created so that the Auto Configure mechanism can be used to quickly configure a robot of this type. The logic to detect a runaway op mode (both in the LinearOpMode and OpMode types) and to abort the run, then auto recover has been improved/implemented. Fix has been incorporated so that Logitech F310 gamepad mappings will be correct for Marshmallow users. Release 16.07.08 For the ftc_app project, the gradle files have been modified to support Android Studio 2.1.x. Release 16.03.30 For the MIT App Inventor, the design blocks have new icons that better represent the function of each design component. Some changes were made to the shutdown logic to ensure the robust shutdown of some of our USB services. A change was made to LinearOpMode so as to allow a given instance to be executed more than once, which is required for the App Inventor. Javadoc improved/updated. Release 16.03.09 Changes made to make the FTC SDK synchronous (significant change!) waitOneFullHardwareCycle() and waitForNextHardwareCycle() are no longer needed and have been deprecated. runOpMode() (for a LinearOpMode) is now decoupled from the system's hardware read/write thread. loop() (for an OpMode) is now decoupled from the system's hardware read/write thread. Methods are synchronous. For example, if you call setMode(DcMotorController.RunMode.RESET_ENCODERS) for a motor, the encoder is guaranteed to be reset when the method call is complete. For legacy module (NXT compatible), user no longer has to toggle between read and write modes when reading from or writing to a legacy device. Changes made to enhance reliability/robustness during ESD event. Changes made to make code thread safe. Debug keystore added so that user-generated robot controller APKs will all use the same signed key (to avoid conflicts if a team has multiple developer laptops for example). Firmware version information for Modern Robotics modules are now logged. Changes made to improve USB comm reliability and robustness. Added support for voltage indicator for legacy (NXT-compatible) motor controllers. Changes made to provide auto stop capabilities for op modes. A LinearOpMode class will stop when the statements in runOpMode() are complete. User does not have to push the stop button on the driver station. If an op mode is stopped by the driver station, but there is a run away/uninterruptible thread persisting, the app will log an error message then force itself to crash to stop the runaway thread. Driver Station UI modified to display lowest measured voltage below current voltage (12V battery). Driver Station UI modified to have color background for current voltage (green=good, yellow=caution, red=danger, extremely low voltage). javadoc improved (edits and additional classes). Added app build time to About activity for driver station and robot controller apps. Display local IP addresses on Driver Station About activity. Added I2cDeviceSynchImpl. Added I2cDeviceSync interface. Added seconds() and milliseconds() to ElapsedTime for clarity. Added getCallbackCount() to I2cDevice. Added missing clearI2cPortActionFlag. Added code to create log messages while waiting for LinearOpMode shutdown. Fix so Wifi Direct Config activity will no longer launch multiple times. Added the ability to specify an alternate i2c address in software for the Modern Robotics gyro. Release 16.02.09 Improved battery checker feature so that voltage values get refreshed regularly (every 250 msec) on Driver Station (DS) user interface. Improved software so that Robot Controller (RC) is much more resilient and “self-healing” to USB disconnects: If user attempts to start/restart RC with one or more module missing, it will display a warning but still start up. When running an op mode, if one or more modules gets disconnected, the RC & DS will display warnings,and robot will keep on working in spite of the missing module(s). If a disconnected module gets physically reconnected the RC will auto detect the module and the user will regain control of the recently connected module. Warning messages are more helpful (identifies the type of module that’s missing plus its USB serial number). Code changes to fix the null gamepad reference when users try to reference the gamepads in the init() portion of their op mode. NXT light sensor output is now properly scaled. Note that teams might have to readjust their light threshold values in their op modes. On DS user interface, gamepad icon for a driver will disappear if the matching gamepad is disconnected or if that gamepad gets designated as a different driver. Robot Protocol (ROBOCOL) version number info is displayed in About screen on RC and DS apps. Incorporated a display filter on pairing screen to filter out devices that don’t use the “-“ format. This filter can be turned off to show all WiFi Direct devices. Updated text in License file. Fixed formatting error in OpticalDistanceSensor.toString(). Fixed issue on with a blank (“”) device name that would disrupt WiFi Direct Pairing. Made a change so that the WiFi info and battery info can be displayed more quickly on the DS upon connecting to RC. Improved javadoc generation. Modified code to make it easier to support language localization in the future. Release 16.01.04 Updated compileSdkVersion for apps Prevent Wifi from entering power saving mode removed unused import from driver station Corrrected "Dead zone" joystick code. LED.getDeviceName and .getConnectionInfo() return null apps check for ROBOCOL_VERSION mismatch Fix for Telemetry also has off-by-one errors in its data string sizing / short size limitations error User telemetry output is sorted. added formatting variants to DbgLog and RobotLog APIs code modified to allow for a long list of op mode names. changes to improve thread safety of RobocolDatagramSocket Fix for "missing hardware leaves robot controller disconnected from driver station" error fix for "fast tapping of Init/Start causes problems" (toast is now only instantiated on UI thread). added some log statements for thread life cycle. moved gamepad reset logic inside of initActiveOpMode() for robustness changes made to mitigate risk of race conditions on public methods. changes to try and flag when WiFi Direct name contains non-printable characters. fix to correct race condition between .run() and .close() in ReadWriteRunnableStandard. updated FTDI driver made ReadWriteRunnableStanard interface public. fixed off-by-one errors in Command constructor moved specific hardware implmentations into their own package. moved specific gamepad implemnatations to the hardware library. changed LICENSE file to new BSD version. fixed race condition when shutting down Modern Robotics USB devices. methods in the ColorSensor classes have been synchronized. corrected isBusy() status to reflect end of motion. corrected "back" button keycode. the notSupported() method of the GyroSensor class was changed to protected (it should not be public). Release 15.11.04.001 Added Support for Modern Robotics Gyro. The GyroSensor class now supports the MR Gyro Sensor. Users can access heading data (about Z axis) Users can also access raw gyro data (X, Y, & Z axes). Example MRGyroTest.java op mode included. Improved error messages More descriptive error messages for exceptions in user code. Updated DcMotor API Enable read mode on new address in setI2cAddress Fix so that driver station app resets the gamepads when switching op modes. USB-related code changes to make USB comm more responsive and to display more explicit error messages. Fix so that USB will recover properly if the USB bus returns garbage data. Fix USB initializtion race condition. Better error reporting during FTDI open. More explicit messages during USB failures. Fixed bug so that USB device is closed if event loop teardown method was not called. Fixed timer UI issue Fixed duplicate name UI bug (Legacy Module configuration). Fixed race condition in EventLoopManager. Fix to keep references stable when updating gamepad. For legacy Matrix motor/servo controllers removed necessity of appending "Motor" and "Servo" to controller names. Updated HT color sensor driver to use constants from ModernRoboticsUsbLegacyModule class. Updated MR color sensor driver to use constants from ModernRoboticsUsbDeviceInterfaceModule class. Correctly handle I2C Address change in all color sensors Updated/cleaned up op modes. Updated comments in LinearI2cAddressChange.java example op mode. Replaced the calls to "setChannelMode" with "setMode" (to match the new of the DcMotor method). Removed K9AutoTime.java op mode. Added MRGyroTest.java op mode (demonstrates how to use MR Gyro Sensor). Added MRRGBExample.java op mode (demonstrates how to use MR Color Sensor). Added HTRGBExample.java op mode (demonstrates how to use HT legacy color sensor). Added MatrixControllerDemo.java (demonstrates how to use legacy Matrix controller). Updated javadoc documentation. Updated release .apk files for Robot Controller and Driver Station apps. Release 15.10.06.002 Added support for Legacy Matrix 9.6V motor/servo controller. Cleaned up build.gradle file. Minor UI and bug fixes for driver station and robot controller apps. Throws error if Ultrasonic sensor (NXT) is not configured for legacy module port 4 or 5. Release 15.08.03.001 New user interfaces for FTC Driver Station and FTC Robot Controller apps. An init() method is added to the OpMode class. For this release, init() is triggered right before the start() method. Eventually, the init() method will be triggered when the user presses an "INIT" button on driver station. The init() and loop() methods are now required (i.e., need to be overridden in the user's op mode). The start() and stop() methods are optional. A new LinearOpMode class is introduced. Teams can use the LinearOpMode mode to create a linear (not event driven) program model. Teams can use blocking statements like Thread.sleep() within a linear op mode. The API for the Legacy Module and Core Device Interface Module have been updated. Support for encoders with the Legacy Module is now working. The hardware loop has been updated for better performance.

Skip to content github / docs Code Issues 80 Pull requests 35 Discussions Actions Projects 2 Security Insights Merge branch 'main' into 1862-Add-Travis-CI-migration-table 1862-Add-Travis-CI-migration-table (#1869, Iixixi/ZachryTylerWood#102, THEBOLCK79/docs#1, sbnbhk/docs#1) @martin389 martin389 committed on Dec 9, 2020 2 parents 2f9ec0c + 1588f50 commit 1a56ed136914e522f3a23ecc2be1c49f479a1a6a Showing 501 changed files with 5,397 additions and 1,362 deletions. 2 .github/allowed-actions.js @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ module.exports = [ 'rachmari/labeler@832d42ec5523f3c6d46e8168de71cd54363e3e2e', 'repo-sync/github-sync@3832fe8e2be32372e1b3970bbae8e7079edeec88', 'repo-sync/pull-request@33777245b1aace1a58c87a29c90321aa7a74bd7d', 'rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815', 'someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd', 'tjenkinson/gh-action-auto-merge-dependency-updates@cee2ac0', 'EndBug/add-and-commit@9358097a71ad9fb9e2f9624c6098c89193d83575' ] 72 .github/workflows/confirm-internal-staff-work-in-docs.yml @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ name: Confirm internal staff meant to post in public on: issues: types: - opened - reopened - transferred pull_request_target: types: - opened - reopened jobs: check-team-membership: runs-on: ubuntu-latest continue-on-error: true if: github.repository == 'github/docs' steps: - uses: actions/github-script@626af12fe9a53dc2972b48385e7fe7dec79145c9 with: github-token: ${{ secrets.DOCUBOT_FR_PROJECT_BOARD_WORKFLOWS_REPO_ORG_READ_SCOPES }} script: | // Only perform this action with GitHub employees try { await github.teams.getMembershipForUserInOrg({ org: 'github', team_slug: 'employees', username: context.payload.sender.login, }); } catch(err) { // An error will be thrown if the user is not a GitHub employee // If a user is not a GitHub employee, we should stop here and // Not send a notification return } // Don't perform this action with Docs team members try { await github.teams.getMembershipForUserInOrg({ org: 'github', team_slug: 'docs', username: context.payload.sender.login, }); // If the user is a Docs team member, we should stop here and not send // a notification return } catch(err) { // An error will be thrown if the user is not a Docs team member // If a user is not a Docs team member we should continue and send // the notification } const issueNo = context.number || context.issue.number // Create an issue in our private repo await github.issues.create({ owner: 'github', repo: 'docs-internal', title: `@${context.payload.sender.login} confirm that \#${issueNo} should be in the public github/docs repo`, body: `@${context.payload.sender.login} opened https://github.com/github/docs/issues/${issueNo} publicly in the github/docs repo, instead of the private github/docs-internal repo.\n\n@${context.payload.sender.login}, please confirm that this belongs in the public repo and that no sensitive information was disclosed by commenting below and closing the issue.\n\nIf this was not intentional and sensitive information was shared, please delete https://github.com/github/docs/issues/${issueNo} and notify us in the \#docs-open-source channel.\n\nThanks! \n\n/cc @github/docs @github/docs-engineering` }); throw new Error('A Hubber opened an issue on the public github/docs repo'); - name: Send Slack notification if a GitHub employee who isn't on the docs team opens an issue in public if: ${{ failure() && github.repository == 'github/docs' }} uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_OPEN_SOURCE_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} text: <@${{github.actor}}> opened https://github.com/github/docs/issues/${{ github.event.number || github.event.issue.number }} publicly on the github/docs repo instead of the private github/docs-internal repo. They have been notified via a new issue in the github/docs-internal repo to confirm this was intentional. 15 .github/workflows/js-lint.yml @@ -10,23 +10,8 @@ on: - translations jobs: see_if_should_skip: runs-on: ubuntu-latest outputs: should_skip: ${{ steps.skip_check.outputs.should_skip }} steps: - id: skip_check uses: fkirc/skip-duplicate-actions@36feb0d8d062137530c2e00bd278d138fe191289 with: cancel_others: 'false' github_token: ${{ github.token }} paths: '["**/*.js", "package*.json", ".github/workflows/js-lint.yml", ".eslint*"]' lint: runs-on: ubuntu-latest needs: see_if_should_skip if: ${{ needs.see_if_should_skip.outputs.should_skip != 'true' }} steps: - name: Check out repo uses: actions/checkout@5a4ac9002d0be2fb38bd78e4b4dbde5606d7042f 13 .github/workflows/repo-freeze-reminders.yml @@ -14,11 +14,10 @@ jobs: if: github.repository == 'github/docs-internal' steps: - name: Send Slack notification if repo is frozen uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: ${{ env.FREEZE == 'true' }} uses: rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815 env: SLACK_WEBHOOK: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_WEBHOOK }} SLACK_USERNAME: docs-repo-sync SLACK_ICON_EMOJI: ':freezing_face:' SLACK_COLOR: '#51A0D5' # Carolina Blue SLACK_MESSAGE: All repo-sync runs will fail for ${{ github.repository }} because the repo is currently frozen! with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: info text: All repo-sync runs will fail for ${{ github.repository }} because the repo is currently frozen! 54 .github/workflows/repo-sync-stalls.yml @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ name: Repo Sync Stalls on: workflow_dispatch: schedule: - cron: '*/30 * * * *' jobs: check-freezer: name: Check for deployment freezes runs-on: ubuntu-latest steps: - name: Exit if repo is frozen if: ${{ env.FREEZE == 'true' }} run: | echo 'The repo is currently frozen! Exiting this workflow.' exit 1 # prevents further steps from running repo-sync-stalls: runs-on: ubuntu-latest steps: - name: Check if repo sync is stalled uses: actions/github-script@626af12fe9a53dc2972b48385e7fe7dec79145c9 with: github-token: ${{ secrets.DOCUBOT_FR_PROJECT_BOARD_WORKFLOWS_REPO_ORG_READ_SCOPES }} script: | let pulls; const owner = context.repo.owner const repo = context.repo.repo try { pulls = await github.pulls.list({ owner: owner, repo: repo, head: `${owner}:repo-sync`, state: 'open' }); } catch(err) { throw err return } pulls.data.forEach(pr => { const timeDelta = Date.now() - Date.parse(pr.created_at); const minutesOpen = timeDelta / 1000 / 60; if (minutesOpen > 30) { core.setFailed('Repo sync appears to be stalled') } }) - name: Send Slack notification if workflow fails uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: failure() with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: failure text: Repo sync appears to be stalled for ${{github.repository}}. See https://github.com/${{github.repository}}/pulls?q=is%3Apr+is%3Aopen+repo+sync 16 .github/workflows/repo-sync.yml @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ name: Repo Sync on: workflow_dispatch: schedule: - cron: '*/15 * * * *' # every 15 minutes @@ -70,11 +71,10 @@ jobs: number: ${{ steps.find-pull-request.outputs.number }} - name: Send Slack notification if workflow fails uses: rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815 if: ${{ failure() }} env: SLACK_WEBHOOK: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_WEBHOOK }} SLACK_USERNAME: docs-repo-sync SLACK_ICON_EMOJI: ':ohno:' SLACK_COLOR: '#B90E0A' # Crimson SLACK_MESSAGE: The last repo-sync run for ${{github.repository}} failed. See https://github.com/${{github.repository}}/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Repo+Sync%22 uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: failure() with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: failure text: The last repo-sync run for ${{github.repository}} failed. See https://github.com/${{github.repository}}/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Repo+Sync%22 10 .github/workflows/sync-algolia-search-indices.yml @@ -33,8 +33,10 @@ jobs: GITHUB_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }} run: npm run sync-search - name: Send slack notification if workflow run fails uses: rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815 uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: failure() env: SLACK_WEBHOOK: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_WEBHOOK }} SLACK_MESSAGE: The last Algolia workflow run for ${{github.repository}} failed. Search actions for `workflow:Algolia` with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: failure text: The last Algolia workflow run for ${{github.repository}} failed. Search actions for `workflow:Algolia` 15 .github/workflows/yml-lint.yml @@ -10,23 +10,8 @@ on: - translations jobs: see_if_should_skip: runs-on: ubuntu-latest outputs: should_skip: ${{ steps.skip_check.outputs.should_skip }} steps: - id: skip_check uses: fkirc/skip-duplicate-actions@36feb0d8d062137530c2e00bd278d138fe191289 with: cancel_others: 'false' github_token: ${{ github.token }} paths: '["**/*.yml", "**/*.yaml", "package*.json", ".github/workflows/yml-lint.yml"]' lint: runs-on: ubuntu-latest needs: see_if_should_skip if: ${{ needs.see_if_should_skip.outputs.should_skip != 'true' }} steps: - name: Check out repo uses: actions/checkout@5a4ac9002d0be2fb38bd78e4b4dbde5606d7042f 4 README.md @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ If you've found a problem, you can open an issue using a [template](https://gith #### Solve an issue If you have a solution to one of the open issues, you will need to fork the repository and submit a PR using the [template](https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md#pull-request-template) that is visible automatically in the pull request body. For more details about this process, please check out [Getting Started with Contributing](/CONTRIBUTING.md). If you have a solution to one of the open issues, you will need to fork the repository and submit a pull request using the [template](https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md#pull-request-template) that is visible automatically in the pull request body. For more details about this process, please check out [Getting Started with Contributing](/CONTRIBUTING.md). #### Join us in discussions @@ -50,6 +50,8 @@ There are a few more things to know when you're getting started with this repo: In addition to the README you're reading right now, this repo includes other READMEs that describe the purpose of each subdirectory in more detail: - [content/README.md](content/README.md) - [content/graphql/README.md](content/graphql/README.md) - [content/rest/README.md](content/rest/README.md) - [contributing/README.md](contributing/README.md) - [data/README.md](data/README.md) - [data/reusables/README.md](data/reusables/README.md) BIN +164 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-group-hero.png Binary file not shown. BIN +75.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-ide-go-grant-access-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +175 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-individual-hero.png Binary file not shown. BIN +27.6 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-repository-ide-button-in-readme.png Binary file not shown. BIN +83.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-assign-deadline.png Binary file not shown. BIN +32.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-assignment-title.png Binary file not shown. BIN +27.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-autograding-click-pencil-or-trash.png Binary file not shown. BIN +72 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-choose-repository-visibility.png Binary file not shown. BIN +20.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-continue-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +23.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-create-assignment-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +76.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-grading-and-feedback.png Binary file not shown. BIN +53.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-new-assignment-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +134 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-online-ide.png Binary file not shown. BIN +77.8 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-pencil.png Binary file not shown. BIN +18.8 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-review-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +20.6 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-save-test-case-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +121 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-template-repository-in-list.png Binary file not shown. BIN +21.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-update-assignment.png Binary file not shown. BIN +76.9 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-view-ide.png Binary file not shown. BIN +96.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-view-test.png Binary file not shown. BIN +71.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-define-teams.png Binary file not shown. BIN +39.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-enable-feedback-pull-requests.png Binary file not shown. BIN +40.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-type-protected-file-paths.png Binary file not shown. BIN +330 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-actions-logs.png Binary file not shown. BIN +187 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-actions-tab.png Binary file not shown. BIN +94.9 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-click-grading-method.png Diff not rendered. BIN +57.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-click-pencil.png Diff not rendered. BIN +57.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-click-trash.png Diff not rendered. BIN +168 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +154 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-add-students-to-your-roster.png Diff not rendered. BIN +166 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-copy-credentials.png Diff not rendered. BIN +181 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +48.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-settings-click-connection-settings.png Diff not rendered. BIN +94 KB ...ges/help/classroom/classroom-settings-click-disconnect-from-your-lms-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +148 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-settings-click-lms.png Diff not rendered. BIN +149 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-assignment-in-list.png Diff not rendered. BIN +52.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-classroom-in-list.png Diff not rendered. BIN +49.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-create-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +30 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-create-roster-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +78.2 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-delete-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60.8 KB ...images/help/classroom/click-import-from-a-learning-management-system-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +51.9 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-new-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +83.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-organization.png Diff not rendered. BIN +28.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-settings.png Diff not rendered. BIN +29.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-students.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-update-students-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +127 KB assets/images/help/classroom/delete-classroom-click-delete-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +104 KB assets/images/help/classroom/delete-classroom-modal-with-warning.png Diff not rendered. BIN +264 KB assets/images/help/classroom/ide-makecode-arcade-version-control-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +69.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/ide-replit-version-control-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +234 KB assets/images/help/classroom/lms-github-classroom-credentials.png Diff not rendered. BIN +955 KB assets/images/help/classroom/probot-settings.gif Diff not rendered. BIN +113 KB assets/images/help/classroom/roster-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +40.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/settings-click-rename-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +41 KB assets/images/help/classroom/settings-type-classroom-name.png Diff not rendered. BIN +140 KB assets/images/help/classroom/setup-click-authorize-github-classroom.png Diff not rendered. BIN +102 KB assets/images/help/classroom/setup-click-authorize-github.png Diff not rendered. BIN +163 KB assets/images/help/classroom/setup-click-grant.png Diff not rendered. BIN +324 KB assets/images/help/classroom/students-click-delete-roster-button-in-modal.png Diff not rendered. BIN +91.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/students-click-delete-roster-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +48.2 KB assets/images/help/classroom/type-classroom-name.png Diff not rendered. BIN +174 KB assets/images/help/classroom/type-or-upload-student-identifiers.png Diff not rendered. BIN +83.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/use-drop-down-then-click-archive.png Diff not rendered. BIN +45.2 KB assets/images/help/classroom/use-drop-down-then-click-unarchive.png Diff not rendered. BIN +55.4 KB assets/images/help/discussions/choose-new-category.png Diff not rendered. BIN +56.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-and-move-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +59.7 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +65.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-for-category.png Diff not rendered. BIN +68.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-this-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +353 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-discussion-in-list.png Diff not rendered. BIN +41 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-edit-categories.png Diff not rendered. BIN +64.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-edit-for-category.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60.2 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-edit-pinned-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +104 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-new-category-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +98.2 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-pin-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +55.7 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-pin-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +104 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-save.png Diff not rendered. BIN +59.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-transfer-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60.2 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-transfer-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +63.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-unpin-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +59.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-unpin-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +140 KB assets/images/help/discussions/comment-mark-as-answer-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +136 KB assets/images/help/discussions/comment-marked-as-answer.png Diff not rendered. BIN +234 KB assets/images/help/discussions/customize-pinned-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +1.21 MB assets/images/help/discussions/discussons-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +139 KB assets/images/help/discussions/edit-category-details.png Diff not rendered. BIN +136 KB assets/images/help/discussions/edit-existing-category-details.png Diff not rendered. BIN +55.5 KB assets/images/help/discussions/existing-category-click-save-changes-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +680 KB assets/images/help/discussions/hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +307 KB assets/images/help/discussions/most-helpful.png Diff not rendered. BIN +52.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-category-click-create-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +132 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +140 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-select-category-dropdown-menu.png Diff not rendered. BIN +46.7 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-start-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +108 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-title-and-body-fields.png Diff not rendered. BIN +23.1 KB assets/images/help/discussions/public-repo-settings.png Diff not rendered. BIN +49.5 KB assets/images/help/discussions/repository-discussions-tab.png Diff not rendered. BIN +51.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/search-and-filter-controls.png Diff not rendered. BIN +44.4 KB assets/images/help/discussions/search-result.png Diff not rendered. BIN +35.4 KB assets/images/help/discussions/select-discussions-checkbox.png Diff not rendered. BIN +44.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/setup-discussions-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +95.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/toggle-allow-users-with-read-access-checkbox.png Diff not rendered. BIN +73 KB assets/images/help/discussions/unanswered-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +81.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/use-choose-a-repository-drop-down.png Diff not rendered. BIN +30.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/your-discussions.png Diff not rendered. BIN +563 KB assets/images/help/education/click-get-teacher-benefits.png Diff not rendered. BIN +116 KB assets/images/help/images/overview-actions-result-navigate.png Diff not rendered. BIN +150 KB assets/images/help/images/overview-actions-result-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +128 KB assets/images/help/images/workflow-graph-job.png Diff not rendered. BIN +135 KB assets/images/help/images/workflow-graph.png Diff not rendered. BIN +5.46 KB assets/images/help/organizations/update-profile-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +44.6 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/dependency-review-rich-diff.png Diff not rendered. BIN +24.6 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/dependency-review-source-diff.png Diff not rendered. BIN +214 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/dependency-review-vulnerability.png Diff not rendered. BIN +105 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/file-filter-menu-json.png Diff not rendered. BIN +22.5 KB (510%) assets/images/help/pull_requests/pull-request-tabs-changed-files.png Diff not rendered. BIN +45.2 KB assets/images/help/repository/actions-delete-artifact-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +122 KB assets/images/help/repository/actions-failed-pester-test-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +45.4 KB assets/images/help/repository/artifact-drop-down-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +54.5 KB assets/images/help/repository/cancel-check-suite-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +120 KB assets/images/help/repository/copy-link-button-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +77.6 KB assets/images/help/repository/delete-all-logs-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +326 KB assets/images/help/repository/docker-action-workflow-run-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +84.6 KB assets/images/help/repository/download-logs-drop-down-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +170 KB assets/images/help/repository/in-progress-run.png Diff not rendered. BIN +124 KB assets/images/help/repository/javascript-action-workflow-run-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +116 KB assets/images/help/repository/passing-data-between-jobs-in-a-workflow-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +80.8 KB assets/images/help/repository/rerun-checks-drop-down-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +41.2 KB assets/images/help/repository/search-log-box-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +133 KB assets/images/help/repository/super-linter-workflow-results-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +97.5 KB assets/images/help/repository/superlinter-lint-code-base-job-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN -128 KB assets/images/help/repository/upload-build-test-artifact.png Diff not rendered. BIN +27.5 KB (170%) assets/images/help/repository/view-run-billable-time.png Diff not rendered. BIN +54.8 KB assets/images/help/repository/workflow-run-kebab-horizontal-icon-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +7.54 KB assets/images/help/settings/appearance-tab.png Diff not rendered. BIN +39.7 KB assets/images/help/settings/theme-settings-radio-buttons.png Diff not rendered. BIN +11.1 KB assets/images/help/settings/update-theme-preference-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +22.5 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/billing-account-switcher.png Diff not rendered. BIN +6.37 KB (150%) assets/images/help/sponsors/edit-sponsorship-payment-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +34.8 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/link-account-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +12.8 KB (170%) assets/images/help/sponsors/manage-your-sponsorship-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +20.6 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/organization-update-email-textbox.png Diff not rendered. BIN +13.5 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/pay-prorated-amount-link.png Diff not rendered. BIN +34.7 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/select-an-account-drop-down.png Diff not rendered. BIN +17 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsor-as-drop-down-menu.png Diff not rendered. BIN +15.8 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsoring-as-drop-down-menu.png Diff not rendered. BIN +16.1 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsoring-settings-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +29.5 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsoring-tab.png Diff not rendered. BIN +7.91 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/update-checkbox-manage.png Diff not rendered. BIN +43 KB (160%) assets/images/marketplace/marketplace-request-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +53.6 KB assets/images/marketplace/marketplace_verified_creator_badges_apps.png Diff not rendered. 6 content/actions/creating-actions/creating-a-docker-container-action.md @@ -226,6 +226,10 @@ jobs: ``` {% endraw %} From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click **A job to say hello**. {% endif %}You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} 6 content/actions/creating-actions/creating-a-javascript-action.md @@ -261,9 +261,11 @@ jobs: ``` {% endraw %} From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click **A job to say hello**. {% endif %}You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% elsif currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %}  {% else %}  4 content/actions/guides/about-packaging-with-github-actions.md @@ -25,7 +25,11 @@ Creating a package at the end of a continuous integration workflow can help duri Now, when reviewing a pull request, you'll be able to look at the workflow run and download the artifact that was produced. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} This will let you run the code in the pull request on your machine, which can help with debugging or testing the pull request. 4 content/actions/guides/building-and-testing-powershell.md @@ -60,7 +60,11 @@ jobs: * `run: Test-Path resultsfile.log` - Check whether a file called `resultsfile.log` is present in the repository's root directory. * `Should -Be $true` - Uses Pester to define an expected result. If the result is unexpected, then {% data variables.product.prodname_actions %} flags this as a failed test. For example: {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} * `Invoke-Pester Unit.Tests.ps1 -Passthru` - Uses Pester to execute tests defined in a file called `Unit.Tests.ps1`. For example, to perform the same test described above, the `Unit.Tests.ps1` will contain the following: ``` 7 content/actions/guides/storing-workflow-data-as-artifacts.md @@ -108,8 +108,6 @@ jobs: path: output/test/code-coverage.html ```  {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} ### Configuring a custom artifact retention period @@ -238,7 +236,12 @@ jobs: echo The result is $value ``` The workflow run will archive any artifacts that it generated. For more information on downloading archived artifacts, see "[Downloading workflow artifacts](/actions/managing-workflow-runs/downloading-workflow-artifacts)." {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" %} 8 content/actions/index.md @@ -68,18 +68,18 @@ versions: <h2 class="mb-2 font-mktg h1">Code examples</h2> <div class="pr-lg-3 mb-5 mt-3"> <input class="js-code-example-filter input-lg py-2 px-3 col-12 col-lg-8 form-control" placeholder="Search code examples" type="search" autocomplete="off" aria-label="Search code examples"/> <input class="js-filter-card-filter input-lg py-2 px-3 col-12 col-lg-8 form-control" placeholder="Search code examples" type="search" autocomplete="off" aria-label="Search code examples"/> </div> <div class="d-flex flex-wrap gutter"> {% render 'code-example-card' for actionsCodeExamples as example %} </div> <button class="js-code-example-show-more btn btn-outline float-right">Show more {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</button> <button class="js-filter-card-show-more btn btn-outline float-right">Show more {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</button> <div class="js-code-example-no-results d-none py-4 text-center text-gray font-mktg"> <div class="js-filter-card-no-results d-none py-4 text-center text-gray font-mktg"> <div class="mb-3">{% octicon "search" width="24" %}</div> <h3 class="text-normal">Sorry, there is no result for <strong class="js-code-example-filter-value"></strong></h3> <h3 class="text-normal">Sorry, there is no result for <strong class="js-filter-card-value"></strong></h3> <p class="my-3 f4">It looks like we don't have an example that fits your filter.<br>Try another filter or add your code example</p> <a href="https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/data/variables/action_code_examples.yml">Learn how to add a code example {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</a> </div> 11 content/actions/learn-github-actions/introduction-to-github-actions.md @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ In this diagram, you can see the workflow file you just created and how the {% d ### Viewing the job's activity Once your job has started running, you can view each step's activity on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. Once your job has started running, you can {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}see a visualization graph of the run's progress and {% endif %}view each step's activity on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} 1. Under your repository name, click **Actions**. @@ -213,7 +213,14 @@ Once your job has started running, you can view each step's activity on {% data  1. Under "Workflow runs", click the name of the run you want to see.  {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %} 1. Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click the job you want to see.  {% endif %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %} 1. View the results of each step.  {% elsif currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. Click on the job name to see the results of each step.  {% else %} 7 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/canceling-a-workflow.md @@ -17,9 +17,14 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. From the list of workflow runs, click the name of the `queued` or `in progress` run that you want to cancel.  1. In the upper-right corner of the workflow, click **Cancel workflow**. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} ### Steps {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} takes to cancel a workflow run 4 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/downloading-workflow-artifacts.md @@ -20,4 +20,8 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. Under **Artifacts**, click the artifact you want to download. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} 1 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/index.md @@ -18,6 +18,7 @@ versions: {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-beta %} {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-github-hosted-runners %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}{% link_in_list /using-the-visualization-graph %}{% endif %} {% link_in_list /viewing-workflow-run-history %} {% link_in_list /using-workflow-run-logs %} {% link_in_list /manually-running-a-workflow %} 3 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/re-running-a-workflow.md @@ -16,5 +16,4 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. In the upper-right corner of the workflow, use the **Re-run jobs** drop-down menu, and select **Re-run all jobs**.  1. In the upper-right corner of the workflow, use the **Re-run jobs** drop-down menu, and select **Re-run all jobs**.{% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}{% else %}{% endif %} 4 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/removing-workflow-artifacts.md @@ -27,7 +27,11 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. Under **Artifacts**, click {% octicon "trashcan" aria-label="The trashcan icon" %} next to the artifact you want to remove. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} ### Setting the retention period for an artifact 23 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/using-the-visualization-graph.md @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ --- title: Using the visualization graph intro: Every workflow run generates a real-time graph that illustrates the run progress. You can use this graph to monitor and debug workflows. product: '{% data reusables.gated-features.actions %}' versions: free-pro-team: '*' enterprise-server: '>=3.1' --- {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-beta %} {% data reusables.actions.visualization-beta %} {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-github-hosted-runners %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. The graph displays each job in the workflow. An icon to the left of the job name indicates the status of the job. Lines between jobs indicate dependencies.  2. Click on a job to view the job log.  18 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/using-workflow-run-logs.md @@ -45,7 +45,11 @@ You can search the build logs for a particular step. When you search logs, only {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-job-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. In the upper-right corner of the log output, in the **Search logs** search box, type a search query. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% else %} 1. To expand each step you want to include in your search, click the step.  @@ -63,8 +67,12 @@ You can download the log files from your workflow run. You can also download a w {% data reusables.repositories.view-run-superlinter %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-job-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} and select **Download log archive**. 1. In the upper right corner, click {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}{% octicon "gear" aria-label="The gear icon" %}{% else %}{% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %}{% endif %} and select **Download log archive**. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% else %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} and select **Download log archive**.  @@ -80,9 +88,17 @@ You can delete the log files from your workflow run. {% data reusables.repositor {% data reusables.repositories.view-run-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %}. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} 2. To delete the log files, click the **Delete all logs** button and review the confirmation prompt. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} After deleting logs, the **Delete all logs** button is removed to indicate that no log files remain in the workflow run. {% else %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %}. 2 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/viewing-job-execution-time.md @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Billable job execution minutes are only shown for jobs run on private repositori {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. Under the job summary, you can view the job's execution time. To view the billable job execution time, click **Run and billable time details**. 1. Under the job summary, you can view the job's execution time. To view details about the billable job execution time, click the time under **Billable time**.  {% note %} 5 content/actions/quickstart.md @@ -60,8 +60,13 @@ Committing the workflow file in your repository triggers the `push` event and ru {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow-superlinter %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %} 1. Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click the **Lint code base** job.  {% else %} 1. In the left sidebar, click the **Lint code base** job.  {% endif %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-failed-job-results-superlinter %} ### More starter workflows 49 content/developers/github-marketplace/about-github-marketplace.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: About GitHub Marketplace intro: 'Learn the basics to prepare your app for review before joining {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}.' intro: 'Learn about {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} where you can share your apps and actions publicly with all {% data variables.product.product_name %} users.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/getting-started/ - /marketplace/getting-started @@ -14,52 +14,41 @@ versions: {% data reusables.actions.actions-not-verified %} To learn about publishing {% data variables.product.prodname_actions %} in the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, see "[Publishing actions in GitHub Marketplace](/actions/creating-actions/publishing-actions-in-github-marketplace)." To learn about publishing {% data variables.product.prodname_actions %} in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, see "[Publishing actions in GitHub Marketplace](/actions/creating-actions/publishing-actions-in-github-marketplace)." ### Apps You can list verified and unverified apps in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Unverified apps do not go through the security, testing, and verification cycle {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} requires for verified apps. Anyone can share their apps with other users on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} but only listings that are verified by {% data variables.product.company_short %} can include paid plans. For more information, see "[About verified creators](/developers/github-marketplace/about-verified-creators)." Verified apps have a green badge in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Unverified apps have a grey badge next to their listing and are only available as free apps. If you're interested in creating an app for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, but you're new to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %} or {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s, see "[Building {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}](/developers/apps/building-github-apps)" or "[Building {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s](/developers/apps/building-oauth-apps)."  If you're interested in creating an app for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, but you're new to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %} and {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s, see "[Building apps](/apps/)." {% data reusables.marketplace.github_apps_preferred %}, although you can list both OAuth and {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. See "[Differences between GitHub and OAuth apps](/apps/differences-between-apps/)" for more details. To learn more about switching from OAuth to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}, see [Migrating OAuth Apps to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s](/apps/migrating-oauth-apps-to-github-apps/). {% data reusables.marketplace.github_apps_preferred %}, although you can list both OAuth and {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. For more information, see "[Differences between {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %} and {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s](/apps/differences-between-apps/)" and "[Migrating {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}](/apps/migrating-oauth-apps-to-github-apps/)." If you have questions about {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, please contact {% data variables.contact.contact_support %} directly. #### Unverified Apps Unverified apps do not need to meet the "[Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/)" or go through the "[Security review process](/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/)". {% data reusables.marketplace.unverified-apps %} Having a published paid plan will prevent you from being able to submit an unverified app. You must remove paid plans or keep them in draft mode before publishing an unverified app. To list your unverified app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you only need to create a "[Listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/)" and submit it as an unverified listing. {% data reusables.marketplace.launch-with-free %} ### Publishing an app to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} #### Verified Apps When you have finished creating your app, you can share it with other users by publishing it to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. In summary, the process is: If you've already built an app and you're interested in submitting a verified listing in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, start here: 1. Review your app carefully to ensure that it will behave as expected in other repositories and that it follows best practice guidelines. For more information, see "[Security best practices for apps](/developers/github-marketplace/security-best-practices-for-apps)" and "[Requirements for listing an app](/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app#best-practice-for-customer-experience)." 1. [Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/)<br/>Learn about requirements, guidelines, and the app submission process. 1. Add webhook events to the app to track user billing requests. For more information about the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API, webhook events, and billing requests, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." 1. [Integrating with the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/)<br/>Before you can list your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you'll need to integrate billing flows using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API and webhook events. 1. Create a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing. For more information, see "[Drafting a listing for your app](/developers/github-marketplace/drafting-a-listing-for-your-app)." 1. [Listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/) <br/>Create a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, configure webhook settings, and set up pricing plans. 1. Add a pricing plan. For more information, see "[Setting pricing plans for your listing](/developers/github-marketplace/setting-pricing-plans-for-your-listing)." 1. [Selling your app](/marketplace/selling-your-app/)<br/>Learn about pricing plans, billing cycles, and how to receive payment from {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} for your app. 1. Check whether your app meets the requirements for listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} as a free or a paid app. For more information, see "[Requirements for listing an app](/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app)." 1. [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Insights](/marketplace/github-marketplace-insights/)<br/>See how your app is performing in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. You can use metrics collected by {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} to guide your marketing campaign and be successful in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. 1. Read and accept the terms of the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)." 1. [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} transactions](/marketplace/github-marketplace-transactions/)<br/>Download and view transaction data for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing. 1. Submit your listing for publication in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, requesting verification if you want to sell the app. For more information, see "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication)." ### Reviewing your app An onboarding expert will contact you with any questions or further steps. For example, if you have added a paid plan, you will need to complete the verification process and complete financial onboarding. As soon as your listing is approved the app is published to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. We want to make sure that the apps offered on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} are safe, secure, and well tested. The {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding specialists will review your app to ensure that it meets all requirements. Follow the guidelines in these articles before submitting your app: ### Seeing how your app is performing You can access metrics and transactions for your listing. For more information, see: * [Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/) * [Security review process](/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/) - "[Viewing metrics for your listing](/developers/github-marketplace/viewing-metrics-for-your-listing)" - "[Viewing transactions for your listing](/developers/github-marketplace/viewing-transactions-for-your-listing)" 43 content/developers/github-marketplace/about-verified-creators.md @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ --- title: About verified creators intro: 'Each organization that wants to sell apps on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must follow a verification process. Their identity is checked and their billing process reviewed.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### About verified creators A verified creator is an organization that {% data variables.product.company_short %} has checked. Anyone can share their apps with other users on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} but only organizations that are verified by {% data variables.product.company_short %} can sell apps. For more information about organizations, see "[About organizations](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/about-organizations)." The verification process aims to protect users. For example, it verifies the seller's identity, checks that their {% data variables.product.product_name %} organization is set up securely, and that they can be contacted for support. After passing the verification checks, any apps that the organization lists on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} are shown with a verified creator badge {% octicon "verified" aria-label="Verified creator badge" %}. The organization can now add paid plans to any of their apps. Each app with a paid plan also goes through a financial onboarding process to check that it's set up to handle billing correctly.  In addition to the verified creator badge, you'll also see badges for unverified and verified apps. These apps were published using the old method for verifying individual apps.  For information on finding apps to use, see "[Searching {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-github-marketplace)." ### About the verification process The first time you request verification for a listing of one of your apps, you will enter the verification process. An onboarding expert will guide you through the process. This includes checking: - Profile information - The basic profile information is populated accurately and appropriately. - Security - The organization has enabled two-factor authentication. - Verified domain - The organization has verified the domain of the site URL. - Purchase webhook event - The event is handled correctly by the app. When your organization is verified, all your apps are shown with a verified creator badge. You are now able to offer paid plans for any of your apps. For more information about the requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, see "[Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/)." {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)." {% note %} **Note:** This verification process for apps replaces the previous process where individual apps were verified. The current process is similar to the verification process for actions. If you have apps that were verified under the old process, these will not be affected by the changes. The {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} team will contact you with details of how to migrate to organization-based verification. {% endnote %} 12 content/developers/github-marketplace/billing-customers.md @@ -13,17 +13,17 @@ versions: ### Understanding the billing cycle Customers can choose a monthly or yearly billing cycle when they purchase your app. All changes customers make to the billing cycle and plan selection will trigger a `marketplace_purchase` event. You can refer to the `marketplace_purchase` webhook payload to see which billing cycle a customer selects and when the next billing date begins (`effective_date`). For more information about webhook payloads, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} webhook events](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/)." Customers can choose a monthly or yearly billing cycle when they purchase your app. All changes customers make to the billing cycle and plan selection will trigger a `marketplace_purchase` event. You can refer to the `marketplace_purchase` webhook payload to see which billing cycle a customer selects and when the next billing date begins (`effective_date`). For more information about webhook payloads, see "[Webhook events for the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API](/developers/github-marketplace/webhook-events-for-the-github-marketplace-api)." ### Providing billing services in your app's UI Customers must be able to perform the following actions from your app's website: - Customers must be able to modify or cancel their {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} plans for personal and organizational accounts separately. Customers should be able to perform the following actions from your app's website: - Customers should be able to modify or cancel their {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} plans for personal and organizational accounts separately. {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-billing-ui-requirements %} ### Billing services for upgrades, downgrades, and cancellations Follow these guidelines for upgrades, downgrades, and cancellations to maintain a clear and consistent billing process. For more detailed instructions about the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events, see "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)." Follow these guidelines for upgrades, downgrades, and cancellations to maintain a clear and consistent billing process. For more detailed instructions about the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." You can use the `marketplace_purchase` webhook's `effective_date` key to determine when a plan change will occur and periodically synchronize the [List accounts for a plan](/rest/reference/apps#list-accounts-for-a-plan). @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ When a customer upgrades their pricing plan or changes their billing cycle from {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-failed-purchase-event %} For information about building upgrade and downgrade workflows into your app, see "[Upgrading and downgrading plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/upgrading-and-downgrading-plans/)." For information about building upgrade and downgrade workflows into your app, see "[Handling plan changes](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-changes)." #### Downgrades and cancellations @@ -45,4 +45,4 @@ When a customer cancels a plan, you must: {% data reusables.marketplace.cancellation-clarification %} - Enable them to upgrade the plan through GitHub if they would like to continue the plan at a later time. For information about building cancellation workflows into your app, see "[Cancelling plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/)." For information about building cancellation workflows into your app, see "[Handling plan cancellations](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-cancellations)." 20 ...nt/developers/github-marketplace/customer-experience-best-practices-for-apps.md @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ --- title: Customer experience best practices for apps intro: 'Guidelines for creating an app that will be easy to use and understand.' shortTitle: Customer experience best practice versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- If you follow these best practices it will help you to provide a good customer experience. ### Customer communication - Marketing materials for the app should accurately represent the app's behavior. - Apps should include links to user-facing documentation that describe how to set up and use the app. - Customers should be able to see what type of plan they have in the billing, profile, or account settings section of the app. - Customers should be able to install and use your app on both a personal account and an organization account. They should be able to view and manage the app on those accounts separately. ### Plan management {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-billing-ui-requirements %} 4 content/developers/github-marketplace/drafting-a-listing-for-your-app.md @@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ Once you've created a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} draft li ### Submitting your app Once you've completed your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, you can submit your listing for review from the **Overview** page. You'll need to read and accept the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)," and then you can click **Submit for review**. After you submit your app for review, the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding team will contact you with additional information about the onboarding process. You can learn more about the onboarding and security review process in "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/)." Once you've completed your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, you can submit your listing for review from the **Overview** page. You'll need to read and accept the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)," and then you can click **Submit for review**. After you submit your app for review, an onboarding expert will contact you with additional information about the onboarding process. You can learn more about the onboarding and security review process in "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/)." ### Removing a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing If you no longer want to list your app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, contact [marketplace@github.com](mailto:marketplace@github.com) to remove your listing. If you no longer want to list your app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, contact {% data variables.contact.contact_support %} to remove your listing. 2 content/developers/github-marketplace/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials.md @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ GitHub then sends the [`marketplace_purchase`](/webhooks/event-payloads/#marketp Read the `effective_date` and `marketplace_purchase` object from the `marketplace_purchase` webhook to determine which plan the customer purchased, when the billing cycle starts, and when the next billing cycle begins. If your app offers a free trial, read the `marketplace_purchase[on_free_trial]` attribute from the webhook. If the value is `true`, your app will need to track the free trial start date (`effective_date`) and the date the free trial ends (`free_trial_ends_on`). Use the `free_trial_ends_on` date to display the remaining days left in a free trial in your app's UI. You can do this in either a banner or in your [billing UI](/marketplace/selling-your-app/billing-customers-in-github-marketplace/#providing-billing-services-in-your-apps-ui). To learn how to handle cancellations before a free trial ends, see "[Cancelling plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/)." See "[Upgrading and downgrading plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/upgrading-and-downgrading-plans/)" to find out how to transition a free trial to a paid plan when a free trial expires. If your app offers a free trial, read the `marketplace_purchase[on_free_trial]` attribute from the webhook. If the value is `true`, your app will need to track the free trial start date (`effective_date`) and the date the free trial ends (`free_trial_ends_on`). Use the `free_trial_ends_on` date to display the remaining days left in a free trial in your app's UI. You can do this in either a banner or in your [billing UI](/marketplace/selling-your-app/billing-customers-in-github-marketplace/#providing-billing-services-in-your-apps-ui). To learn how to handle cancellations before a free trial ends, see "[Handling plan cancellations](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-cancellations)." See "[Handling plan changes](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-changes)" to find out how to transition a free trial to a paid plan when a free trial expires. See "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} webhook events](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/)" for an example of the `marketplace_purchase` event payload. 6 content/developers/github-marketplace/index.md @@ -11,8 +11,10 @@ versions: {% topic_link_in_list /creating-apps-for-github-marketplace %} {% link_in_list /about-github-marketplace %} {% link_in_list /about-verified-creators %} {% link_in_list /requirements-for-listing-an-app %} {% link_in_list /security-review-process-for-submitted-apps %} {% link_in_list /security-best-practices-for-apps %} {% link_in_list /customer-experience-best-practices-for-apps %} {% link_in_list /viewing-metrics-for-your-listing %} {% link_in_list /viewing-transactions-for-your-listing %} {% topic_link_in_list /using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app %} @@ -27,7 +29,7 @@ versions: {% link_in_list /writing-a-listing-description-for-your-app %} {% link_in_list /setting-pricing-plans-for-your-listing %} {% link_in_list /configuring-a-webhook-to-notify-you-of-plan-changes %} {% link_in_list /submitting-your-listing-for-review %} {% link_in_list /submitting-your-listing-for-publication %} {% topic_link_in_list /selling-your-app-on-github-marketplace %} {% link_in_list /pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps %} {% link_in_list /billing-customers %} 32 content/developers/github-marketplace/pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps.md @@ -10,35 +10,45 @@ versions: {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can be free, flat rate, or per-unit, and GitHub lists the price in US dollars. Customers purchase your app using a payment method attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account, without having to leave GitHub.com. You don't have to write code to perform billing transactions, but you will have to handle [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows) for purchase events. {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can be free, flat rate, or per-unit. Prices are set, displayed, and processed in US dollars. Paid plans are restricted to verified listings. Customers purchase your app using a payment method attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account, without having to leave {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}. You don't have to write code to perform billing transactions, but you will have to handle events from the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API. For more information, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." If the app you're listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} has multiple plan options, you can set up corresponding pricing plans. For example, if your app has two plan options, an open source plan and a pro plan, you can set up a free pricing plan for your open source plan and a flat pricing plan for your pro plan. Each {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing must have an annual and a monthly price for every plan that's listed. For more information on how to create a pricing plan, see "[Setting a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing's pricing plan](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/)." {% note %} {% data reusables.marketplace.free-plan-note %} **Note:** If you're listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can't list your app with a free pricing plan if you offer a paid service outside of {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. ### Types of pricing plans {% endnote %} #### Free pricing plans ### Types of pricing plans {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} Free plans are completely free for users. If you set up a free pricing plan, you cannot charge users that choose the free pricing plan for the use of your app. You can create both free and paid plans for your listing. All apps need to handle events for new purchases and cancellations. Apps that only have free plans do not need to handle events for free trials, upgrades, and downgrades. For more information, see: "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." If you add a paid plan to an app that you've already listed in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} as a free service, you'll need to request verification for the app and go through financial onboarding. #### Paid pricing plans **Free pricing plans** are completely free for users. If you set up a free pricing plan, you cannot charge users that choose the free pricing plan for the use of your app. You can create both free and paid plans for your listing. Unverified free apps do not need to implement any billing flows. Free apps that are verified by Github need to implement billing flows for new purchases and cancellations, but do not need to implement billing flows for free trials, upgrades, and downgrades. If you add a paid plan to an app that you've already listed in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} as a free service, you'll need to resubmit the app for review. There are two types of paid pricing plan: **Flat rate pricing plans** charge a set fee on a monthly and yearly basis. - Flat rate pricing plans charge a set fee on a monthly and yearly basis. **Per-unit pricing plans** charge a set fee on either a monthly or yearly basis for a unit that you specify. A "unit" can be anything you'd like (for example, a user, seat, or person). - Per-unit pricing plans charge a set fee on either a monthly or yearly basis for a unit that you specify. A "unit" can be anything you'd like (for example, a user, seat, or person). **Marketplace free trials** provide 14-day free trials of OAuth or GitHub Apps to customers. When you [set up a Marketplace pricing plan](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/), you can select the option to provide a free trial for flat-rate or per-unit pricing plans. You may also want to offer free trials. These provide free, 14-day trials of OAuth or GitHub Apps to customers. When you set up a Marketplace pricing plan, you can select the option to provide a free trial for flat-rate or per-unit pricing plans. ### Free trials Customers can start a free trial for any available paid plan on a Marketplace listing, but will not be able to create more than one free trial for a Marketplace product. Customers can start a free trial for any paid plan on a Marketplace listing that includes free trials. However, customers cannot create more than one free trial per marketplace product. Free trials have a fixed length of 14 days. Customers are notified 4 days before the end of their trial period (on day 11 of the free trial) that their plan will be upgraded. At the end of a free trial, customers will be auto-enrolled into the plan they are trialing if they do not cancel. See "[New purchases and free trials](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/)" for details on how to handle free trials in your app. For more information, see: "[Handling new purchases and free trials](/developers/github-marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/)." {% note %} 61 content/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Requirements for listing an app intro: 'Apps on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must meet the requirements outlined on this page before our {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding specialists will approve the listing.' intro: 'Apps on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must meet the requirements outlined on this page before the listing can be published.' redirect_from: - /apps/adding-integrations/listing-apps-on-github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/ - /apps/marketplace/listing-apps-on-github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/ @@ -12,49 +12,62 @@ versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- <!--UI-LINK: Displayed as a link on the https://github.com/marketplace/new page.--> The requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} vary according to whether you want to offer a free or a paid app. Before you submit your app for review, you must read and accept the terms of the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)." You'll accept the terms within your [draft listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/) on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. Once you've submitted your app, one of the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding specialists will reach out to you with more information about the onboarding process, and review your app to ensure it meets these requirements: ### Requirements for all {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listings ### User experience All listings on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} should be for tools that provide value to the {% data variables.product.product_name %} community. When you submit your listing for publication, you must read and accept the terms of the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)." - {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s should have a minimum of 100 installations. - {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s should have a minimum of 200 users. #### User experience requirements for all apps All listings should meet the following requirements, regardless of whether they are for a free or paid app. - Listings must not actively persuade users away from {% data variables.product.product_name %}. - Listings must include valid contact information for the publisher. - Listings must have a relevant description of the application. - Listings must specify a pricing plan. - Apps must provide value to customers and integrate with the platform in some way beyond authentication. - Apps must be publicly available in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} and cannot be in beta or available by invite only. - Apps cannot actively persuade users away from {% data variables.product.product_name %}. - Marketing materials for the app must accurately represent the app's behavior. - Apps must include links to user-facing documentation that describe how to set up and use the app. - When a customer purchases an app and GitHub redirects them to the app's installation URL, the app must begin the OAuth flow immediately. For details, see "[Handling new purchases and free trials](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/#step-3-authorization)." - Apps must have webhook events set up to notify the publisher of any plan changes or cancellations using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API. For more information, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." - Customers must be able to install your app and select repositories on both a personal and organization account. They should be able to view and manage those accounts separately. For more information on providing a good customer experience, see "[Customer experience best practices for apps](/developers/github-marketplace/customer-experience-best-practices-for-apps)." ### Brand and listing #### Brand and listing requirements for all apps - Apps that use GitHub logos must follow the "[{% data variables.product.product_name %} Logos and Usage](https://github.com/logos)" guidelines. - Apps that use GitHub logos must follow the {% data variables.product.company_short %} guidelines. For more information, see "[{% data variables.product.company_short %} Logos and Usage](https://github.com/logos)." - Apps must have a logo, feature card, and screenshots images that meet the recommendations provided in "[Writing {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing descriptions](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/writing-github-marketplace-listing-descriptions/)." - Listings must include descriptions that are well written and free of grammatical errors. For guidance in writing your listing, see "[Writing {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing descriptions](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/writing-github-marketplace-listing-descriptions/)." ### Security To protect your customers, we recommend that you also follow security best practices. For more information, see "[Security best practices for apps](/developers/github-marketplace/security-best-practices-for-apps)." ### Considerations for free apps Apps will go through a security review before being listed on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. A successful review will meet the requirements and follow the security best practices listed in "[Security review process](/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/)." For information on the review process, contact [marketplace@github.com](mailto:marketplace@github.com). {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} ### Requirements for paid apps In addition to the requirements for all apps above, each app that you offer as a paid service on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must also meet the following requirements: - {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s should have a minimum of 100 installations. - {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s should have a minimum of 200 users. - All paid apps must handle {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events for new purchases, upgrades, downgrades, cancellations, and free trials. For more information, see "[Billing requirements for paid apps](#billing-requirements-for-paid-apps)" below. - Publishing organizations must have a verified domain and must enable two-factor authentication. For more information, see "[Requiring two-factor authentication in your organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/requiring-two-factor-authentication-in-your-organization.") ### Billing flows When you are ready to publish the app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} you must request verification for the listing. Your app must integrate [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows) using the [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} webhook event](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/). {% note %} #### Free apps The verification process is open to organizations. {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)." {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} If you are listing a free app, you'll need to meet these requirements: {% endnote %} - Customers must be able to see that they have a free plan in the billing, profile, or account settings section of the app. - When a customer cancels your app, you must follow the flow for [cancelling plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/). ### Billing requirements for paid apps #### Paid apps Your app does not need to handle payments but does need to use {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events to manage new purchases, upgrades, downgrades, cancellations, and free trials. For information about how integrate these events into your app, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." To offer your app as a paid service, you'll need to meet these requirements to list your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}: Using GitHub's billing API allows customers to purchase an app without leaving GitHub and to pay for the service with the payment method already attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account. - To sell your app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, it must use GitHub's billing system. Your app does not need to handle payments but does need to use "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/)" to manage new purchases, upgrades, downgrades, cancellations, and free trials. See "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)" to learn about how to integrate these events into your app. Using GitHub's billing system allows customers to purchase an app without leaving GitHub and pay for the service with the payment method already attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account. - Apps must support both monthly and annual billing for paid subscriptions purchases. - Listings may offer any combination of free and paid plans. Free plans are optional but encouraged. For more information, see "[Setting a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing's pricing plan](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/)." {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-billing-ui-requirements %} 60 content/developers/github-marketplace/security-best-practices-for-apps.md @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ --- title: Security best practices for apps intro: 'Guidelines for preparing a secure app to share on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/ - /marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process - /developers/github-marketplace/security-review-process-for-submitted-apps shortTitle: Security best practice versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- If you follow these best practices it will help you to provide a secure user experience. ### Authorization, authentication, and access control We recommend creating a GitHub App rather than an OAuth App. {% data reusables.marketplace.github_apps_preferred %}. See "[Differences between GitHub Apps and OAuth Apps](/apps/differences-between-apps/)" for more details. - Apps should use the principle of least privilege and should only request the OAuth scopes and GitHub App permissions that the app needs to perform its intended functionality. For more information, see [Principle of least privilege](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Principle_of_least_privilege) in Wikipedia. - Apps should provide customers with a way to delete their account, without having to email or call a support person. - Apps should not share tokens between different implementations of the app. For example, a desktop app should have a separate token from a web-based app. Individual tokens allow each app to request the access needed for GitHub resources separately. - Design your app with different user roles, depending on the functionality needed by each type of user. For example, a standard user should not have access to admin functionality, and billing managers might not need push access to repository code. - Apps should not share service accounts such as email or database services to manage your SaaS service. - All services used in your app should have unique login and password credentials. - Admin privilege access to the production hosting infrastructure should only be given to engineers and employees with administrative duties. - Apps should not use personal access tokens to authenticate and should authenticate as an [OAuth App](/apps/about-apps/#about-oauth-apps) or a [GitHub App](/apps/about-apps/#about-github-apps): - OAuth Apps should authenticate using an [OAuth token](/apps/building-oauth-apps/authorizing-oauth-apps/). - GitHub Apps should authenticate using either a [JSON Web Token (JWT)](/apps/building-github-apps/authenticating-with-github-apps/#authenticating-as-a-github-app), [OAuth token](/apps/building-github-apps/identifying-and-authorizing-users-for-github-apps/), or [installation access token](/apps/building-github-apps/authenticating-with-github-apps/#authenticating-as-an-installation). ### Data protection - Apps should encrypt data transferred over the public internet using HTTPS, with a valid TLS certificate, or SSH for Git. - Apps should store client ID and client secret keys securely. We recommend storing them as [environmental variables](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Environment_variable#Getting_and_setting_environment_variables). - Apps should delete all GitHub user data within 30 days of receiving a request from the user, or within 30 days of the end of the user's legal relationship with GitHub. - Apps should not require the user to provide their GitHub password. - Apps should encrypt tokens, client IDs, and client secrets. ### Logging and monitoring Apps should have logging and monitoring capabilities. App logs should be retained for at least 30 days and archived for at least one year. A security log should include: - Authentication and authorization events - Service configuration changes - Object reads and writes - All user and group permission changes - Elevation of role to admin - Consistent timestamping for each event - Source users, IP addresses, and/or hostnames for all logged actions ### Incident response workflow To provide a secure experience for users, you should have a clear incident response plan in place before listing your app. We recommend having a security and operations incident response team in your company rather than using a third-party vendor. You should have the capability to notify {% data variables.product.product_name %} within 24 hours of a confirmed incident. For an example of an incident response workflow, see the "Data Breach Response Policy" on the [SANS Institute website](https://www.sans.org/information-security-policy/). A short document with clear steps to take in the event of an incident is more valuable than a lengthy policy template. ### Vulnerability management and patching workflow You should conduct regular vulnerability scans of production infrastructure. You should triage the results of vulnerability scans and define a period of time in which you agree to remediate the vulnerability. If you are not ready to set up a full vulnerability management program, it's useful to start by creating a patching process. For guidance in creating a patch management policy, see this TechRepublic article "[Establish a patch management policy](https://www.techrepublic.com/blog/it-security/establish-a-patch-management-policy-87756/)." 94 ...ent/developers/github-marketplace/security-review-process-for-submitted-apps.md This file was deleted. 53 content/developers/github-marketplace/setting-pricing-plans-for-your-listing.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Setting pricing plans for your listing intro: 'When [listing your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/), you can choose to provide your app as a free service or sell your app. If you plan to sell your app, you can create different pricing plans for different feature tiers.' intro: 'When you list your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can choose to provide your app as a free service or sell your app. If you plan to sell your app, you can create different pricing plans for different feature tiers.' redirect_from: - /apps/adding-integrations/managing-pricing-and-payments-for-a-github-marketplace-listing/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/ - /apps/marketplace/managing-pricing-and-payments-for-a-github-marketplace-listing/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/ @@ -17,57 +17,52 @@ versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### About setting pricing plans If you want to sell an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you need to request verification when you publish the listing for your app. During the verification process, an onboarding expert checks the organization's identity and security settings. The onboarding expert will also take the organization through financial onboarding. For more information, see: "[Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/)." ### Creating pricing plans To learn about the types of pricing plans that {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} offers, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Pricing Plans](/marketplace/selling-your-app/github-marketplace-pricing-plans/)." You'll also find helpful billing guidelines in "[Selling your app](/marketplace/selling-your-app/)." Pricing plans can be in the draft or published state. If you haven't submitted your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing for approval, a published listing will function the same way as draft listings until your app is approved and listed on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Draft listings allow you to create and save new pricing plans without making them available on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page. Once you publish the pricing plan, it's available for customers to purchase immediately. You can publish up to 10 pricing plans. {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)." To create a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, click **Plans and pricing** in the left sidebar of your [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page](https://github.com/marketplace/manage). If you haven't created a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing yet, read "[Creating a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/)" to learn how. When you click **New draft plan**, you'll see a form that allows you to customize your pricing plan. You'll need to configure the following fields to create a pricing plan: {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} offers several different types of pricing plan. For detailed information, see "[Pricing plans for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/developers/github-marketplace/pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps)." #### Plan name ### About saving pricing plans Your pricing plan's name will appear on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app's landing page. You can customize the name of your pricing plan to align to the plan's resources, the size of the company that will use the plan, or anything you'd like. You can save pricing plans in a draft or published state. If you haven't submitted your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing for approval, a published plan will function in the same way as a draft plan until your listing is approved and shown on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Draft plans allow you to create and save new pricing plans without making them available on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page. Once you publish a pricing plan on a published listing, it's available for customers to purchase immediately. You can publish up to 10 pricing plans. #### Pricing models For guidelines on billing customers, see "[Billing customers](/developers/github-marketplace/billing-customers)." ##### Free plans {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} A free plan still requires you to handle [new purchase](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/) and [cancellation](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/) billing flows. See "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)" for more details. ##### Flat-rate plans ### Creating pricing plans Flat-rate pricing plans allow you to offer your service to customers for a flat-rate fee. {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-pricing-free-trials %} To create a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, click **Plans and pricing** in the left sidebar of your [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page](https://github.com/marketplace/manage). For more information, see "[Creating a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/)." You must set a price for both monthly and yearly subscriptions in U.S. Dollars for flat-rate plans. When you click **New draft plan**, you'll see a form that allows you to customize your pricing plan. You'll need to configure the following fields to create a pricing plan: ##### Per-unit plans - **Plan name** - Your pricing plan's name will appear on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app's landing page. You can customize the name of your pricing plan to align with the plan's resources, the size of the company that will use the plan, or anything you'd like. Per-unit pricing allows you to offer your app in units. For example, a unit can be a person, seat, or user. You'll need to provide a name for the unit and set a price for both monthly and yearly subscriptions, in U.S. Dollars. - **Pricing models** - There are three types of pricing plan: free, flat-rate, and per-unit. All plans require you to process new purchase and cancellation events from the marketplace API. In addition, for paid plans: #### Available for - You must set a price for both monthly and yearly subscriptions in US dollars. - Your app must process plan change events. - You must request verification to publish a listing with a paid plan. - {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-pricing-free-trials %} {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can apply to **Personal and organization accounts**, **Personal accounts only**, or **Organization accounts only**. For example, if your pricing plan is per-unit and provides multiple seats, you would select **Organization accounts only** because there is no way to assign seats to people in an organization from a personal account. For detailed information, see "[Pricing plans for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} apps](/developers/github-marketplace/pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps)" and "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." #### Short description - **Available for** - {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can apply to **Personal and organization accounts**, **Personal accounts only**, or **Organization accounts only**. For example, if your pricing plan is per-unit and provides multiple seats, you would select **Organization accounts only** because there is no way to assign seats to people in an organization from a personal account. Write a brief summary of the details of the pricing plan. The description might include the type of customer the plan is intended for or the resources the plan includes. - **Short description** - Write a brief summary of the details of the pricing plan. The description might include the type of customer the plan is intended for or the resources the plan includes. #### Bullets - **Bullets** - You can write up to four bullets that include more details about your pricing plan. The bullets might include the use cases of your app or list more detailed information about the resources or features included in the plan. You can write up to four bullets that include more details about your pricing plan. The bullets might include the use cases of your app or list more detailed information about the resources or features included in the plan. {% data reusables.marketplace.free-plan-note %} ### Changing a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing's pricing plan If a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} plan is no longer needed or if you need to adjust pricing details, you can remove it. If a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing is no longer needed, or if you need to adjust pricing details, you can remove it.  Once you publish a pricing plan for an app already listed in the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can't make changes to the plan. Instead, you'll need to remove the pricing plan. Customers who already purchased the removed pricing plan will continue to use it until they opt out and move onto a new pricing plan. For more on pricing plans, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans](/marketplace/selling-your-app/github-marketplace-pricing-plans/)." Once you publish a pricing plan for an app that is already listed in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can't make changes to the plan. Instead, you'll need to remove the pricing plan and create a new plan. Customers who already purchased the removed pricing plan will continue to use it until they opt out and move onto a new pricing plan. For more on pricing plans, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans](/marketplace/selling-your-app/github-marketplace-pricing-plans/)." Once you remove a pricing plan, users won't be able to purchase your app using that plan. Existing users on the removed pricing plan will continue to stay on the plan until they cancel their plan subscription. 37 content/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication.md @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ --- title: Submitting your listing for publication intro: 'You can submit your listing for the {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} community to use.' redirect_from: - /marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-review - /developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-review versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- Once you've completed the listing for your app, you'll see two buttons that allow you to request publication of the listing with or without verification. The **Request** button for "Publish without verification" is disabled if you have published any paid pricing plans in the listing.  {% data reusables.marketplace.launch-with-free %} After you submit your listing for review, an onboarding expert will reach out to you with additional information. For an overview of the process for creating and submitting a listing, see "[About {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/developers/github-marketplace/about-github-marketplace#publishing-an-app-to-github-marketplace)." ### Prerequisites for publishing with verification Before you request verification of your listing, you'll need to integrate the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} billing flows and webhook into your app. For more information, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." If you've met the requirements for listing and you've integrated with the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API, go ahead and submit your listing. For more information, see "[Requirements for listing an app](/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app)." {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Transferring an app to an organization before you submit](#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)" below. ### Transferring an app to an organization before you submit You cannot sell an app that's owned by a user account. You need to transfer the app to an organization that is already a verified creator, or that can request verification for a listing for the app. For details, see: 1. "[Creating an organization from scratch](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/creating-a-new-organization-from-scratch)" 1. "[Transferring ownership of a GitHub App](/developers/apps/transferring-ownership-of-a-github-app)" or "[Transferring ownership of an OAuth App](/developers/apps/transferring-ownership-of-an-oauth-app)" 22 content/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-review.md This file was deleted. 4 content/developers/github-marketplace/testing-your-app.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Testing your app intro: 'GitHub recommends testing your app with APIs and webhooks before submitting your listing to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} so you can provide an ideal experience for customers. Before the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding team approves your app, it must adequately handle the [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows).' intro: 'GitHub recommends testing your app with APIs and webhooks before submitting your listing to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} so you can provide an ideal experience for customers. Before an onboarding expert approves your app, it must adequately handle the billing flows.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/testing-apps-apis-and-webhooks/ - /apps/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/testing-github-marketplace-apps/ @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ versions: ### Testing apps You can use a [draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/) to simulate each of the [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows). A listing in the draft state means that it has not been submitted for approval. Any purchases you make using a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing will _not_ create real transactions, and GitHub will not charge your credit card. You can use a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing to simulate each of the billing flows. A listing in the draft state means that it has not been submitted for approval. Any purchases you make using a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing will _not_ create real transactions, and GitHub will not charge your credit card. For more information, see "[Drafting a listing for your app](/developers/github-marketplace/drafting-a-listing-for-your-app)" and "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." #### Using a development app with a draft listing to test changes 2 .../developers/github-marketplace/webhook-events-for-the-github-marketplace-api.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Webhook events for the GitHub Marketplace API intro: 'A {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app receives information about changes to a user''s plan from the Marketplace purchase event webhook. A Marketplace purchase event is triggered when a user purchases, cancels, or changes their payment plan. For details on how to respond to each of these types of events, see "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)."' intro: 'A {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app receives information about changes to a user''s plan from the Marketplace purchase event webhook. A Marketplace purchase event is triggered when a user purchases, cancels, or changes their payment plan.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/setting-up-github-marketplace-webhooks/about-webhook-payloads-for-a-github-marketplace-listing/ - /apps/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/ 4 content/developers/webhooks-and-events/webhook-events-and-payloads.md @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Key | Type | Description #### Webhook payload object {% data reusables.webhooks.installation_properties %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_always_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.sender_desc %} #### Webhook payload example @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Key | Type | Description #### Webhook payload object {% data reusables.webhooks.installation_repositories_properties %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_always_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.sender_desc %} #### Webhook payload example 54 ...ssions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions.md @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ --- title: About discussions intro: Use discussions to ask and answer questions, share information, make announcements, and conduct or participate in a conversation about a project on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About discussions With {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}, the community for your project can create and participate in conversations within the project's repository. Discussions empower a project's maintainers, contributors, and visitors to gather and accomplish the following goals in a central location, without third-party tools. - Share announcements and information, gather feedback, plan, and make decisions - Ask questions, discuss and answer the questions, and mark the discussions as answered - Foster an inviting atmosphere for visitors and contributors to discuss goals, development, administration, and workflows  You don't need to close a discussion like you close an issue or a pull request. If a repository administrator or project maintainer enables discussions for a repository, anyone who visits the repository can create and participate in discussions for the repository. Repository administrators and project maintainers can manage discussions and discussion categories in a repository, and pin discussions to increase the visibility of the discussion. Moderators and collaborators can mark comments as answers, lock discussions, and convert issues to discussions. For more information, see "[Repository permission levels for an organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/repository-permission-levels-for-an-organization)." For more information about management of discussions for your repository, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository)." ### About categories and formats for discussions {% data reusables.discussions.you-can-categorize-discussions %} {% data reusables.discussions.about-categories-and-formats %} {% data reusables.discussions.repository-category-limit %} For discussions with a question/answer format, an individual comment within the discussion can be marked as the discussion's answer. {% data reusables.discussions.github-recognizes-members %} For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)." ### Best practices for discussions As a community member or maintainer, start a discussion to ask a question or discuss information that affects the community. For more information, see "[Collaborating with maintainers using discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions)." Participate in a discussion to ask and answer questions, provide feedback, and engage with the project's community. For more information, see "[Participating in a discussion](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion)." You can spotlight discussions that contain important, useful, or exemplary conversations among members in the community. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository#pinning-a-discussion)." {% data reusables.discussions.you-can-convert-an-issue %} For more information, see "[Moderating discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions#converting-an-issue-to-a-discussion)." ### Sharing feedback You can share your feedback about {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} with {% data variables.product.company_short %}. To join the conversation, see [`github/feedback`](https://github.com/github/feedback/discussions?discussions_q=category%3A%22Discussions+Feedback%22). ### Further reading - "[About writing and formatting on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/writing-on-github/about-writing-and-formatting-on-github)" - "[Searching discussions](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions)" - "[About notifications](/github/managing-subscriptions-and-notifications-on-github/about-notifications)" - "[Moderating comments and conversations](/github/building-a-strong-community/moderating-comments-and-conversations)" - "[Maintaining your safety on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/building-a-strong-community/maintaining-your-safety-on-github)" 50 ...community-using-discussions/collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions.md @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ --- title: Collaborating with maintainers using discussions shortTitle: Collaborating with maintainers intro: You can contribute to the goals, plans, health, and community for a project on {% data variables.product.product_name %} by communicating with the maintainers of the project in a discussion. permissions: People with read permissions to a repository can start and participate in discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About collaboration with maintainers using discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} If you use or contribute to a project, you can start a discussion to make suggestions and engage with maintainers and community members about your plans, questions, ideas, and feedback. For more information, see "[‎About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)." {% data reusables.discussions.about-categories-and-formats %} Repository administrators and project maintainers can delete a discussion. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository#deleting-a-discussion)." {% data reusables.discussions.github-recognizes-members %} These members appear in a list of the most helpful contributors to the project's discussions. As your project grows, you can grant higher access permissions to active members of your community. For more information, see "[Granting higher permissions to top contributors](/discussions/guides/granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors)"  For more information about participation in discussions, see "[Participating in a discussion](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion)." ### Prerequisites To collaborate with maintainers using discussions, a repository administrator or project maintainer must enable discussions for the repository. For more information, see "[Enabling or disabling discussions for a repository](/github/administering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository)." ### Starting a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.starting-a-discussion %} ### Filtering the list of discussions You can search for discussions and filter the list of discussions in a repository. For more information, see "[Searching discussions](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions)." {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. In the **Search all discussions** field, type a search query. Optionally, to the right of the search field, click a button to further filter the results.  1. In the list of discussions, click the discussion you want to view.  ### Converting an issue to a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.you-can-convert-an-issue %} For more information, see "[Moderating discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions#converting-an-issue-to-a-discussion#converting-an-issue-to-a-discussion)." ### Further reading - "[About writing and formatting on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/writing-on-github/about-writing-and-formatting-on-github)" - "[Maintaining your safety on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/building-a-strong-community/maintaining-your-safety-on-github)" 14 content/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ --- title: Collaborating with your community using discussions shortTitle: Collaborating using discussions intro: Gather and discuss your project with community members and other maintainers. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} {% link_in_list /about-discussions %} {% link_in_list /participating-in-a-discussion %} {% link_in_list /collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions %} 31 ...borating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion.md @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ --- title: Participating in a discussion intro: You can converse with the community and maintainers in a forum within the repository for a project on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. permissions: People with read permissions to a repository can participate in discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About participation in a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} For more information, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)." In addition to starting or viewing a discussion, you can comment in response to the original comment from the author of the discussion. You can also create a comment thread by replying to an individual comment that another community member made within the discussion, and react to comments with emoji. For more information about reactions, see "[About conversations on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/about-conversations-on-github#reacting-to-ideas-in-comments)." You can block users and report disruptive content to maintain a safe and pleasant environment for yourself on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. For more information, see "[Maintaining your safety on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/building-a-strong-community/maintaining-your-safety-on-github)." ### Prerequisites Discussions must be enabled for the repository for you to participate in a discussion in the repository. For more information, see "[Enabling or disabling discussions for a repository](/github/administering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository)." ### Creating a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.starting-a-discussion %} ### Marking a comment as an answer Discussion authors and users with the triage role or greater for a repository can mark a comment as the answer to a discussion in the repository. {% data reusables.discussions.marking-a-comment-as-an-answer %} 49 content/discussions/guides/best-practices-for-community-conversations-on-github.md @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ --- title: Best practices for community conversations on GitHub shortTitle: Best practices for community conversations intro: 'You can use discussions to brainstorm with your team, and eventually move the conversation to a discussion when you are ready to scope out the work.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Community conversations in {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} Since {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} is an open forum, there is an opportunity to bring non-code collaboration into a project's repository and gather diverse feedback and ideas more quickly. You can help drive a productive conversation by: - Asking pointed questions and follow-up questions to garner specific feedback - Capture a diverse experience and distill it down to main points - Open an issue to take action based on the conversation, where applicable For more information about opening an issue and cross-referencing a discussion, see "[Opening an issue from a comment](/github/managing-your-work-on-github/opening-an-issue-from-a-comment)." ### Learning about conversations on GitHub You can create and participate in discussions, issues, and pull requests, depending on the type of conversation you'd like to have. You can use {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} to discuss big picture ideas, brainstorm, and spike out a project's specific details before committing it to an issue, which can then be scoped. Discussions are useful for teams if: - You are in the discovery phase of a project and are still learning which director your team wants to go in - You want to collect feedback from a wider community about a project - You want to keep bug fixes, feature requests, and general conversations separate Issues are useful for discussing specific details of a project such as bug reports and planned improvements. For more information, see "[About issues](/articles/about-issues)." Pull requests allow you to comment directly on proposed changes. For more information, see "[About pull requests](/articles/about-pull-requests)" and "[Commenting on a pull request](/articles/commenting-on-a-pull-request)." {% data reusables.organizations.team-discussions-purpose %} For more information, see "[About team discussions](/articles/about-team-discussions)." ### Following contributing guidelines Before you open a discussion, check to see if the repository has contributing guidelines. The CONTRIBUTING file includes information about how the repository maintainer would like you to contribute ideas to the project. For more information, see "[Setting up your project for healthy contributions](/github/building-a-strong-community/setting-up-your-project-for-healthy-contributions)." ### Next steps To continue learning about {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} and quickly create a discussion for your community, see "[Quickstart for {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}](/discussions/quickstart)." ### Further reading - "[Setting up your project for healthy contributions](/articles/setting-up-your-project-for-healthy-contributions)" - "[Using templates to encourage useful issues and pull requests](/github/building-a-strong-community/using-templates-to-encourage-useful-issues-and-pull-requests)" - "[Moderating comments and conversations](/articles/moderating-comments-and-conversations)" - "[Writing on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/articles/writing-on-github)" 21 content/discussions/guides/finding-discussions-across-multiple-repositories.md @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ --- title: Finding discussions across multiple repositories intro: 'You can easily access every discussion you''ve created or participated in across multiple repositories.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Finding discussions 1. Navigate to {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}. 1. In the top-right corner of {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}, click your profile photo, then click **Your enterprises**.  1. Toggle between **Created** and **Commented** to see the discussions you've created or participated in. ### Further reading - "[Searching discussions](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions)" - "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)" - "[Managing discussions for your community](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community)" 32 content/discussions/guides/granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors.md @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ --- title: Granting higher permissions to top contributors intro: 'Repository administrators can promote any community member to a moderator and maintainer.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Introduction The most helpful contributors for the past 30 days are highlighted on the {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} dashboard, based on how many comments were marked as answers by other community members. Helpful contributors can help drive a healthy community and moderate and guide the community space in addition to maintainers. ### Step 1: Audit your discussions top contributors {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. Compare the list of contributors with their access permissions to see who qualifies to moderate the discussion. ### Step 2: Review permission levels for discussions People with triage permissions for a repository can help moderate a project's discussions by marking comments as answers, locking discussions that are not longer useful or are damaging to the community, and converting issues to discussions when an idea is still in the early stages of development. For more information, see "[Moderating discussions](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions)." For more information about repository permission levels and {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}, see "[Repository permissions levels for an organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/repository-permission-levels-for-an-organization)." ### Step 3: Change permissions levels for top contributors You can change a contributor's permission levels to give them more access to the tooling they need to moderate GitHub Discussions. To change a person's or team's permission levels, see "[Managing teams and people with access to your repository](/github/administering-a-repository/managing-teams-and-people-with-access-to-your-repository)." ### Step 4: Notify community members of elevated access When you change a collaborators permission level, they will receive a notification for the change. 29 content/discussions/guides/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ --- title: Discussions guides shortTitle: Guides intro: 'Discover pathways to get started or learn best practices for participating or monitoring your community''s discussions.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Getting started with discussions {% link_in_list /about-discussions %} {% link_in_list /best-practices-for-community-conversations-on-github %} {% link_in_list /finding-discussions-across-multiple-repositories %} <!-- {% link_in_list /managing-notifications-for-discussions %} --> ### Administering discussions {% link_in_list /granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors %} <!--<!-- Commenting out what is only nice to have for discussions release {% link_in_list /updating-your-contributing-guidelines-with-discussions %} --> <!-- ### Discussions and open source projects {% link_in_list /collaborating-on-open-source-projects-in-discussions %} {% link_in_list /welcoming-contributions-to-your-communitys-discussions %} --> 55 content/discussions/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ --- title: GitHub Discussions Documentation beta_product: true shortTitle: GitHub Discussions intro: '{% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} is a collaborative communication forum for the community around an open source project. Community members can ask and answer questions, share updates, have open-ended conversations, and follow along on decisions affecting the community''s way of working.' introLinks: quickstart: /discussions/quickstart featuredLinks: guides: - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion - /discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions gettingStarted: - /discussions/quickstart guideCards: - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion - /discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions popular: - /discussions/guides/granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors - /discussions/guides/best-practices-for-community-conversations-on-github - /discussions/guides/finding-discussions-across-multiple-repositories - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions - /discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository product_video: https://www.youtube-nocookie.com/embed/DbTWBP3_RbM layout: product-landing versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- <!-- {% link_with_intro /quickstart %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /discussions-guides %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /managing-discussions-for-your-community %} --> <!-- Community examples --> {% assign discussionsCommunityExamples = site.data.variables.discussions_community_examples %} {% if discussionsCommunityExamples %} <div class="my-6 pt-6"> <h2 class="mb-2 font-mktg h1">Communities using discussions</h2> <div class="d-flex flex-wrap gutter"> {% render 'discussions-community-card' for discussionsCommunityExamples as example %} </div> {% if discussionsCommunityExamples.length > 6 %} <button class="js-filter-card-show-more btn btn-outline float-right">Show more {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</button> {% endif %} <div class="js-filter-card-no-results d-none py-4 text-center text-gray font-mktg"> <div class="mb-3">{% octicon "search" width="24" %}</div> <h3 class="text-normal">Sorry, there is no result for <strong class="js-filter-card-value"></strong></h3> <p class="my-3 f4">It looks like we don't have an example that fits your filter.<br>Try another filter or add your code example</p> <a href="https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/data/variables/discussions_community_examples.yml">Add your community {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</a> </div> </div> {% endif %} 13 content/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ --- title: Managing discussions for your community shortTitle: Managing discussions intro: 'You can enable and configure discussions for your repository, and you can use tools on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to moderate conversations among community members.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} {% link_in_list /managing-discussions-in-your-repository %} {% link_in_list /managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository %} {% link_in_list /moderating-discussions %} 64 ...ns-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository.md @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ --- title: Managing categories for discussions in your repository intro: You can categorize the discussions in your repository to organize conversations for your community members, and you can choose a format for each category. permissions: Repository administrators and people with write or greater access to a repository can enable discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About categories for discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} {% data reusables.discussions.about-categories-and-formats %} Each category must have a unique name and emoji pairing, and can be accompanied by a detailed description stating its purpose. Categories help maintainers organize how conversations are filed and are customizable to help distinguish categories that are Q&A or more open-ended conversations.{% data reusables.discussions.repository-category-limit %} For more information, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions#about-categories-and-formats-for-discussions)." ### Default categories | Category | Purpose | Type | | :- | :- | :- | | #️⃣ General | Anything and everything relevant to the project | Open-ended discussion | |💡Ideas | Ideas to change or improve the project | Open-ended discussion | | 🙏 Q&A | Questions for the community to answer, with a question/answer format | Question and Answer | | 🙌 Show and tell | Creations, experiments, or tests relevant to the project | Open-ended discussion | ### Creating a category {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.edit-categories %} 1. Click **New category**.  1. Edit the emoji, title, description, and discussion format for the category. For more information about discussion formats, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions#about-categories-and-formats-for-discussions)."  1. Click **Create**.  ### Editing a category You can edit a category to change the category's emoji, title, description, and discussion format. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. To the right of a category in the list, click {% octicon "pencil" aria-label="The pencil icon" %}.  1. {% data reusables.discussions.edit-category-details %}  1. Click **Save changes**.  ### Deleting a category When you delete a category, {% data variables.product.product_name %} will move all discussions in the deleted category to an existing category that you choose. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. To the right of a category in the list, click {% octicon "trash" aria-label="The trash icon" %}.  1. Use the drop-down menu, and choose a new category for any discussions in the category you're deleting.  1. Click **Delete & Move**.  108 ...aging-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository.md @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ --- title: Managing discussions in your repository intro: You can categorize, spotlight, transfer, or delete the discussions in a repository. permissions: Repository administrators and people with write or greater access to a repository can manage discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About management of discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} For more information about discussions, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)." Organization owners can choose the permissions required to create a discussion for repositories owned by the organization. For more information, see "[Managing discussion creation for repositories in your organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/managing-discussion-creation-for-repositories-in-your-organization)." As a discussions maintainer, you can create community resources to encourage discussions that are aligned with the overall project goal and maintain a friendly open forum for collaborators. Creating a code of conduct or contribution guidelines for collaborators to follow will help facilitate a collaborative and productive forum. For more information on creating community resources, see "[Adding a code of conduct to your project](/github/building-a-strong-community/adding-a-code-of-conduct-to-your-project)," and "[Setting guidelines for repository contributors](/github/building-a-strong-community/setting-guidelines-for-repository-contributors)." For more information on facilitating a healthy discussion, see "[Moderating comments and conversations](/github/building-a-strong-community/moderating-comments-and-conversations)." ### Prerequisites To manage discussions in a repository, discussions must be enabled for the repository. For more information, see "[Enabling or disabling discussions for a repository](/github/administering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository)." ### Changing the category for a discussion You can categorize discussions to help community members find related discussions. For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)" article. You can also move a discussion to a different category. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pencil" aria-label="The pencil icon" %} **Edit pinned discussion**.  ### Pinning a discussion You can pin up to four important discussions above the list of discussions for the repository. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pin" aria-label="The pin icon" %} **Pin discussion**.  1. Optionally, customize the look of the pinned discussion.  1. Click **Pin discussion**.  ### Editing a pinned discussion Editing a pinned discussion will not change the discussion's category. For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)." {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pencil" aria-label="The pencil icon" %} **Edit pinned discussion**.  1. Customize the look of the pinned discussion.  1. Click **Pin discussion**.  ### Unpinning a discussion {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pin" aria-label="The pin icon" %} **Unpin discussion**.  1. Read the warning, then click **Unpin discussion**.  ### Transferring a discussion To transfer a discussion, you must have permissions to create discussions in the repository where you want to transfer the discussion. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "arrow-right" aria-label="The right arrow icon" %} **Transfer discussion**.  1. Select the **Choose a repository** drop-down, and click the repository you want to transfer the discussion to.  1. Click **Transfer discussion**.  ### Deleting a discussion {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "trash" aria-label="The trash arrow icon" %} **Delete discussion**.  1. Read the warning, then click **Delete this discussion**.  ### Converting issues based on labels You can convert all issues with the same label to discussions in bulk. Future issues with this label will also automatically convert to the discussion and category you configure. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.sidebar-issues %} {% data reusables.project-management.labels %} 1. Next to the label you want to convert to issues, click **Convert issues**. 1. Select the **Choose a category** drop-down menu, and click a category for your discussion. 1. Click **I understand, convert this issue to a discussion**. 40 ...t/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions.md @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ --- title: Moderating discussions intro: 'You can promote healthy collaboration by marking comments as answers, locking or unlocking discussions, and converting issues to discussions. and editing or deleting comments, discussions, and categories that don''t align with your community''s code of conduct to discussions.' permissions: People with triage access to a repository can moderate discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About moderating discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} If you have triage permissions for a repository, you can help moderate a project's discussions by marking comments as answers, locking discussions that are not longer useful or are damaging to the community, and converting issues to discussions when an idea is still in the early stages of development. ### Marking a comment as an answer {% data reusables.discussions.marking-a-comment-as-an-answer %} ### Locking discussions It's appropriate to lock a conversation when the entire conversation is not constructive or violates your community's code of conduct or {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}'s [Community Guidelines](/github/site-policy/github-community-guidelines). You can also lock a conversation to prevent comments on a discussion you want to use as an announcement to the community. When you lock a conversation, people with write access to the repository will still be able to comment on the discussion. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. In the list of discussions, click the discussion you want to lock.  1. In the right margin of a discussion, click **Lock conversation**. 1. Read the information about locking conversations and click **Lock conversation on this discussion**. 1. When you're ready to unlock the conversation, click **Unlock conversation**, then click **Unlock conversation on this discussion**. ### Converting an issue to a discussion When you convert an issue to a discussion, the discussion is automatically created using the content from the issue. People with write access to a repository can bulk convert issues based on labels. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository)." {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.sidebar-issues %} 1. In the list of issues, click the issue you'd like to convert. 1. In the right margin of an issue, click **Convert to discussion**. 1. Select the **Choose a category** drop-down menu, and click a category for your discussion. 1. Click **I understand, convert this issue to a discussion**. 62 content/discussions/quickstart.md @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ --- title: Quickstart for GitHub Discussions intro: 'Enable {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} on an existing repository and start conversations with your community.' allowTitleToDifferFromFilename: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Introduction {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} is a collaborative communication forum for the community around an open source project. Discussions are for conversations that need to be transparent and accessible but do not need to be tracked on a project board and are not related to code, unlike issues. Discussions enable fluid, open conversation in a public forum. Discussions give a space for more collaborative conversations by connecting and giving a more centralized area to connect and find information. ### Enabling {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} on your repository Repository owners and people with write access can enable {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} for a community on their public repositories. When you first enable a {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}, you will be invited to configure a welcome post. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} 1. Under your repository name, click {% octicon "gear" aria-label="The gear icon" %} **Settings**.  1. Under "Features", click **Set up discussions**.  1. Under "Start a new discussion," edit the template to align with the resources and tone you want to set for your community. 1. Click **Start discussion**.  ### Welcoming contributions to your discussions You can welcome your community and introduce a new way to communicate in a repository by creating a welcome post and pin the post to your {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} page. Pinning and locking discussions helps people know that a post is meant as an announcement. You can use announcements as a way to link people to more resources and offer guidance for opening discussions in your community. For more information about pinning a discussion, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository#pinning-a-discussion)." ### Setting up community guidelines for contributors You can set contributing guidelines to encourage collaborators to have meaningful, useful conversations that are relevant to the repository. You can also update the repository's README to communicate expectations on when collaborators should open an issue or discussion. For more information about providing guidelines for your project, see "[Adding a code of conduct to your project](/github/building-a-strong-community/adding-a-code-of-conduct-to-your-project)" and "[Setting up your project for healthy contributions](/github/building-a-strong-community/setting-up-your-project-for-healthy-contributions)." ### Creating a new discussion Anyone with access to a repository can create a discussion. {% data reusables.discussions.starting-a-discussion %} ### Organizing discussions into relevant categories Repository owners and people with write access can create new categories to keep discussions organized. Collaborators participating and creating new discussions can group discussions into the most relevant existing categories. Discussions can also be recategorized after they are created. For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)" ### Promoting healthy conversations People with write permissions for a repository can help surface important conversations by pinning discussions, deleting discussions that are no longer useful or are damaging to the community, and transferring discussions to more relevant repositories owned by the organization. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository)." People with triage permissions for a repository can help moderate a project's discussions by marking comments as answers, locking discussions that are not longer useful or are damaging to the community, and converting issues to discussions when an idea is still in the early stages of development. For more information, see "[Moderating discussions](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions)." ### Next steps Once there is a clear path to scope work out and move an idea from concept to reality, you can create an issue and start tracking your progress. For more information on creating an issue from a discussion, see "[Moderating discussions](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions)." 45 content/education/guides.md @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ --- title: Guides for GitHub Education intro: 'These guides for {% data variables.product.prodname_education %} help you teach and learn both {% data variables.product.product_name %} and software development.' allowTitleToDifferFromFilename: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### Get started with {% data variables.product.product_name %} Teachers, students, and researchers can use tools from {% data variables.product.product_name %} to enrich a software development curriculum and develop real-world collaboration skills. - [Sign up for a new {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} account](/github/getting-started-with-github/signing-up-for-a-new-github-account) - [Git and {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} quickstart ](/github/getting-started-with-github/quickstart) - [Apply for an educator or researcher discount](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount) - [Apply for a student developer pack](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-a-student-developer-pack) ### Run a software development course with {% data variables.product.company_short %} Administer a classroom, assign and review work from your students, and teach the new generation of software developers with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. - [Basics of setting up {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} ](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom) - [Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms) - [Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment) - [Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment) - [Create an assignment from a template repository](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository) - [Leave feedback with pull requests](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/leave-feedback-with-pull-requests) - [Use autograding](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/use-autograding) ### Learn to develop software Incorporate {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} into your education, and use the same tools as the professionals. - [Git and {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} learning resources](/github/getting-started-with-github/git-and-github-learning-resources) - [Use {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} for your schoolwork](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-for-your-schoolwork) - [Try {% data variables.product.prodname_desktop %}](/desktop) - [Try {% data variables.product.prodname_cli %}](/github/getting-started-with-github/github-cli) ### Contribute to the community Participate in the community, get training from {% data variables.product.company_short %}, and learn or teach new skills. - [{% data variables.product.prodname_education_community %}](https://education.github.community) - [About Campus Experts](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/about-campus-experts) - [About Campus Advisors](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/about-campus-advisors) 43 content/education/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ --- title: GitHub Education Documentation shortTitle: Education intro: "{% data variables.product.prodname_education %} helps you teach or learn software development with the tools and support of {% data variables.product.company_short %}'s platform and community." introLinks: quickstart: /education/quickstart featuredLinks: guides: - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-a-student-developer-pack - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-at-your-educational-institution guideCards: - /github/getting-started-with-github/signing-up-for-a-new-github-account - /github/getting-started-with-github/git-and-github-learning-resources - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom popular: - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-for-your-schoolwork - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-in-your-classroom-and-research - /desktop - /github/getting-started-with-github/github-cli - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/teach-with-github-classroom changelog: - title: 'Try something new at Local Hack Day: Learn' date: '2020-10-15' href: https://github.blog/2020-10-15-try-something-new-at-local-hack-day-learn/ - title: 'Remote Education: Creating community through shared experiences' date: '2020-09-24' href: https://github.blog/2020-09-24-remote-education-creating-community-through-shared-experiences/ - title: 'Remote Education: A series of best practices for online campus communities' date: '2020-09-10' href: https://github.blog/2020-09-10-remote-education-a-series-of-best-practices-for-online-campus-communities/ - title: Welcome to the inaugural class of MLH Fellows date: '2020-06-24' href: https://github.blog/2020-06-24-welcome-to-the-inaugural-class-of-mlh-fellows/ layout: product-landing versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- <!-- {% link_with_intro /teach-and-learn-with-github-education %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /manage-coursework-with-github-classroom %} --> 31 ...work-with-github-classroom/about-using-makecode-arcade-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ --- title: About using MakeCode Arcade with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: About using MakeCode Arcade intro: You can configure MakeCode Arcade as the online IDE for assignments in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/student-experience-makecode --- ### About MakeCode Arcade MakeCode Arcade is an online integrated development environment (IDE) for developing retro arcade games using drag-and-drop block programming and JavaScript. Students can write, edit, run, test, and debug code in a browser with MakeCode Arcade. For more information about online IDEs and {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an online IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.readme-contains-button-for-online-ide %} The first time the student clicks the button to visit MakeCode Arcade, the student must sign into MakeCode Arcade with {% data variables.product.product_name %} credentials. After signing in, the student will have access to a development environment containing the code from the assignment repository, fully configured on MakeCode Arcade. For more information about working on MakeCode Arcade, see the [MakeCode Arcade Tour](https://arcade.makecode.com/ide-tour) and [documentation](https://arcade.makecode.com/docs) on the MakeCode Arcade website. MakeCode Arcade does not support multiplayer-editing for group assignments. Instead, students can collaborate with Git and {% data variables.product.product_name %} features like branches and pull requests. ### About submission of assignments with MakeCode Arcade By default, MakeCode Arcade is configured to push to the assignment repository on {% data variables.product.product_location %}. After making progress on an assignment with MakeCode Arcade, students should push changes to {% data variables.product.product_location %} using the {% octicon "mark-github" aria-label="The GitHub mark" %}{% octicon "arrow-up" aria-label="The up arrow icon" %} button at the bottom of the screen.  ### Further reading - "[About READMEs](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-readmes)" 33 ...ge-coursework-with-github-classroom/about-using-replit-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ --- title: About using Repl.it with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: About using Repl.it intro: You can configure Repl.it as the online integrated development environment (IDE) for assignments in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/student-experience-replit --- ### About Repl.it Repl.it is an online integrated development environment (IDE) that supports multiple programming languages. Students can write, edit, run, test, and debug code in a browser with Repl.it. For more information about online IDEs and {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an online IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.readme-contains-button-for-online-ide %} The first time the student clicks the button to visit Repl.it, the student must sign into Repl.it with {% data variables.product.product_name %} credentials. After signing in, the student will have access to a development environment containing the code from the assignment repository, fully configured on Repl.it. For more information about working on Repl.it, see the [Repl.it Quickstart Guide](https://docs.repl.it/misc/quick-start#the-repl-environment). For group assignments, students can use Repl.it Multiplayer to work collaboratively. For more information, see the [Repl.it Multiplayer](https://repl.it/site/multiplayer) website. ### About submission of assignments with Repl.it By default, Repl.it is configured to push to the assignment repository on {% data variables.product.product_location %}. After making progress on an assignment with Repl.it, students should push changes to {% data variables.product.product_location %} using the version control functionality in the left sidebar.  For more information about using Git on Repl.it, see the [Repl.it + Git Tutorial](https://repl.it/talk/learn/Replit-Git-Tutorial/23331) on the Repl.it website. ### Further reading - "[About READMEs](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-readmes)" 33 ...anage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ --- title: Basics of setting up GitHub Classroom shortTitle: '{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} basics' intro: Learn how to set up your classroom, manage assignments, and configure time-saving automation. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### Videos about {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} You can watch a series of short video tutorials about the configuration and use of {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. To watch all videos as part of a continuous playlist, see the [{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} Getting Started Guide](https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PLIRjfNq867bewk3ZGV6Z7a16YDNRCpK3u) on YouTube. For more information about terminology for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Glossary](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/glossary)". 1. <a href="https://youtu.be/xVVeqIDgCvM" target="_blank">Getting started</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 2. <a href="https://youtu.be/DTzrKduaHj8" target="_blank">Adding your student roster</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 3. Creating assignments - <a href="https://youtu.be/6QzKZ63KLss" target="_blank">Creating an assignment using a {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} repository</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} - <a href="https://youtu.be/Qmwh6ijsQJU" target="_blank">Creating an assignment using Microsoft MakeCode as your online IDE</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} - <a href="https://youtu.be/p_g5sQ7hUis" target="_blank">Creating an assignment using Repl.it as your online IDE</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 4. <a href="https://youtu.be/ObaFRGp_Eko" target="_blank">How students complete assignments</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 5. <a href="https://youtu.be/g45OJn3UyCU" target="_blank">How teachers review assignments</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 6. <a href="https://youtu.be/QxrA3taZdNM" target="_blank">Creating group assignments</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 7. <a href="https://youtu.be/tJK2cmoh1KM" target="_blank">Next steps to get started</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 8. <a href="https://youtu.be/X87v3SFQxLU" target="_blank">{% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} Teacher Toolbox</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} ### Next steps For more information about teaching with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Teach with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/teach-with-github-classroom)." ### Further reading - "[Teach and learn with {% data variables.product.prodname_education %}](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education)" 51 ...with-github-classroom/configure-default-settings-for-assignment-repositories.md @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ --- title: Configure default settings for assignment repositories shortTitle: Configure defaults for assignment repositories intro: You can use the Probot Settings app to configure the default settings for repositories that {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates for an assignment. permissions: Organization owners can configure default settings for assignment repositories by installing a {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %} for the organization. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/probot-settings --- ### About configuration of defaults for assignment repositories {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates a repository that belongs for each student or team that accepts an assignment. The repository belongs to the organization that you use for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Assignment repositories can be empty, or you can use a template repository. For more information, see "[Create an assignment from a template repository](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository)." {% data reusables.classroom.you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings %} With the Probot Settings app, you can create a file named _.github/settings.yml_ in a repository that contains a list of settings for the repository, and then install a {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %} for your organization that automatically applies the settings to the repository. You can include _.github/settings.yml_ in a template repository that you use for an assignment in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. When an individual or team accepts the assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates the assignment repository, and the Settings app automatically applies the settings from _.github/settings.yml_. Probot is a a project, framework, and collection of free apps to automate {% data variables.product.product_name %}. A Probot app can listen to repository events, like the creation of new commits, comments, and issues, and automatically respond to the event. For more information, see the [Probot website](https://probot.github.io) and the [Settings app website](https://probot.github.io/apps/settings/). For more information about {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}, see "[About apps](/developers/apps/about-apps)." ### Adding the Settings app to your organization After you install the Probot Settings app for your organization, the app will apply the settings that you define in _.github/settings.yml_ for any repository in your organization, including new assignment repositories that {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates. 1. Navigate to the [Settings app page](https://github.com/apps/settings). 1. Click **Install**, then click the organization that you use for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Provide the app full access to all repositories owned by the organization.  ### Configuring default settings for an assignment repository 1. Create a template repository that contains a _.github/settings.yml_ file. For a complete list of settings, see the [README](https://github.com/probot/settings#github-settings) for the `probot/settings` repository. For more information about using a template repository for starter code in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Create an assignment from a template repository](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository)." {% warning %} **Warning:** Do not define `collaborators` in the _.github/settings.yml_ file for your template repository. {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} automatically grants teachers and teaching assistants access to assignment repositories. {% endwarning %} 1. Create an assignment using the template repository containing _.github/settings.yml_ as the starter code. {% data reusables.classroom.for-more-information-about-assignment-creation %} The Probot Settings app for your organization will now apply the settings you define in _.github/settings.yml_ within the template repository to every assignment repository that {% data reusables.classroom.you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings %} creates for a student or team. ### Further reading - [Probot apps](https://probot.github.io/apps/) - [Probot documentation](https://probot.github.io/docs/) 142 ...th-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ --- title: Connect a learning management system to GitHub Classroom intro: You can configure an LTI-compliant learning management system (LMS) to connect to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} so that you can import a roster for your classroom. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/configuring-a-learning-management-system-for-github-classroom - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-to-lms - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/generate-lms-credentials - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/setup-canvas - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/setup-generic-lms - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/setup-moodle --- ### About configuration of your LMS You can connect a learning management system (LMS) to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, and {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} can import a roster of student identifiers from the LMS. To connect your LMS to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, you must enter configuration credentials for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} in your LMS. ### Prerequisites To configure an LMS to connect to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, you must first create a classroom. For more information, see "[Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#creating-a-classroom)." ### Supported LMSes {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} supports import of roster data from LMSes that implement Learning Tools Interoperability (LTI) standards. - LTI version 1.0 and/or 1.1 - LTI Names and Roles Provisioning 1.X Using LTI helps keep your information safe and secure. LTI is an industry-standard protocol and GitHub Classroom's use of LTI is certified by the Instructional Management System (IMS) Global Learning Consortium. For more information, see [Learning Tools Interoperability](https://www.imsglobal.org/activity/learning-tools-interoperability) and [About IMS Global Learning Consortium](http://www.imsglobal.org/aboutims.html) on the IMS Global Learning Consortium website. {% data variables.product.company_short %} has tested import of roster data from the following LMSes into {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. - Canvas - Google Classroom - Moodle - Sakai Currently, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} doesn't support import of roster data from Blackboard or Brightspace ### Generating configuration credentials for your classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. If your classroom already has a roster, you can either update the roster or delete the roster and create a new roster. - For more information about deleting and creating a roster, see "[Deleting a roster for a classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#deleting-a-roster-for-a-classroom)" and "[Creating a roster for your classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#creating-a-roster-for-your-classroom)." - For more information about updating a roster, see "[Adding students to the roster for your classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#adding-students-to-the-roster-for-your-classroom)." 1. In the list of LMSes, click your LMS. If your LMS is not supported, click **Other LMS**.  1. Read about connecting your LMS, then click **Connect to _LMS_**. 1. Copy the "Consumer Key", "Shared Secret", and "Launch URL" for the connection to the classroom.  ### Configuring a generic LMS You must configure the privacy settings for your LMS to allow external tools to receive roster information. 1. Navigate to your LMS. 1. Configure an external tool. 1. Provide the configuration credentials you generated in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. - Consumer key - Shared secret - Launch URL (sometimes called "tool URL" or similar) ### Configuring Canvas You can configure {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} as an external app for Canvas to import roster data into your classroom. For more information about Canvas, see the [Canvas website](https://www.instructure.com/canvas/). 1. Sign into [Canvas](https://www.instructure.com/canvas/#login). 1. Select the Canvas course to integrate with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. 1. In the left sidebar, click **Settings**. 1. Click the **Apps** tab. 1. Click **View app configurations**. 1. Click **+App**. 1. Select the **Configuration Type** drop-down menu, and click **By URL**. 1. Paste the configuration credentials from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[Generating configuration credentials for your classroom](#generating-configuration-credentials-for-your-classroom)." | Field in Canvas app configuration | Value or setting | | :- | :- | | **Consumer Key** | Consumer key from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **Shared Secret** | Shared secret from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **Allow this tool to access the IMS Names and Role Provisioning Service** | Enabled | | **Configuration URL** | Launch URL from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | {% note %} **Note**: If you don't see a checkbox in Canvas labeled "Allow this tool to access the IMS Names and Role Provisioning Service", then your Canvas administrator must contact Canvas support to enable membership service configuration for your Canvas account. Without enabling this feature, you won't be able to sync the roster from Canvas. For more information, see [How do I contact Canvas Support?](https://community.canvaslms.com/t5/Canvas-Basics-Guide/How-do-I-contact-Canvas-Support/ta-p/389767) on the Canvas website. {% endnote %} 1. Click **Submit**. 1. In the left sidebar, click **Home**. 1. To prompt Canvas to send a confirmation email, in the left sidebar, click **GitHub Classroom**. Follow the instructions in the email to finish linking {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. ### Configuring Moodle You can configure {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} as an activity for Moodle to import roster data into your classroom. For more information about Moodle, see the [Moodle website](https://moodle.org). You must be using Moodle version 3.0 or greater. 1. Sign into [Moodle](https://moodle.org/login/index.php). 1. Select the Moodle course to integrate with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. 1. Click **Turn editing on**. 1. Wherever you'd like {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to be available in Moodle, click **Add an activity or resource**. 1. Choose **External tool** and click **Add**. 1. In the "Activity name" field, type "GitHub Classroom". 1. In the **Preconfigured tool** field, to the right of the drop-down menu, click **+**. 1. Under "External tool configuration", paste the configuration credentials from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[Generating configuration credentials for your classroom](#generating-configuration-credentials-for-your-classroom)." | Field in Moodle app configuration | Value or setting | | :- | :- | | **Tool name** | {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} - _YOUR CLASSROOM NAME_<br/><br/>**Note**: You can use any name, but we suggest this value for clarity. | | **Tool URL** | Launch URL from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **LTI version** | LTI 1.0/1.1 | | **Default launch container** | New window | | **Consumer key** | Consumer key from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **Shared secret** | Shared secret from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | 1. Scroll to and click **Services**. 1. To the right of "IMS LTI Names and Role Provisioning", select the drop-down menu and click **Use this service to retrieve members' information as per privacy settings**. 1. Scroll to and click **Privacy**. 1. To the right of **Share launcher's name with tool** and **Share launcher's email with tool**, select the drop-down menus to click **Always**. 1. At the bottom of the page, click **Save changes**. 1. In the **Preconfigure tool** menu, click **GitHub Classroom - _YOUR CLASSROOM NAME_**. 1. Under "Common module settings", to the right of "Availability", select the drop-down menu and click **Hide from students**. 1. At the bottom of the page, click **Save and return to course**. 1. Navigate to anywhere you chose to display {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, and click the {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} activity. ### Importing a roster from your LMS For more information about importing the roster from your LMS into {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#creating-a-roster-for-your-classroom)." ### Disconnecting your LMS {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-settings %} 1. Under "Connect to a learning management system (LMS)", click **Connection Settings**.  1. Under "Delete Connection to your learning management system", click **Disconnect from your learning management system**.  145 .../education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment.md @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ --- title: Create a group assignment intro: 'You can create a collaborative assignment for teams of students who participate in your course.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-group-assignments --- ### About group assignments {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-group-definition %} Students can work together on a group assignment in a shared repository, like a team of professional developers. When a student accepts a group assignment, the student can create a new team or join an existing team. {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} saves the teams for an assignment as a set. You can name the set of teams for a specific assignment when you create the assignment, and you can reuse that set of teams for a later assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.classroom-creates-group-repositories %} {% data reusables.classroom.about-assignments %} You can decide how many teams one assignment can have, and how many members each team can have. Each team that a student creates for an assignment is a team within your organization on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. The visibility of the team is secret. Teams that you create on {% data variables.product.product_name %} will not appear in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[About teams](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/about-teams)." For a video demonstration of the creation of a group assignment, see "[Basics of setting up {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom)." ### Prerequisites {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-classroom-prerequisite %} ### Creating an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-the-assignment %} ### Setting up the basics for an assignment Name your assignment, decide whether to assign a deadline, define teams, and choose the visibility of assignment repositories. - [Naming an assignment](#naming-an-assignment) - [Assigning a deadline for an assignment](#assigning-a-deadline-for-an-assignment) - [Choosing an assignment type](#choosing-an-assignment-type) - [Defining teams for an assignment](#defining-teams-for-an-assignment) - [Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories](#choosing-a-visibility-for-assignment-repositories) #### Naming an assignment For a group assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} names repositories by the repository prefix and the name of the team. By default, the repository prefix is the assignment title. For example, if you name an assignment "assignment-1" and the team's name on {% data variables.product.product_name %} is "student-team", the name of the assignment repository for members of the team will be `assignment-1-student-team`. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-type-a-title %} #### Assigning a deadline for an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-assign-a-deadline %} #### Choosing an assignment type Under "Individual or group assignment", select the drop-down menu, then click **Group assignment**. You can't change the assignment type after you create the assignment. If you'd rather create a individual assignment, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)." #### Defining teams for an assignment If you've already created a group assignment for the classroom, you can reuse a set of teams for the new assignment. To create a new set with the teams that your students create for the assignment, type the name for the set. Optionally, type the maximum number of team members and total teams. {% tip %} **Tips**: - We recommend including details about the set of teams in the name for the set. For example, if you want to use the set of teams for one assignment, name the set after the assignment. If you want to reuse the set throughout a semester or course, name the set after the semester or course. - If you'd like to assign students to a specific team, give your students a name for the team and provide a list of members. {% endtip %}  #### Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-visibility %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-basics %} ### Adding starter code and configuring a development environment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-intro-for-environment %} - [Choosing a template repository](#choosing-a-template-repository) - [Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE)](#choosing-an-online-integrated-development-environment-ide) #### Choosing a template repository By default, a new assignment will create an empty repository for each team that a student creates. {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-choose-a-template-repository %} For more information about template repositories, see "[Creating a template repository](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/creating-a-template-repository)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-template-repository %} #### Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE) {% data reusables.classroom.about-online-ides %} For more information, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-an-online-ide %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-starter-code-and-feedback %} ### Providing feedback Optionally, you can automatically grade assignments and create a space for discussing each submission with the team. - [Testing assignments automatically](#testing-assignments-automatically) - [Preventing changes to important files](#preventing-changes-to-important-files) - [Creating a pull request for feedback](#creating-a-pull-request-for-feedback) #### Testing assignments automatically {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-using-autograding %} #### Preventing changes to important files {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-prevent-changes %} #### Creating a pull request for feedback {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-review-pull-request %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-create-assignment-button %} ### Inviting students to an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-invite-students-to-assignment %} You can see the teams that are working on or have submitted an assignment in the **Teams** tab for the assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-to-prevent-submission %} <div class="procedural-image-wrapper"> <img alt="Group assignment" class="procedural-image-wrapper" src="/assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-group-hero.png"> </div> ### Next steps - After you create the assignment and your students form teams, team members can start work on the assignment using Git and {% data variables.product.product_name %}'s features. Students can clone the repository, push commits, manage branches, create and review pull requests, address merge conflicts, and discuss changes with issues. Both you and the team can review the commit history for the repository. For more information, see "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/getting-started-with-github)," "[Creating, cloning, and archiving repositories](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories)," "[Using Git](/github/using-git)," and "[Collaborating with issues and pull requests](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests)," and the free course on [managing merge conflicts](https://lab.github.com/githubtraining/managing-merge-conflicts) from {% data variables.product.prodname_learning %}. - When a team finishes an assignment, you can review the files in the repository, or you can review the history and visualizations for the repository to better understand how the team collaborated. For more information, see "[Visualizing repository data with graphs](/github/visualizing-repository-data-with-graphs)." - You can provide feedback for an assignment by commenting on individual commits or lines in a pull request. For more information, see "[Commenting on a pull request](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/commenting-on-a-pull-request)" and "[Opening an issue from code](/github/managing-your-work-on-github/opening-an-issue-from-code)." For more information about creating saved replies to provide feedback for common errors, see "[About saved replies](/github/writing-on-github/about-saved-replies)." ### Further reading - "[Use {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} in your classroom and research](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-in-your-classroom-and-research)" - "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)" - [Using Existing Teams in Group Assignments?](https://education.github.community/t/using-existing-teams-in-group-assignments/6999) in the {% data variables.product.prodname_education %} Community 19 ...sework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository.md @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ --- title: Create an assignment from a template repository intro: You can create an assignment from a template repository to provide starter code, documentation, and other resources to your students. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/using-template-repos-for-assignments --- You can use a template repository on {% data variables.product.product_name %} as starter code for an assignment on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Your template repository can contain boilerplate code, documentation, and other resources for your students. For more information, see "[Creating a template repository](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/creating-a-template-repository)." To use the template repository for your assignment, the template repository must be owned by your organization, or the visibility of the template repository must be public. {% data reusables.classroom.you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings %} For more information, see "[Configure default settings for assignment repositories](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/configure-default-settings-for-assignment-repositories)." ### Further reading - "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)" - "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)" 124 ...tion/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment.md @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ --- title: Create an individual assignment intro: You can create an assignment for students in your course to complete individually. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/creating-an-individual-assignment - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment --- ### About individual assignments {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-individual-definition %} {% data reusables.classroom.classroom-creates-individual-repositories %} {% data reusables.classroom.about-assignments %} For a video demonstration of the creation of an individual assignment, see "[Basics of setting up {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom)." ### Prerequisites {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-classroom-prerequisite %} ### Creating an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-the-assignment %} ### Setting up the basics for an assignment Name your assignment, decide whether to assign a deadline, and choose the visibility of assignment repositories. - [Naming an assignment](#naming-an-assignment) - [Assigning a deadline for an assignment](#assigning-a-deadline-for-an-assignment) - [Choosing an assignment type](#choosing-an-assignment-type) - [Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories](#choosing-a-visibility-for-assignment-repositories) #### Naming an assignment For an individual assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} names repositories by the repository prefix and the student's {% data variables.product.product_name %} username. By default, the repository prefix is the assignment title. For example, if you name an assignment "assignment-1" and the student's username on {% data variables.product.product_name %} is @octocat, the name of the assignment repository for @octocat will be `assignment-1-octocat`. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-type-a-title %} #### Assigning a deadline for an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-assign-a-deadline %} #### Choosing an assignment type Under "Individual or group assignment", select the drop-down menu, and click **Individual assignment**. You can't change the assignment type after you create the assignment. If you'd rather create a group assignment, see "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." #### Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-visibility %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-basics %} ### Adding starter code and configuring a development environment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-intro-for-environment %} - [Choosing a template repository](#choosing-a-template-repository) - [Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE)](#choosing-an-online-integrated-development-environment-ide) #### Choosing a template repository By default, a new assignment will create an empty repository for each student on the roster for the classroom. {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-choose-a-template-repository %} For more information about template repositories, see "[Creating a template repository](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/creating-a-template-repository)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-template-repository %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-starter-code-and-feedback %} #### Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE) {% data reusables.classroom.about-online-ides %} For more information, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-an-online-ide %} ### Providing feedback for an assignment Optionally, you can automatically grade assignments and create a space for discussing each submission with the student. - [Testing assignments automatically](#testing-assignments-automatically) - [Preventing changes to important files](#preventing-changes-to-important-files) - [Creating a pull request for feedback](#creating-a-pull-request-for-feedback) #### Testing assignments automatically {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-using-autograding %} #### Preventing changes to important files {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-prevent-changes %} #### Creating a pull request for feedback {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-review-pull-request %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-create-assignment-button %} ### Inviting students to an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-invite-students-to-assignment %} You can see whether a student has joined the classroom and accepted or submitted an assignment in the **All students** tab for the assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-to-prevent-submission %} <div class="procedural-image-wrapper"> <img alt="Individual assignment" class="procedural-image-wrapper" src="/assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-individual-hero.png"> </div> ### Next steps - Once you create the assignment, students can start work on the assignment using Git and {% data variables.product.product_name %}'s features. Students can clone the repository, push commits, manage branches, create and review pull requests, address merge conflicts, and discuss changes with issues. Both you and student can review the commit history for the repository. For more information, see "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/getting-started-with-github)," "[Creating, cloning, and archiving repositories](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories)," "[Using Git](/github/using-git)," and "[Collaborating with issues and pull requests](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests)." - When a student finishes an assignment, you can review the files in the repository, or you can review the history and visualizations for the repository to better understand the student's work. For more information, see "[Visualizing repository data with graphs](/github/visualizing-repository-data-with-graphs)." - You can provide feedback for an assignment by commenting on individual commits or lines in a pull request. For more information, see "[Commenting on a pull request](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/commenting-on-a-pull-request)" and "[Opening an issue from code](/github/managing-your-work-on-github/opening-an-issue-from-code)." For more information about creating saved replies to provide feedback for common errors, see "[About saved replies](/github/writing-on-github/about-saved-replies)." ### Further reading - "[Use {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} in your classroom and research](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-in-your-classroom-and-research)" - "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)" 9 ...on/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/get-started-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ --- title: Get started with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: Get started intro: Learn how to configure and use {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to administer your course. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 52 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/glossary.md @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ --- title: Glossary intro: You can review explanations of terminology for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### assignment An assignment is coursework in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. A teacher can assign an assignment to an individual student or a group of students. Teachers can import starter code for the assignment, assign students, and create a deadline for each assignment. For more information, see the definitions for "[individual assignment](#individual-assignment)" and "[group assignment](#group-assignment)." --- ### classroom A classroom is the basic unit of {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Teachers can use a classroom to organize and manage students, teaching assistants, and assignments for a single course. A classroom belongs to an organization on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}. To administer a classroom, you must be an organization owner for the organization on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. For more information, see "[Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms)." --- ### {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} is a web application for educators that provides course administration tools integrated with {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. For more information, see the [{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](https://classroom.github.com/) website. --- ### group assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-group-definition %} For more information, see "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." --- ### identifier An identifier in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} is a unique ID for a student participating in a course. For example, an identifier can be a student name, alphanumeric ID, or email address. --- ### individual assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-individual-definition %} For more information, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)." --- ### roster A roster allows a teacher to manage students and assignment submissions in a classroom on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Teachers can create a roster by entering a list of student identifiers, or by connecting {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to a learning management system (LMS). For more information about identifiers, see the definition of "[identifier](#identifier)." For more information about connecting {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to an LMS, see "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)." --- ### Further reading - "[{% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} glossary](/github/getting-started-with-github/github-glossary)" 32 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ --- title: Manage coursework with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: '{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}' intro: With {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, you can use {% data variables.product.product_name %} to administer or participate in a course about software development. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### Table of Contents {% topic_link_in_list /get-started-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /glossary %} {% topic_link_in_list /teach-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /manage-classrooms %} {% link_in_list /create-an-individual-assignment %} {% link_in_list /create-a-group-assignment %} {% link_in_list /create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository %} {% link_in_list /leave-feedback-with-pull-requests %} {% link_in_list /use-autograding %} {% link_in_list /configure-default-settings-for-assignment-repositories %} {% link_in_list /connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom %} {% topic_link_in_list /integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide %} {% link_in_list /integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide %} {% link_in_list /about-using-makecode-arcade-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /about-using-replit-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /run-student-code-in-an-online-ide %} {% topic_link_in_list /learn-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /view-autograding-results %} 8 ...nage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide.md @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ --- title: Integrate GitHub Classroom with an IDE shortTitle: Integrate with an IDE intro: You can help your students write, test, and debug code by preconfiguring a development environment for assignment repositories on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 42 ...ursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide.md @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ --- title: Integrate GitHub Classroom with an online IDE shortTitle: Integrate with an online IDE intro: You can preconfigure a supported online integrated development environment (IDE) for assignments you create in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/online-ide-integrations --- ### About integration with an online IDE {% data reusables.classroom.about-online-ides %} After a student accepts an assignment with an online IDE, the README file in the student's assignment repository will contain a button to open the assignment in the IDE. The student can begin working immediately, and no additional configuration is necessary.  ### Supported online IDEs {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} supports the following online IDEs. You can learn more about the student experience for each IDE. | IDE | More information | | :- | :- | | Microsoft MakeCode Arcade | "[About using MakeCode Arcade with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/about-using-makecode-arcade-with-github-classroom)" | | Repl.it | "[About using Repl.it with GitHub Classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/about-using-replit-with-github-classroom)" | ### Configuring an online IDE for an assignment You can choose the online IDE you'd like to use for an assignment when you create an assignment. To learn how to create a new assignment that uses an online IDE, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)" or "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." ### Authorizing the OAuth app for an online IDE The first time you configure an assignment with an online IDE, you must authorize the OAuth app for the online IDE for your organization.  For all repositories, grant the app **read** access to metadata, administration, and code, and **write** access to administration and code. For more information, see "[Authorizing OAuth Apps](/github/authenticating-to-github/authorizing-oauth-apps)." ### Further reading - "[About READMEs](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-readmes)" 7 ...ducation/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/learn-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ --- title: Learn with GitHub Classroom intro: You can participate in coursework in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} and see results from your teacher. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 33 ...on/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/leave-feedback-with-pull-requests.md @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ --- title: Leave feedback with pull requests intro: You can leave feedback for your students in a special pull request within the repository for each assignment. permissions: People with read permissions to a repository can leave feedback in a pull request for the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/leaving-feedback-in-github --- ### About feedback pull requests for assignments {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback %} When you enable the pull request for feedback for an assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} will create a special pull request titled **Feedback** in the assignment repository for each student or team. The pull request automatically shows every commit that a student pushed to the assignment repository's default branch. ### Prerequisites To create and access the feedback pull request, you must enable the feedback pull request when you create the assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.for-more-information-about-assignment-creation %} ### Leaving feedback in a pull request for an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} 1. In the list of classrooms, click the classroom with the assignment you want to review.  {% data reusables.classroom.click-assignment-in-list %} 1. To the right of the submission, click **Review**.  1. Review the pull request. For more information, see "[Commenting on a pull request](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/commenting-on-a-pull-request)." ### Further reading - "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an IDE](http://localhost:4000/en/free-pro-team@latest/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide)" 121 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms.md @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ --- title: Manage classrooms intro: You can create and manage a classroom for each course that you teach using {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. permissions: Organization owners can manage a classroom for an organization. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/archive-a-classroom --- ### About classrooms {% data reusables.classroom.about-classrooms %}  ### About management of classrooms {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} uses organization accounts on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to manage permissions, administration, and security for each classroom that you create. Each organization can have multiple classrooms. After you create a classroom, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} will prompt you to invite teaching assistants (TAs) and admins to the classroom. Each classroom can have one or more admins. Admins can be teachers, TAs, or any other course administrator who you'd like to have control over your classrooms on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Invite TAs and admins to your classroom by inviting the user accounts on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to your organization as organization owners and sharing the URL for your classrom. Organization owners can administer any classroom for the organization. For more information, see "[Permission levels for an organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/permission-levels-for-an-organization)" and "[Inviting users to join your organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/inviting-users-to-join-your-organization)." When you're done using a classroom, you can archive the classroom and refer to the classroom, roster, and assignments later, or you can delete the classroom if you no longer need the classroom. ### About classroom rosters Each classroom has a roster. A roster is a list of identifiers for the students who participate in your course. When you first share the URL for an assignment with a student, the student must sign into {% data variables.product.product_name %} with a user account to link the user account to an identifier for the classroom. After the student links a user account, you can see the associated user account in the roster. You can also see when the student accepts or submits an assignment.  ### Prerequisites You must have an organization account on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to manage classrooms on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[Types of {% data variables.product.company_short %} accounts](/github/getting-started-with-github/types-of-github-accounts#organization-accounts)" and "[Creating a new organization from scratch](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/creating-a-new-organization-from-scratch)." You must authorize the OAuth app for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} for your organization to manage classrooms for your organization account. For more information, see "[Authorizing OAuth Apps](/github/authenticating-to-github/authorizing-oauth-apps)." ### Creating a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} 1. Click **New classroom**.  {% data reusables.classroom.guide-create-new-classroom %} After you create a classroom, you can begin creating assignments for students. For more information, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)" or "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." ### Creating a roster for your classroom You can create a roster of the students who participate in your course. If your course already has a roster, you can update the students on the roster or delete the roster. For more information, see "[Adding a student to the roster for your classroom](#adding-students-to-the-roster-for-your-classroom)" or "[Deleting a roster for a classroom](#deleting-a-roster-for-a-classroom)." {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. To connect {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to your LMS and import a roster, click {% octicon "mortar-board" aria-label="The mortar board icon" %} **Import from a learning management system** and follow the instructions. For more information, see "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)."  1. To create a roster manually, type your student identifiers. Optionally, click **Upload a CSV or text file** to upload a file containing the identifiers.  1. Click **Create roster**.  ### Adding students to the roster for your classroom Your classroom must have an existing roster to add students to the roster. For more information about creating a roster, see "[Creating a roster for your classrom](#creating-a-roster-for-your-classroom)." {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. To the right of "Classroom roster", click **Update students**.  1. Follow the instructions to add students to the roster. - To import students from an LMS, click **Sync from a learning management system**. For more information about importing a roster from an LMS, see "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)." - To manually add students, under "Manually add students", click **Upload a CSV or text file** or type the identifiers for the students, then click **Add roster entries**.  ### Renaming a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-settings %} 1. Under "Classroom name", type a new name for the classroom.  1. Click **Rename classroom**.  ### Archiving or unarchiving a classroom You can archive a classroom that you no longer use on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. When you archive a classroom, you can't create new assignments or edit existing assignments for the classroom. Students can't accept invitations to assignments in archived classrooms. {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} 1. To the right of a classroom's name, select the {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} drop-down menu, then click **Archive**.  1. To unarchive a classroom, to the right of a classroom's name, select the {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} drop-down menu, then click **Unarchive**.  ### Deleting a roster for a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. Under "Delete this roster", click **Delete roster**.  1. Read the warnings, then click **Delete roster**.  ### Deleting a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-settings %} 1. To the right of "Delete this classroom", click **Delete classroom**.  1. **Read the warnings**. 1. To verify that you're deleting the correct classroom, type the name of the classroom you want to delete.  1. Click **Delete classroom**.  22 ...on/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/run-student-code-in-an-online-ide.md @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ --- title: Run student code in an online IDE intro: You can run the code from a student assignment within the online integrated development environment (IDE) that you configured for the assignment. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/running-student-code --- ### About student code and online IDEs If you configure an online integrated development environment (IDE) for an assignment, you can run the code within the online IDE. You don't need to clone the assignment repository to your computer. For more information about online IDEs, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an online IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide)." ### Running student code in the online IDE {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-assignment-in-list %} 1. To the right of the submission, click **View IDE**.  8 ...ducation/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/teach-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ --- title: Teach with GitHub Classroom intro: Learn how to set up your classroom and assignments. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 93 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/use-autograding.md 30 ...t/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/view-autograding-results.md 90 content/education/quickstart.md 1 ...github-education/about-campus-advisors.md → ...github-education/about-campus-advisors.md 1 ...-github-education/about-campus-experts.md → ...-github-education/about-campus-experts.md 1 ...ducation-for-educators-and-researchers.md → ...ducation-for-educators-and-researchers.md 5 ...on/about-github-education-for-students.md → ...on/about-github-education-for-students.md 9 ...ithub-education/about-github-education.md → ...ithub-education/about-github-education.md 5 .../applying-for-a-student-developer-pack.md → ...ion/apply-for-a-student-developer-pack.md 14 ...for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount.md → ...for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount.md 26 content/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/index.md 3 ...github-at-your-educational-institution.md → ...github-at-your-educational-institution.md 3 ...ation/using-github-for-your-schoolwork.md → ...ucation/use-github-for-your-schoolwork.md 3 ...-github-in-your-classroom-and-research.md → ...-github-in-your-classroom-and-research.md 5 ...-for-a-student-developer-pack-approved.md → ...-for-a-student-developer-pack-approved.md 3 ...ucator-or-researcher-discount-approved.md → ...ucator-or-researcher-discount-approved.md 20 ...ering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository.md 5 content/github/administering-a-repository/index.md 2 content/github/authenticating-to-github/reviewing-your-security-log.md 1 content/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/index.md 74 ...with-issues-and-pull-requests/reviewing-dependency-changes-in-a-pull-request.md 19 ...g-with-issues-and-pull-requests/reviewing-proposed-changes-in-a-pull-request.md 10 content/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-repositories.md 15 content/github/customizing-your-github-workflow/about-github-marketplace.md 2 content/github/getting-started-with-github/git-and-github-learning-resources.md 4 content/github/getting-started-with-github/github-glossary.md 6 content/github/getting-started-with-github/signing-up-for-a-new-github-account.md 1 content/github/index.md 2 ...b/managing-security-vulnerabilities/about-alerts-for-vulnerable-dependencies.md 25 ...hub/managing-security-vulnerabilities/about-managing-vulnerable-dependencies.md 1 content/github/managing-security-vulnerabilities/index.md 4 ...nerabilities/viewing-and-updating-vulnerable-dependencies-in-your-repository.md 3 ...criptions-and-notifications-on-github/managing-notifications-from-your-inbox.md 6 content/github/managing-your-work-on-github/about-issues.md 3 content/github/searching-for-information-on-github/about-searching-on-github.md 5 content/github/searching-for-information-on-github/index.md 114 content/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions.md 2 ...ithub/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-issues-and-pull-requests.md 2 ...nd-managing-billing-and-payments-on-github/about-billing-for-github-sponsors.md 4 ...-billing-and-payments-on-github/discounted-subscriptions-for-github-accounts.md 19 ...ing-up-and-managing-billing-and-payments-on-github/downgrading-a-sponsorship.md 16 ...tting-up-and-managing-billing-and-payments-on-github/upgrading-a-sponsorship.md 4 content/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/index.md 27 ...and-teams/managing-discussion-creation-for-repositories-in-your-organization.md 25 ...izations-and-teams/managing-updates-from-accounts-your-organization-sponsors.md 3 ...p-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/permission-levels-for-an-organization.md 14 ...ing-organizations-and-teams/repository-permission-levels-for-an-organization.md 86 ...naging-organizations-and-teams/reviewing-the-audit-log-for-your-organization.md 1 content/github/setting-up-and-managing-your-github-user-account/index.md 24 ...etting-up-and-managing-your-github-user-account/managing-your-theme-settings.md 12 content/github/site-policy/github-additional-product-terms.md 8 ...porting-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/about-github-sponsors.md 17 ...community-with-github-sponsors/attributing-sponsorships-to-your-organization.md 28 ...e-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/changing-your-sponsorship-tiers.md 22 ...th-github-sponsors/configuring-webhooks-for-events-in-your-sponsored-account.md 17 ...ting-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/contacting-your-sponsors.md 25 ...munity-with-github-sponsors/editing-your-profile-details-for-github-sponsors.md 1 content/github/supporting-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/index.md 12 ...ce-community-with-github-sponsors/managing-your-payouts-from-github-sponsors.md 18 ...he-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/managing-your-sponsorship-goal.md 39 ...ing-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/managing-your-sponsorship.md 10 ...munity-with-github-sponsors/setting-up-github-sponsors-for-your-organization.md 10 ...munity-with-github-sponsors/setting-up-github-sponsors-for-your-user-account.md 62 ...-source-community-with-github-sponsors/sponsoring-an-open-source-contributor.md 27 ...source-community-with-github-sponsors/viewing-your-sponsors-and-sponsorships.md 23 content/github/teaching-and-learning-with-github-education/index.md This file was deleted. 7 ...nt/github/visualizing-repository-data-with-graphs/about-the-dependency-graph.md 1 content/github/working-with-github-support/index.md 10 content/graphql/README.md 58 ...tting-started-with-github-container-registry/about-github-container-registry.md This file was deleted. 15 content/packages/getting-started-with-github-container-registry/index.md This file was deleted. 95 content/packages/guides/about-github-container-registry.md 2 ...ol-and-visibility-for-container-images.md → ...ol-and-visibility-for-container-images.md 5 ...che-maven-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...che-maven-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...ng-docker-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...ng-docker-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...otnet-cli-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...otnet-cli-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...ng-gradle-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...ng-gradle-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...uring-npm-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...uring-npm-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...-rubygems-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...-rubygems-for-use-with-github-packages.md 2 ...ting-a-repository-to-a-container-image.md → ...ting-a-repository-to-a-container-image.md 10 content/packages/guides/container-guides-for-github-packages.md 2 ...er-registry/deleting-a-container-image.md → ...ages/guides/deleting-a-container-image.md 2 ...ry/enabling-improved-container-support.md → ...es/enabling-improved-container-support.md 33 content/packages/guides/index.md 2 ...b-container-registry-for-docker-images.md → ...b-container-registry-for-docker-images.md 10 content/packages/guides/package-client-guides-for-github-packages.md 2 ...stry/pushing-and-pulling-docker-images.md → ...ides/pushing-and-pulling-docker-images.md 1 ...ng-github-packages-with-github-actions.md → ...ng-github-packages-with-github-actions.md 46 content/packages/index.md 60 ...anaging-packages/about-github-packages.md → ...-github-packages/about-github-packages.md 13 ...concepts-for-github-container-registry.md → ...ages/core-concepts-for-github-packages.md 16 content/packages/learn-github-packages/index.md 1 ...managing-packages/publishing-a-package.md → ...n-github-packages/publishing-a-package.md 3 ...d-managing-packages/deleting-a-package.md → ...ges/manage-packages/deleting-a-package.md 8 ...publishing-and-managing-packages/index.md → content/packages/manage-packages/index.md 1 ...managing-packages/installing-a-package.md → ...s/manage-packages/installing-a-package.md 1 ...and-managing-packages/viewing-packages.md → ...kages/manage-packages/viewing-packages.md 11 content/packages/managing-container-images-with-github-container-registry/index.md This file was deleted. 109 content/packages/quickstart.md 20 content/packages/using-github-packages-with-your-projects-ecosystem/index.md This file was deleted. 10 content/rest/README.md 18 content/rest/overview/resources-in-the-rest-api.md 2 content/rest/overview/troubleshooting.md 10 content/rest/reference/enterprise-admin.md 2 data/products.yml 2 data/reusables/accounts/create-account.md 2 data/reusables/actions/actions-not-verified.md 7 data/reusables/actions/visualization-beta.md 5 data/reusables/audit_log/audit-log-api-info.md 1 data/reusables/audit_log/audit-log-git-events-retention.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-assignments.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-autograding.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-classrooms.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-online-ides.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-classroom-prerequisite.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-click-pencil.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-group-definition.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-assign-a-deadline.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-choose-an-online-ide.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-choose-template-repository.md 9 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-choose-visibility.md 7 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-click-continue-after-basics.md 7 ...s/classroom/assignments-guide-click-continue-after-starter-code-and-feedback.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-click-create-assignment-button.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-create-review-pull-request.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-create-the-assignment.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-intro-for-environment.md 3 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-invite-students-to-assignment.md 7 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-prevent-changes.md 23 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-using-autograding.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-individual-definition.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-to-prevent-submission.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-type-a-title.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/classroom-creates-group-repositories.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/classroom-creates-individual-repositories.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/classroom-enables-invitation-urls.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-assignment-in-list.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-classroom-in-list.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-settings.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-students.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/for-more-information-about-assignment-creation.md 6 data/reusables/classroom/guide-create-new-classroom.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/invitation-url-warning.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/readme-contains-button-for-online-ide.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/sign-into-github-classroom.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/use-add-test-drop-down-to-click-grading-method.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/you-can-choose-a-template-repository.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/about-categories-and-formats.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/about-discussions.md 5 data/reusables/discussions/beta.md 2 data/reusables/discussions/click-discussion-in-list.md 2 data/reusables/discussions/discussions-tab.md 2 data/reusables/discussions/edit-categories.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/edit-category-details.md 8 ...les/discussions/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-your-repository.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/github-recognizes-members.md 16 data/reusables/discussions/marking-a-comment-as-an-answer.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/repository-category-limit.md 10 data/reusables/discussions/starting-a-discussion.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-can-categorize-discussions.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-can-convert-an-issue.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-can-use-discussions.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-cannot-convert-a-discussion.md 2 data/reusables/education/about-github-education-link.md 2 data/reusables/education/apply-for-team.md 2 data/reusables/education/click-get-teacher-benefits.md 6 data/reusables/education/educator-requirements.md 1 data/reusables/gated-features/discussions.md 1 data/reusables/marketplace/app-transfer-to-org-for-verification.md 5 data/reusables/marketplace/free-plan-note.md 2 data/reusables/marketplace/launch-with-free.md 8 data/reusables/marketplace/marketplace-billing-ui-requirements.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/billing-for-container-registry.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/container-registry-beta-billing-note.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/container-registry-beta.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/docker_registry_deprecation_status.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/feature-preview-for-container-registry.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/required-scopes.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/viewing-packages.md 3 data/reusables/repositories/dependency-review.md 7 data/reusables/repositories/navigate-to-job-superlinter.md 4 data/reusables/repositories/view-failed-job-results-superlinter.md 4 data/reusables/repositories/view-specific-line-superlinter.md 2 data/reusables/search/date_gt_lt.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/billing-switcher.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/change-tier.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/choose-updates.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/developer-sponsored-choose-updates.md This file was deleted. 4 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-developer-sponsorship.md This file was deleted. 4 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-org-sponsorship.md This file was deleted. 2 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-sponsorship.md 1 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-updates-for-orgs.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/maximum-tier.md 4 data/reusables/sponsors/navigate-to-org-sponsors-dashboard.md This file was deleted. 2 ...onsors/navigate-to-sponsored-developer.md → ...sponsors/navigate-to-sponsored-account.md 1 data/reusables/sponsors/navigate-to-sponsored-org.md This file was deleted. 2 ...ors/navigate-to-dev-sponsors-dashboard.md → ...ponsors/navigate-to-sponsors-dashboard.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/no-fees.md 5 data/reusables/sponsors/org-sponsors-release-phase.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/pay-prorated-amount.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/prorated-sponsorship.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/sponsor-account.md 7 data/reusables/sponsors/sponsorship-dashboard.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/sponsorship-details.md 1 data/reusables/webhooks/app_always_desc.md 3 data/ui.yml 7 data/variables/action_code_examples.yml 37 data/variables/discussions_community_examples.yml 6 data/variables/product.yml 21 includes/all-articles.html 4 includes/breadcrumbs.html 2 includes/code-example-card.html 14 includes/discussions-community-card.html 2 includes/header-notification.html 90 javascripts/filter-cards.js 92 javascripts/filter-code-examples.js This file was deleted. 4 javascripts/index.js 64 layouts/product-landing.html 68 lib/data-directory.js 28 lib/filename-to-key.js 7 lib/frontmatter.js 2 lib/liquid-tags/data.js 25 lib/page.js 54 lib/pages.js 21 lib/redirects/get-docs-path-from-developer-path.js 41 lib/redirects/precompile.js 231 lib/rest/static/decorated/api.github.com.json 495 lib/rest/static/dereferenced/api.github.com.deref.json 17 lib/rewrite-local-links.js 10 lib/site-data.js 24 lib/warm-server.js 5 middleware/breadcrumbs.js 38 middleware/categories-for-support-team.js 6 middleware/contextualizers/early-access-links.js 103 middleware/csp.js 69 middleware/early-access-breadcrumbs.js 1 middleware/index.js 45 package-lock.json 3 package.json 4 script/check-s3-images.js 4 script/early-access/clone-locally 41 script/early-access/create-branch 7 server.js 2 stylesheets/article.scss 4 tests/browser/browser.js 10 tests/content/category-pages.js 2 tests/content/crowdin-config.js 3 tests/content/featured-links.js 5 tests/content/glossary.js 42 tests/content/remove-liquid-statements.js 39 tests/content/site-data-references.js 4 tests/content/site-data.js 22 tests/fixtures/rest-redirects.json 10 tests/graphql/build-changelog-test.js 9 tests/helpers/conditional-runs.js 20 tests/meta/orphan-tests.js 23 tests/rendering/breadcrumbs.js 4 tests/rendering/rest.js 3 tests/rendering/server.js 47 tests/routing/developer-site-redirects.js 10 tests/routing/redirects.js 15 tests/unit/data-directory/filename-to-key.js 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/README.md 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/bar.yaml 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/foo.json 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/nested/baz.md 40 tests/unit/data-directory/index.js 19 tests/unit/early-access.js 4 tests/unit/find-page.js 57 tests/unit/liquid-helpers.js 140 tests/unit/page.js 2 tests/unit/pages.js 0 comments on commit 1a56ed1 Leave a comment You’re not receiving notifications from this thread. © 2021 GitHub, Inc. Terms Privacy Security Status Docs Contact GitHub Pricing API Training Blog About

Open in app Get started ITNEXT Published in ITNEXT You have 2 free member-only stories left this month. Sign up for Medium and get an extra one Kush Kush Follow Apr 15, 2021 · 7 min read · Listen Save How you can Control your Android Device with Python Photo by Caspar Camille Rubin on Unsplash Photo by Caspar Camille Rubin on Unsplash Introduction A while back I was thinking of ways in which I could annoy my friends by spamming them with messages for a few minutes, and while doing some research I came across the Android Debug Bridge. In this quick guide I will show you how you can interface with it using Python and how to create 2 quick scripts. The ADB (Android Debug Bridge) is a command line tool (CLI) which can be used to control and communicate with an Android device. You can do many things such as install apps, debug apps, find hidden features and use a shell to interface with the device directly. To enable the ADB, your device must firstly have Developer Options unlocked and USB debugging enabled. To unlock developer options, you can go to your devices settings and scroll down to the about section and find the build number of the current software which is on the device. Click the build number 7 times and Developer Options will be enabled. Then you can go to the Developer Options panel in the settings and enable USB debugging from there. Now the only other thing you need is a USB cable to connect your device to your computer. Here is what todays journey will look like: Installing the requirements Getting started The basics of writing scripts Creating a selfie timer Creating a definition searcher Installing the requirements The first of the 2 things we need to install, is the ADB tool on our computer. This comes automatically bundled with Android Studio, so if you already have that then do not worry. Otherwise, you can head over to the official docs and at the top of the page there should be instructions on how to install it. Once you have installed the ADB tool, you need to get the python library which we will use to interface with the ADB and our device. You can install the pure-python-adb library using pip install pure-python-adb. Optional: To make things easier for us while developing our scripts, we can install an open-source program called scrcpy which allows us to display and control our android device with our computer using a mouse and keyboard. To install it, you can head over to the Github repo and download the correct version for your operating system (Windows, macOS or Linux). If you are on Windows, then extract the zip file into a directory and add this directory to your path. This is so we can access the program from anywhere on our system just by typing in scrcpy into our terminal window. Getting started Now that all the dependencies are installed, we can start up our ADB and connect our device. Firstly, connect your device to your PC with the USB cable, if USB debugging is enabled then a message should pop up asking if it is okay for your PC to control the device, simply answer yes. Then on your PC, open up a terminal window and start the ADB server by typing in adb start-server. This should print out the following messages: * daemon not running; starting now at tcp:5037 * daemon started successfully If you also installed scrcpy, then you can start that by just typing scrcpy into the terminal. However, this will only work if you added it to your path, otherwise you can open the executable by changing your terminal directory to the directory of where you installed scrcpy and typing scrcpy.exe. Hopefully if everything works out, you should be able to see your device on your PC and be able to control it using your mouse and keyboard. Now we can create a new python file and check if we can find our connected device using the library: Here we import the AdbClient class and create a client object using it. Then we can get a list of devices connected. Lastly, we get the first device out of our list (it is generally the only one there if there is only one device connected). The basics of writing scripts The main way we are going to interface with our device is using the shell, through this we can send commands to simulate a touch at a specific location or to swipe from A to B. To simulate screen touches (taps) we first need to work out how the screen coordinates work. To help with these we can activate the pointer location setting in the developer options. Once activated, wherever you touch on the screen, you can see that the coordinates for that point appear at the top. The coordinate system works like this: A diagram to show how the coordinate system works A diagram to show how the coordinate system works The top left corner of the display has the x and y coordinates (0, 0) respectively, and the bottom right corners’ coordinates are the largest possible values of x and y. Now that we know how the coordinate system works, we need to check out the different commands we can run. I have made a list of commands and how to use them below for quick reference: Input tap x y Input text “hello world!” Input keyevent eventID Here is a list of some common eventID’s: 3: home button 4: back button 5: call 6: end call 24: volume up 25: volume down 26: turn device on or off 27: open camera 64: open browser 66: enter 67: backspace 207: contacts 220: brightness down 221: brightness up 277: cut 278: copy 279: paste If you wanted to find more, here is a long list of them here. Creating a selfie timer Now we know what we can do, let’s start doing it. In this first example I will show you how to create a quick selfie timer. To get started we need to import our libraries and create a connect function to connect to our device: You can see that the connect function is identical to the previous example of how to connect to your device, except here we return the device and client objects for later use. In our main code, we can call the connect function to retrieve the device and client objects. From there we can open up the camera app, wait 5 seconds and take a photo. It’s really that simple! As I said before, this is simply replicating what you would usually do, so thinking about how to do things is best if you do them yourself manually first and write down the steps. Creating a definition searcher We can do something a bit more complex now, and that is to ask the browser to find the definition of a particular word and take a screenshot to save it on our computer. The basic flow of this program will be as such: 1. Open the browser 2. Click the search bar 3. Enter the search query 4. Wait a few seconds 5. Take a screenshot and save it But, before we get started, you need to find the coordinates of your search bar in your default browser, you can use the method I suggested earlier to find them easily. For me they were (440, 200). To start, we will have to import the same libraries as before, and we will also have our same connect method. In our main function we can call the connect function, as well as assign a variable to the x and y coordinates of our search bar. Notice how this is a string and not a list or tuple, this is so we can easily incorporate the coordinates into our shell command. We can also take an input from the user to see what word they want to get the definition for: We will add that query to a full sentence which will then be searched, this is so that we can always get the definition. After that we can open the browser and input our search query into the search bar as such: Here we use the eventID 66 to simulate the press of the enter key to execute our search. If you wanted to, you could change the wait timings per your needs. Lastly, we will take a screenshot using the screencap method on our device object, and we can save that as a .png file: Here we must open the file in the write bytes mode because the screencap method returns bytes representing the image. If all went according to plan, you should have a quick script which searches for a specific word. Here it is working on my phone: A GIF to show how the definition searcher example works on my phone A GIF to show how the definition searcher example works on my phone Final thoughts Hopefully you have learned something new today, personally I never even knew this was a thing before I did some research into it. The cool thing is, that you can do anything you normal would be able to do, and more since it just simulates your own touches and actions! I hope you enjoyed the article and thank you for reading! 💖 468 9 468 9 More from ITNEXT Follow ITNEXT is a platform for IT developers & software engineers to share knowledge, connect, collaborate, learn and experience next-gen technologies. Sabrina Amrouche Sabrina Amrouche ·Apr 15, 2021 Using the Spotify Algorithm to Find High Energy Physics Particles Python 5 min read Using the Spotify Algorithm to Find High Energy Physics Particles Wenkai Fan Wenkai Fan ·Apr 14, 2021 Responsive design at different levels in Flutter Flutter 3 min read Responsive design at different levels in Flutter Abhishek Gupta Abhishek Gupta ·Apr 14, 2021 Getting started with Kafka and Rust: Part 2 Kafka 9 min read Getting started with Kafka and Rust: Part 2 Adriano Raiano Adriano Raiano ·Apr 14, 2021 How to properly internationalize a React application using i18next React 17 min read How to properly internationalize a React application using i18next Gary A. Stafford Gary A. Stafford ·Apr 14, 2021 AWS IoT Core for LoRaWAN, AWS IoT Analytics, and Amazon QuickSight Lora 11 min read AWS IoT Core for LoRaWAN, Amazon IoT Analytics, and Amazon QuickSight Read more from ITNEXT Recommended from Medium Morpheus Morpheus Morpheus Swap — Resurrection Ashutosh Kumar Ashutosh Kumar GIT Branching strategies and GitFlow Balachandar Paulraj Balachandar Paulraj Delta Lake Clones: Systematic Approach for Testing, Sharing data Jason Porter Jason Porter Week 3 -Yieldly No-Loss Lottery Results Casino slot machines Mikolaj Szabó Mikolaj Szabó in HackerNoon.com Why functional programming matters Tt Tt Set Up LaTeX on Mac OS X Sierra Goutham Pratapa Goutham Pratapa Upgrade mongo to the latest build Julia Says Julia Says in Top Software Developers in the World How to Choose a Software Vendor AboutHelpTermsPrivacy Get the Medium app A button that says 'Download on the App Store', and if clicked it will lead you to the iOS App store A button that says 'Get it on, Google Play', and if clicked it will lead you to the Google Play store

Welcome to my comprehensive course on python programming and ethical hacking. The course assumes you have NO prior knowledge in any of these topics, and by the end of it you'll be at a high intermediate level being able to combine both of these skills to write python programs to hack into computer systems exactly the same way that black hat hackers do. That's not all, you'll also be able to use the programming skills you learn to write any program even if it has nothing to do with hacking. This course is highly practical but it won't neglect the theory, we'll start with basics of ethical hacking and python programming and installing the needed software. Then we'll dive and start programming straight away. You'll learn everything by example, by writing useful hacking programs, no boring dry programming lectures. The course is divided into a number of sections, each aims to achieve a specific goal, the goal is usually to hack into a certain system! We'll start by learning how this system work and its weaknesses, then you'll lean how to write a python program to exploit these weaknesses and hack the system. As we write the program I will teach you python programming from scratch covering one topic at a time. By the end of the course you're going to have a number of ethical hacking programs written by yourself (see below) from backdoors, keyloggers, credential harvesters, network hacking tools, website hacking tools and the list goes on. You'll also have a deep understanding on how computer systems work, how to model problems, design an algorithm to solve problems and implement the solution using python. As mentioned in this course you will learn both ethical hacking and programming at the same time, here are some of the topics that will be covered in the course: Programming topics: Writing programs for python 2 and 3. Using modules and libraries. Variables, types ...etc. Handling user input. Reading and writing files. Functions. Loops. Data structures. Regex. Desiccation making. Recursion. Threading. Object oriented programming. Packet manipulation using scapy. Netfilterqueue. Socket programming. String manipulation. Exceptions. Serialisation. Compiling programs to binary executables. Sending & receiving HTTP requests. Parsing HTML. + more! Hacking topics: Basics of network hacking / penetration testing. Changing MAC address & bypassing filtering. Network mapping. ARP Spoofing - redirect the flow of packets in a network. DNS Spoofing - redirect requests from one website to another. Spying on any client connected to the network - see usernames, passwords, visited urls ....etc. Inject code in pages loaded by any computer connected to the same network. Replace files on the fly as they get downloaded by any computer on the same network. Detect ARP spoofing attacks. Bypass HTTPS. Create malware for Windows, OS X and Linux. Create trojans for Windows, OS X and Linux. Hack Windows, OS X and Linux using custom backdoor. Bypass Anti-Virus programs. Use fake login prompt to steal credentials. Display fake updates. Use own keylogger to spy on everything typed on a Windows & Linux. Learn the basics of website hacking / penetration testing. Discover subdomains. Discover hidden files and directories in a website. Run wordlist attacks to guess login information. Discover and exploit XSS vulnerabilities. Discover weaknesses in websites using own vulnerability scanner. Programs you'll build in this course: You'll learn all the above by implementing the following hacking programs mac_changer - changes MAC Address to anything we want. network_scanner - scans network and discovers the IP and MAC address of all connected clients. arp_spoofer - runs an arp spoofing attack to redirect the flow of packets in the network allowing us to intercept data. packet_sniffer - filters intercepted data and shows usernames, passwords, visited links ....etc dns_spoofer - redirects DNS requests, eg: redirects requests to from one domain to another. file_interceptor - replaces intercepted files with any file we want. code_injector - injects code in intercepted HTML pages. arpspoof_detector - detects ARP spoofing attacks. execute_command payload - executes a system command on the computer it gets executed on. execute_and_report payload - executes a system command and reports result via email. download_and_execute payload - downloads a file and executes it on target system. download_execute_and_report payload - downloads a file, executes it, and reports result by email. reverse_backdoor - gives remote control over the system it gets executed on, allows us to Access file system. Execute system commands. Download & upload files keylogger - records key-strikes and sends them to us by email. crawler - discovers hidden paths on a target website. discover_subdomains - discovers subdomains on target website. spider - maps the whole target website and discovers all files, directories and links. guess_login - runs a wordlist attack to guess login information. vulnerability_scanner - scans a target website for weaknesses and produces a report with all findings. As you build the above you'll learn: Setting up a penetration testing lab to practice hacking safely. Installing Kali Linux and Windows as virtual machines inside ANY operating system. Linux Basics. Linux terminal basics. How networks work. How clients communicate in a network. Address Resolution Protocol - ARP. Network layers. Domain Name System - DNS. Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP. HTTPS. How anti-virus programs work. Sockets. Connecting devices over TCP. Transferring data over TCP. How website work. GET & POST requests. And more! By the end of the course you're going to have programming skills to write any program even if it has nothing to do with hacking, but you'll learn programming by programming hacking tools! With this course you'll get 24/7 support, so if you have any questions you can post them in the Q&A section and we'll respond to you within 15 hours. Notes: This course is created for educational purposes only and all the attacks are launched in my own lab or against devices that I have permission to test. This course is totally a product of Zaid Sabih & zSecurity, no other organisation is associated with it or a certification exam. Although, you will receive a Course Completion Certification from Udemy, apart from that NO OTHER ORGANISATION IS INVOLVED. What you’ll learn 170+ videos on Python programming & ethical hacking Install hacking lab & needed software (on Windows, OS X and Linux) Learn 2 topics at the same time - Python programming & Ethical Hacking Start from 0 up to a high-intermediate level Write over 20 ethical hacking and security programs Learn by example, by writing exciting programs Model problems, design solutions & implement them using Python Write programs in Python 2 and 3 Write cross platform programs that work on Windows, OS X & Linux Have a deep understanding on how computer systems work Have a strong base & use the skills learned to write any program even if its not related to hacking Understand what is Hacking, what is Programming, and why are they related Design a testing lab to practice hacking & programming safely Interact & use Linux terminal Understand what MAC address is & how to change it Write a python program to change MAC address Use Python modules and libraries Understand Object Oriented Programming Write object oriented programs Model & design extendable programs Write a program to discover devices connected to the same network Read, analyse & manipulate network packets Understand & interact with different network layers such as ARP, DNS, HTTP ....etc Write a program to redirect the flow of packets in a network (arp spoofer) Write a packet sniffer to filter interesting data such as usernames and passwords Write a program to redirect DNS requests (DNS Spoofer) Intercept and modify network packets on the fly Write a program to replace downloads requested by any computer on the network Analyse & modify HTTP requests and responses Inject code in HTML pages loaded by any computer on the same network Downgrade HTTPS to HTTP Write a program to detect ARP Spoofing attacks Write payloads to download a file, execute command, download & execute, download execute & report .....etc Use sockets to send data over TCP Send data reliably over TCP Write client-server programs Write a backdoor that works on Windows, OS X and Linux Implement cool features in the backdoor such as file system access, upload and download files and persistence Write a remote keylogger that can register all keystrikes and send them by Email Interact with files using python (read, write & modify) Convert python programs to binary executables that work on Windows, OS X and Linux Convert malware to torjans that work and function like other file types like an image or a PDF Bypass Anti-Virus Programs Understand how websites work, the technologies used and how to test them for weaknesses Send requests towebsites and analyse responses Write a program that can discover hidden paths in a website Write a program that can map a website and discover all links, subdomains, files and directories Extract and submit forms from python Run dictionary attacks and guess login information on login pages Analyse HTML using Python Interact with websites using Python Write a program that can discover vulnerabilities in websites Are there any course requirements or prerequisites? Basic IT knowledge No Linux, programming or hacking knowledge required. Computer with a minimum of 4GB ram/memory Operating System: Windows / OS X / Linux Who this course is for: Anybody interested in learning Python programming Anybody interested in learning ethical hacking / penetration testing Instructor User photo Zaid Sabih Ethical Hacker, Computer Scientist & CEO of zSecurity My name is Zaid Al-Quraishi, I am an ethical hacker, a computer scientist, and the founder and CEO of zSecurity. I just love hacking and breaking the rules, but don’t get me wrong as I said I am an ethical hacker. I have tremendous experience in ethical hacking, I started making video tutorials back in 2009 in an ethical hacking community (iSecuri1ty), I also worked as a pentester for the same company. In 2013 I started teaching my first course live and online, this course received amazing feedback which motivated me to publish it on Udemy. This course became the most popular and the top paid course in Udemy for almost a year, this motivated me to make more courses, now I have a number of ethical hacking courses, each focusing on a specific field, dominating the ethical hacking topic on Udemy. Now I have more than 350,000 students on Udemy and other teaching platforms such as StackSocial, StackSkills and zSecurity. Instructor User photo z Security Leading provider of ethical hacking and cyber security training, zSecurity is a leading provider of ethical hacking and cyber security training, we teach hacking and security to help people become ethical hackers so they can test and secure systems from black-hat hackers. Becoming an ethical hacker is simple but not easy, there are many resources online but lots of them are wrong and outdated, not only that but it is hard to stay up to date even if you already have a background in cyber security. Our goal is to educate people and increase awareness by exposing methods used by real black-hat hackers and show how to secure systems from these hackers. Video course

Software Design by Example with JavaScript

An ANN is a model based on a collection of connected units or nodes called "artificial neurons", which loosely model the neurons in a biological brain. Each connection, like the synapses in a biological brain, can transmit information, a "signal", from one artificial neuron to another. An artificial neuron that receives a signal can process it and then signal additional artificial neurons connected to it. In common ANN implementations, the signal at a connection between artificial neurons is a real number, and the output of each artificial neuron is computed by some non-linear function of the sum of its inputs. The connections between artificial neurons are called "edges". Artificial neurons and edges typically have a weight that adjusts as learning proceeds. The weight increases or decreases the strength of the signal at a connection. Artificial neurons may have a threshold such that the signal is only sent if the aggregate signal crosses that threshold. Typically, artificial neurons are aggregated into layers. Different layers may perform different kinds of transformations on their inputs. Signals travel from the first layer (the input layer) to the last layer (the output layer), possibly after traversing the layers multiple times. The original goal of the ANN approach was to solve problems in the same way that a human brain would. However, over time, attention moved to performing specific tasks, leading to deviations from biology. Artificial neural networks have been used on a variety of tasks, including computer vision, speech recognition, machine translation, social network filtering, playing board and video games and medical diagnosis. Deep learning consists of multiple hidden layers in an artificial neural network. This approach tries to model the way the human brain processes light and sound into vision and hearing. Some successful applications of deep learning are computer vision and speech recognition.[68] Decision trees Main article: Decision tree learning Decision tree learning uses a decision tree as a predictive model to go from observations about an item (represented in the branches) to conclusions about the item's target value (represented in the leaves). It is one of the predictive modeling approaches used in statistics, data mining, and machine learning. Tree models where the target variable can take a discrete set of values are called classification trees; in these tree structures, leaves represent class labels and branches represent conjunctions of features that lead to those class labels. Decision trees where the target variable can take continuous values (typically real numbers) are called regression trees. In decision analysis, a decision tree can be used to visually and explicitly represent decisions and decision making. In data mining, a decision tree describes data, but the resulting classification tree can be an input for decision making. Support vector machines Main article: Support vector machines Support vector machines (SVMs), also known as support vector networks, are a set of related supervised learning methods used for classification and regression. Given a set of training examples, each marked as belonging to one of two categories, an SVM training algorithm builds a model that predicts whether a new example falls into one category or the other.[69] An SVM training algorithm is a non-probabilistic, binary, linear classifier, although methods such as Platt scaling exist to use SVM in a probabilistic classification setting. In addition to performing linear classification, SVMs can efficiently perform a non-linear classification using what is called the kernel trick, implicitly mapping their inputs into high-dimensional feature spaces. Illustration of linear regression on a data set. Regression analysis Main article: Regression analysis Regression analysis encompasses a large variety of statistical methods to estimate the relationship between input variables and their associated features. Its most common form is linear regression, where a single line is drawn to best fit the given data according to a mathematical criterion such as ordinary least squares. The latter is often extended by regularization (mathematics) methods to mitigate overfitting and bias, as in ridge regression. When dealing with non-linear problems, go-to models include polynomial regression (for example, used for trendline fitting in Microsoft Excel[70]), logistic regression (often used in statistical classification) or even kernel regression, which introduces non-linearity by taking advantage of the kernel trick to implicitly map input variables to higher-dimensional space. Bayesian networks Main article: Bayesian network A simple Bayesian network. Rain influences whether the sprinkler is activated, and both rain and the sprinkler influence whether the grass is wet. A Bayesian network, belief network, or directed acyclic graphical model is a probabilistic graphical model that represents a set of random variables and their conditional independence with a directed acyclic graph (DAG). For example, a Bayesian network could represent the probabilistic relationships between diseases and symptoms. Given symptoms, the network can be used to compute the probabilities of the presence of various diseases. Efficient algorithms exist that perform inference and learning. Bayesian networks that model sequences of variables, like speech signals or protein sequences, are called dynamic Bayesian networks. Generalizations of Bayesian networks that can represent and solve decision problems under uncertainty are called influence diagrams. Genetic algorithms Main article: Genetic algorithm A genetic algorithm (GA) is a search algorithm and heuristic technique that mimics the process of natural selection, using methods such as mutation and crossover to generate new genotypes in the hope of finding good solutions to a given problem. In machine learning, genetic algorithms were used in the 1980s and 1990s.[71][72] Conversely, machine learning techniques have been used to improve the performance of genetic and evolutionary algorithms.[73] Training models Usually, machine learning models require a lot of data in order for them to perform well. Usually, when training a machine learning model, one needs to collect a large, representative sample of data from a training set. Data from the training set can be as varied as a corpus of text, a collection of images, and data collected from individual users of a service. Overfitting is something to watch out for when training a machine learning model. Federated learning Main article: Federated learning Federated learning is an adapted form of distributed artificial intelligence to training machine learning models that decentralizes the training process, allowing for users' privacy to be maintained by not needing to send their data to a centralized server. This also increases efficiency by decentralizing the training process to many devices. For example, Gboard uses federated machine learning to train search query prediction models on users' mobile phones without having to send individual searches back to Google.[74] Applications There are many applications for machine learning, including: Agriculture Anatomy Adaptive websites Affective computing Banking Bioinformatics Brain–machine interfaces Cheminformatics Citizen science Computer networks Computer vision Credit-card fraud detection Data quality DNA sequence classification Economics Financial market analysis[75] General game playing Handwriting recognition Information retrieval Insurance Internet fraud detection Linguistics Machine learning control Machine perception Machine translation Marketing Medical diagnosis Natural language processing Natural language understanding Online advertising Optimization Recommender systems Robot locomotion Search engines Sentiment analysis Sequence mining Software engineering Speech recognition Structural health monitoring Syntactic pattern recognition Telecommunication Theorem proving Time series forecasting User behavior analytics In 2006, the media-services provider Netflix held the first "Netflix Prize" competition to find a program to better predict user preferences and improve the accuracy of its existing Cinematch movie recommendation algorithm by at least 10%. A joint team made up of researchers from AT&T Labs-Research in collaboration with the teams Big Chaos and Pragmatic Theory built an ensemble model to win the Grand Prize in 2009 for $1 million.[76] Shortly after the prize was awarded, Netflix realized that viewers' ratings were not the best indicators of their viewing patterns ("everything is a recommendation") and they changed their recommendation engine accordingly.[77] In 2010 The Wall Street Journal wrote about the firm Rebellion Research and their use of machine learning to predict the financial crisis.[78] In 2012, co-founder of Sun Microsystems, Vinod Khosla, predicted that 80% of medical doctors' jobs would be lost in the next two decades to automated machine learning medical diagnostic software.[79] In 2014, it was reported that a machine learning algorithm had been applied in the field of art history to study fine art paintings and that it may have revealed previously unrecognized influences among artists.[80] In 2019 Springer Nature published the first research book created using machine learning.[81] Limitations Although machine learning has been transformative in some fields, machine-learning programs often fail to deliver expected results.[82][83][84] Reasons for this are numerous: lack of (suitable) data, lack of access to the data, data bias, privacy problems, badly chosen tasks and algorithms, wrong tools and people, lack of resources, and evaluation problems.[85] In 2018, a self-driving car from Uber failed to detect a pedestrian, who was killed after a collision.[86] Attempts to use machine learning in healthcare with the IBM Watson system failed to deliver even after years of time and billions of dollars invested.[87][88] Bias Main article: Algorithmic bias Machine learning approaches in particular can suffer from different data biases. A machine learning system trained on current customers only may not be able to predict the needs of new customer groups that are not represented in the training data. When trained on man-made data, machine learning is likely to pick up the same constitutional and unconscious biases already present in society.[89] Language models learned from data have been shown to contain human-like biases.[90][91] Machine learning systems used for criminal risk assessment have been found to be biased against black people.[92][93] In 2015, Google photos would often tag black people as gorillas,[94] and in 2018 this still was not well resolved, but Google reportedly was still using the workaround to remove all gorillas from the training data, and thus was not able to recognize real gorillas at all.[95] Similar issues with recognizing non-white people have been found in many other systems.[96] In 2016, Microsoft tested a chatbot that learned from Twitter, and it quickly picked up racist and sexist language.[97] Because of such challenges, the effective use of machine learning may take longer to be adopted in other domains.[98] Concern for fairness in machine learning, that is, reducing bias in machine learning and propelling its use for human good is increasingly expressed by artificial intelligence scientists, including Fei-Fei Li, who reminds engineers that "There’s nothing artificial about AI...It’s inspired by people, it’s created by people, and—most importantly—it impacts people. It is a powerful tool we are only just beginning to understand, and that is a profound responsibility.”[99] Model assessments Classification of machine learning models can be validated by accuracy estimation techniques like the holdout method, which splits the data in a training and test set (conventionally 2/3 training set and 1/3 test set designation) and evaluates the performance of the training model on the test set. In comparison, the K-fold-cross-validation method randomly partitions the data into K subsets and then K experiments are performed each respectively considering 1 subset for evaluation and the remaining K-1 subsets for training the model. In addition to the holdout and cross-validation methods, bootstrap, which samples n instances with replacement from the dataset, can be used to assess model accuracy.[100] In addition to overall accuracy, investigators frequently report sensitivity and specificity meaning True Positive Rate (TPR) and True Negative Rate (TNR) respectively. Similarly, investigators sometimes report the false positive rate (FPR) as well as the false negative rate (FNR). However, these rates are ratios that fail to reveal their numerators and denominators. The total operating characteristic (TOC) is an effective method to express a model's diagnostic ability. TOC shows the numerators and denominators of the previously mentioned rates, thus TOC provides more information than the commonly used receiver operating characteristic (ROC) and ROC's associated area under the curve (AUC).[101] Ethics Machine learning poses a host of ethical questions. Systems which are trained on datasets collected with biases may exhibit these biases upon use (algorithmic bias), thus digitizing cultural prejudices.[102] For example, using job hiring data from a firm with racist hiring policies may lead to a machine learning system duplicating the bias by scoring job applicants against similarity to previous successful applicants.[103][104] Responsible collection of data and documentation of algorithmic rules used by a system thus is a critical part of machine learning. Because human languages contain biases, machines trained on language corpora will necessarily also learn these biases.[105][106] Other forms of ethical challenges, not related to personal biases, are more seen in health care. There are concerns among health care professionals that these systems might not be designed in the public's interest but as income-generating machines. This is especially true in the United States where there is a long-standing ethical dilemma of improving health care, but also increasing profits. For example, the algorithms could be designed to provide patients with unnecessary tests or medication in which the algorithm's proprietary owners hold stakes. There is huge potential for machine learning in health care to provide professionals a great tool to diagnose, medicate, and even plan recovery paths for patients, but this will not happen until the personal biases mentioned previously, and these "greed" biases are addressed.[107] Hardware Since the 2010s, advances in both machine learning algorithms and computer hardware have led to more efficient methods for training deep neural networks (a particular narrow subdomain of machine learning) that contain many layers of non-linear hidden units.[108] By 2019, graphic processing units (GPUs), often with AI-specific enhancements, had displaced CPUs as the dominant method of training large-scale commercial cloud AI.[109] OpenAI estimated the hardware compute used in the largest deep learning projects from AlexNet (2012) to AlphaZero (2017), and found a 300,000-fold increase in the amount of compute required, with a doubling-time trendline of 3.4 months.[110][111] Software Software suites containing a variety of machine learning algorithms include the following: Free and open-source so

NICEHASH PLATFORM TERMS OF USE AND NICEHASH MINING TERMS OF SERVICE PLEASE READ THESE NICEHASH PLATFORM TERMS OF USE AND NICEHASH MINING TERMS OF SERVICE (“Terms”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE THE PLATFORM OR SERVICES DESCRIBED HEREIN. BY SELECTING “I AGREE”, ACCESSING THE PLATFORM, USING NICEHASH MINING SERVICES OR DOWNLOADING OR USING NICEHASH MINING SOFTWARE, YOU ARE ACKNOWLEDGING THAT YOU HAVE READ THESE TERMS, AS AMENDED FROM TIME TO TIME, AND YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THEM. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, OR ANY SUBSEQUENT AMENDMENTS, CHANGES OR UPDATES, DO NOT ACCESS THE PLATFORM, USE NICEHASH MINING SERVICES OR USE THE NICEHASH MINING SOFTWARE. GENERAL These Terms apply to users of the NiceHash Platform (“Platform” and NiceHash Mining Services (“Services”) which are provided to you by NICEHASH Ltd, company organized and existing under the laws of the British Virgin Islands, with registered address at Intershore Chambers, Road Town, Tortola, British Virgin Islands, registration number: 2048669, hereinafter referred to as “NiceHash, as well as “we” or “us”. ELIGIBILITY By using the NiceHash platform and NiceHash Mining Services, you represent and warrant that you: are at least Minimum Age and have capacity to form a binding contract; 
 have not previously been suspended or removed from the NiceHash Platform;
 have full power and authority to enter into this agreement and in doing so will not violate any other agreement to which you are a party;
 are not not furthering, performing, undertaking, engaging in, aiding, or abetting any unlawful activity through your relationship with us, through your use of NiceHash Platform or use of NiceHash Mining Services;
 will not use NiceHash Platform or NiceHash Mining Services if any applicable laws in your country prohibit you from doing so in accordance with these Terms.
 We reserve the right to terminate your access to the NiceHash Platform and Mining Services for any reason and in our sole and absolute discretion. Use of NiceHash Platform and Mining Services is void where prohibited by applicable law. Depending on your country of residence or incorporation or registered office, you may not be able to use all the functions of the NiceHash Platform or services provided therein. It is your responsibility to follow the rules and laws in your country of residence and/or country from which you access the NiceHash Platform. DEFINITIONS NiceHash Platform means a website located on the following web address: www.nicehash.com. NiceHash Mining Services mean all services provided by NiceHash, namely the provision of the NiceHash Platform, NiceHash Hashing power marketplace, NiceHash API, NiceHash OS, NiceHash Mining Software including licence for NiceHash Miner, NiceHash Private Endpoint, NiceHash Account, NiceHash mobile apps, and all other software products, applications and services associated with these products, except for the provision of NiceHash Exchange Services. NiceHash Exchange Service means a service which allows trading of digital assets in the form of digital tokens or cryptographic currency for our users by offering them a trading venue, helping them find a trading counterparty and providing the means for transaction execution. NiceHash Exchange Services are provided by NICEX Ltd and accessible at the NiceHash Platform under NiceHash Exchange Terms of Service. Hashing power marketplace means an infrastructure provided by the NiceHash which enables the Hashing power providers to point their rigs towards NiceHash stratum servers where Hashing power provided by different Hashing power providers is gathered and sold as generic Hashing power to the Hashing power buyers. Hashing power buyer means a legal entity or individual who buys the gathered and generic hashing power on the Hashing power marketplace from undefined Hashing power providers. Hashing power provider means a legal entity or individual who sells his hashing power on the Hashing power marketplace to undefined Hashing power buyers. NiceHash Mining Software means NiceHash Miner and any other software available via the NiceHash Platform. NiceHash Miner means a comprehensive software with graphical user interface and web interface, owned by NiceHash. NiceHash Miner is a process manager software which enables the Hashing power providers to point their rigs towards NiceHash stratum servers and sell their hashing power to the Hashing power buyers. NiceHash Miner also means any and all of its code, compilations, updates, upgrades, modifications, error corrections, patches and bug fixes and similar. NiceHash Miner does not mean third party software compatible with NiceHash Miner (Third Party Plugins and Miners). NiceHash QuickMiner means a software accessible at https://www.nicehash.com/quick-miner which enables Hashing power providers to point their PCs or rigs towards NiceHash stratum servers and sell their hashing power to the Hashing power buyers. NiceHash QuickMiner is intended as a tryout tool. Hashing power rig means all hardware which produces hashing power that represents computation power which is required to calculate the hash function of different type of cryptocurrency. Secondary account is an account managed by third party from which the Account holder deposits funds to his NiceHash Wallet or/and to which the Account holder withdraws funds from his NiceHash Wallet. Stratum is a lightweight mining protocol: https://slushpool.com/help/manual/stratum-protocol. NiceHash Account means an online account available on the NiceHash Platform and created by completing the registration procedure on the NiceHash Platform. Account holder means an individual or legal entity who completes the registration procedure and successfully creates the NiceHash Account. Minimum Age means 18 years old or older, if in order for NiceHash to lawfully provide the Services to you without parental consent (including using your personal data). NiceHash Wallet means a wallet created automatically for the Account holder and provided by the NiceHash Wallet provider. NiceHash does not hold funds on behalf of the Account holder but only transfers Account holder’s requests regarding the NiceHash Wallet transaction to the NiceHash Wallet provider who executes the requested transactions. In this respect NiceHash only processes and performs administrative services related to the payments regarding the NiceHash Mining Services and NiceHash Exchange Services, if applicable. NiceHash Wallet provider is a third party which on the behalf of the Account holder provides and manages the NiceHash Wallet, holds, stores and transfers funds and hosts NiceHash Wallet. For more information about the NiceHash Wallet provider, see the following website: https://www.bitgo.com/. Blockchain network is a distributed database that is used to maintain a continuously growing list of records, called blocks. Force Majeure Event means any governmental or relevant regulatory regulations, acts of God, war, riot, civil commotion, fire, flood, or any disaster or an industrial dispute of workers unrelated to you or NiceHash. Any act, event, omission, happening or non-happening will only be considered Force Majeure if it is not attributable to the wilful act, neglect or failure to take reasonable precautions of the affected party, its agents, employees, consultants, contractors and sub-contractors. SALE AND PURCHASE OF HASHING POWER Hashing power providers agree to sell and NiceHash agrees to proceed Hashing power buyers’ payments for the provided hashing power on the Hashing power marketplace, on the Terms set forth herein. According to the applicable principle get-paid-per-valid-share (pay as you go principle) Hashing power providers will be paid only for validated and accepted hashing power to their NiceHash Wallet or other wallet, as indicated in Account holder’s profile settings or in stratum connection username. In some cases, no Hashing power is sent to Hashing power buyers or is accepted by NiceHash Services, even if Hashing power is generated on the Hashing power rigs. These cases include usage of slower hardware as well as software, hardware or network errors. In these cases, Hashing power providers are not paid for such Hashing power. Hashing power buyers agree to purchase and NiceHash agrees to process the order and forward the purchased hashing power on the Hashing power marketplace, on the Terms set forth herein. According to the applicable principle pay-per-valid-share (pay as you go principle) Hashing power buyers will pay from their NiceHash Wallet only for the hashing power that was validated by our engine. When connection to the mining pool which is selected on the Hashing power order is lost or when an order is cancelled during its lifetime, Hashing power buyer pays for additional 10 seconds worth of hashing power. Hashing power order is charged for extra hashing power when mining pool which is selected on the Hashing power order, generates rapid mining work changes and/or rapid mining job switching. All payments including any fees will be processed in crypto currency and NiceHash does not provide an option to sale and purchase of the hashing power in fiat currency. RISK DISCLOSURE If you choose to use NiceHash Platform, Services and NiceHash Wallet, it is important that you remain aware of the risks involved, that you have adequate technical resources and knowledge to bear such risks and that you monitor your transactions carefully. General risk You understand that NiceHash Platform and Services, blockchain technology, Bitcoin, all other cryptocurrencies and cryptotokens, proof of work concept and other associated and related technologies are new and untested and outside of NiceHash’s control. You acknowledge that there are major risks associated with these technologies. In addition to the risks disclosed below, there are risks that NiceHash cannot foresee and it is unreasonable to believe that such risk could have been foreseeable. The performance of NiceHash’s obligation under these Terms will terminate if market or technology circumstances change to such an extent that (i) these Terms clearly no longer comply with NiceHash’s expectations, (ii) it would be unjust to enforce NiceHash’s obligations in the general opinion or (iii) NiceHash’s obligation becomes impossible. NiceHash Account abuse You acknowledge that there is risk associated with the NiceHash Account abuse and that you have been fully informed and warned about it. The funds stored in the NiceHash Wallet may be disposed by third party in case the third party obtains the Account holder’s login credentials. The Account holder shall protect his login credentials and his electronic devices where the login credentials are stored against unauthorized access. Regulatory risks You acknowledge that there is risk associated with future legislation which may restrict, limit or prohibit certain aspects of blockchain technology which may also result in restriction, limitation or prohibition of NiceHash Services and that you have been fully informed and warned about it. Risk of hacking You acknowledge that there is risk associated with hacking NiceHash Services and NiceHash Wallet and that you have been fully informed and warned about it. Hacker or other groups or organizations may attempt to interfere with NiceHash Services or NiceHash Wallet in any way, including without limitation denial of services attacks, Sybil attacks, spoofing, smurfing, malware attacks, mining attacks or consensus-based attacks. Cryptocurrency risk You acknowledge that there is risk associated with the cryptocurrencies which are used as payment method and that you have been fully informed and warned about it. Cryptocurrencies are prone to, but not limited to, value volatility, transaction costs and times uncertainty, lack of liquidity, availability, regulatory restrictions, policy changes and security risks. NiceHash Wallet risk You acknowledge that there is risk associated with funds held on the NiceHash Wallet and that you have been fully informed and warned about it. You acknowledge that NiceHash Wallet is provided by NiceHash Wallet provider and not NiceHash. You acknowledge and agree that NiceHash shall not be responsible for any NiceHash Wallet provider’s services, including their accuracy, completeness, timeliness, validity, copyright compliance, legality, decency, quality or any other aspect thereof. NiceHash does not assume and shall not have any liability or responsibility to you or any other person or entity for any Hash Wallet provider’s services. Hash Wallet provider’s services and links thereto are provided solely as a convenience to you and you access and use them entirely at your own risk and subject to NiceHash Wallet provider’s terms and conditions. Since the NiceHash Wallet is a cryptocurrency wallet all funds held on it are entirely uninsured in contrast to the funds held on the bank account or other financial institutions which are insured. Connection risk You acknowledge that there are risks associated with usage of NiceHash Services which are provided through the internet including, but not limited to, the failure of hardware, software, configuration and internet connections and that you have been fully informed and warned about it. You acknowledge that NiceHash will not be responsible for any configuration, connection or communication failures, disruptions, errors, distortions or delays you may experience when using NiceHash Services, however caused. Hashing power provision risk You acknowledge that there are risks associated with the provisions of the hashing power which is provided by the Hashing power providers through the Hashing power marketplace and that you have been fully informed and warned about it. You acknowledge that NiceHash does not provide the hashing power but only provides the Hashing power marketplace as a service. Hashing power providers’ Hashing power rigs are new and untested and outside of NiceHash’s control. There is a major risk that the Hashing power rigs (i) will stop providing hashing power, (ii) will provide hashing power in an unstable way, (iii) will be wrongly configured or (iv) provide insufficient speed of the hashing power. Hashing power rigs as hardware could be subject of damage, errors, electricity outage, misconfiguration, connection or communication failures and other malfunctions. NiceHash will not be responsible for operation of Hashing power rigs and its provision of hashing power. By submitting a Hashing power order you agree to Hashing power no-refund policy – all shares forwarded to mining pool, selected on the Hashing power order are final and non-refundable. Hashing power profitability risk You acknowledge that there is risk associated with the profitability of the hashing power provision and that you have been fully informed and warned about it. You acknowledge that all Hashing power rig’s earning estimates and profitability calculations on NiceHash Platform are only for informational purposes and were made based on the Hashing power rigs set up in the test environments. NiceHash does not warrant that your Hashing power rigs would achieve the same profitability or earnings as calculated on NiceHash Platform. There is risk that your Hashing power rig would not produce desired hashing power quantity and quality and that your produced hashing power would differentiate from the hashing power produced by our Hashing power rigs set up in the test environments. There is risk that your Hashing power rigs would not be as profitable as our Hashing power rigs set up in the test environments or would not be profitable at all. WARRANTIES NiceHash Platform and Mining Services are provided on the “AS IS” and “AS AVAILABLE” basis, including all faults and defects. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, NiceHash makes no representations and warranties and you waive all warranties of any kind. Particularly, without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the NiceHash makes no representations and warranties, whether express, implied, statutory or otherwise regarding NiceHash Platform and Mining Services or other services related to NiceHash Platform and provided by third parties, including any warranty that such services will be uninterrupted, harmless, secure or not corrupt or damaged, meet your requirements, achieve any intended results, be compatible or work with any other software, applications, systems or services, meet any performance or error free or that any errors or defects can or will be corrected. Additionally NiceHash makes no representations and warranties, whether express, implied, statutory or otherwise of merchantability, suitability, reliability, availability, timeliness, accuracy, satisfactory quality, fitness for a particular purpose or quality, title and non-infringement with respect to any of the Mining Services or other services related to NiceHash Platform and provided by third parties, or quiet enjoyment and any warranties arising out of any course of dealing, course of performance, trade practice or usage of NiceHash Platform and Mining Services including information, content and material contained therein. Especially NiceHash makes no representations and warranties, whether express, implied, statutory or otherwise regarding any payment services and systems, NiceHash Wallet which is provided by third party or any other financial services which might be related to the NiceHash Platform and Mining Services. You acknowledge that you do not rely on and have not been induced to accept the NiceHash Platform and Mining Services according to these Terms on the basis of any warranties, representations, covenants, undertakings or any other statement whatsoever, other than expressly set out in these Terms that neither the NiceHash nor any of its respective agents, officers, employees or advisers have given any such warranties, representations, covenants, undertakings or other statements. LIABILITY NiceHash and their respective officers, employees or agents will not be liable to you or anyone else, to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, for any damages of any kind, including, but not limited to, direct, consequential, incidental, special or indirect damages (including but not limited to lost profits, trading losses or damages that result from use or loss of use of NiceHash Services or NiceHash Wallet), even if NiceHash has been advised of the possibility of such damages or losses, including, without limitation, from the use or attempted use of NiceHash Platform and Mining Services, NiceHash Wallet or other related websites or services. NiceHash does not assume any obligations to users in connection with the unlawful alienation of Bitcoins, which occurred on 6. 12. 2017 with NICEHASH, d. o. o., and has been fully reimbursed with the completion of the NiceHash Repayment Program. NiceHash will not be responsible for any compensation, reimbursement, or damages arising in connection with: (i) your inability to use the NiceHash Platform and Mining Services, including without limitation as a result of any termination or suspension of the NiceHash Platform or these Terms, power outages, maintenance, defects, system failures, mistakes, omissions, errors, defects, viruses, delays in operation or transmission or any failure of performance, (ii) the cost of procurement of substitute goods or services, (iii) any your investments, expenditures, or commitments in connection with these Terms or your use of or access to the NiceHash Platform and Mining Services, (iv) your reliance on any information obtained from NiceHash, (v) Force Majeure Event, communications failure, theft or other interruptions or (vi) any unauthorized access, alteration, deletion, destruction, damage, loss or failure to store any data, including records, private key or other credentials, associated with NiceHash Platform and Mining Services or NiceHash Wallet. Our aggregate liability (including our directors, members, employees and agents), whether in contract, warranty, tort (including negligence, whether active, passive or imputed), product liability, strict liability or other theory, arising out of or relating to the use of NiceHash Platform and Mining Services, or inability to use the Platform and Services under these Terms or under any other document or agreement executed and delivered in connection herewith or contemplated hereby, shall in any event not exceed 100 EUR per user. You will defend, indemnify, and hold NiceHash harmless and all respective employees, officers, directors, and representatives from and against any claims, demand, action, damages, loss, liabilities, costs and expenses (including reasonable attorney fees) arising out of or relating to (i) any third-party claim concerning these Terms, (ii) your use of, or conduct in connection with, NiceHash Platform and Mining Services, (iii) any feedback you provide, (iv) your violation of these Terms, (v) or your violation of any rights of any other person or entity. If you are obligated to indemnify us, we will have the right, in our sole discretion, to control any action or proceeding (at our expense) and determine whether we wish to settle it. If we are obligated to respond to a third-party subpoena or other compulsory legal order or process described above, you will also reimburse us for reasonable attorney fees, as well as our employees’ and contractors’ time and materials spent responding to the third-party subpoena or other compulsory legal order or process at reasonable hourly rates. The Services and the information, products, and services included in or available through the NiceHash Platform may include inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically added to the information herein. Improvements or changes on the NiceHash Platform can be made at any time. NICEHASH ACCOUNT The registration of the NiceHash Account is made through the NiceHash Platform, where you are required to enter your email address and password in the registration form. After successful completion of registration, the confirmation email is sent to you. After you confirm your registration by clicking on the link in the confirmation email the NiceHash Account is created. NiceHash will send you proof of completed registration once the process is completed. When you create NiceHash Account, you agree to (i) create a strong password that you change frequently and do not use for any other website, (ii) implement reasonable and appropriate measures designed to secure access to any device which has access to your email address associated with your NiceHash Account and your username and password for your NiceHash Account, (iii) maintain the security of your NiceHash Account by protecting your password and by restricting access to your NiceHash Account; (iv) promptly notify us if you discover or otherwise suspect any security breaches related to your NiceHash Account so we can take all required and possible measures to secure your NiceHash Account and (v) take responsibility for all activities that occur under your NiceHash Account and accept all risks of any authorized or unauthorized access to your NiceHash Account, to the maximum extent permitted by law. Losing access to your email, registered at NiceHash Platform, may also mean losing access to your NiceHash Account. You may not be able to use the NiceHash Platform or Mining Services, execute withdrawals and other security sensitive operations until you regain access to your email address, registered at NiceHash Platform. If you wish to change the email address linked to your NiceHash Account, we may ask you to complete a KYC procedure for security purposes. This step serves solely for the purpose of identification in the process of regaining access to your NiceHash Account. Once the NiceHash Account is created a NiceHash Wallet is automatically created for the NiceHash Account when the request for the first deposit to the NiceHash Wallet is made by the user. Account holder’s NiceHash Wallet is generated by NiceHash Wallet provider. Account holder is strongly suggested to enhance the security of his NiceHash Account by adding an additional security step of Two-factor authentication (hereinafter “2FA”) when logging into his account, withdrawing funds from his NiceHash Wallet or placing a new order. Account holder can enable this security feature in the settings of his NiceHash Account. In the event of losing or changing 2FA code, we may ask the Account holder to complete a KYC procedure for security reasons. This step serves solely for the purpose of identification in the process of reactivating Account holders 2FA and it may be subject to an a In order to use certain functionalities of the NiceHash Platform, such as paying for the acquired hashing power, users must deposit funds to the NiceHash Wallet, as the payments for the hashing power could be made only through NiceHash Wallet. Hashing power providers have two options to get paid for the provided hashing power: (i) by using NiceHash Wallet to receive the payments or (ii) by providing other Bitcoin address where the payments shall be received to. Hashing power providers provide their Bitcoin address to NiceHash by providing such details via Account holder’s profile settings or in a form of a stratum username while connecting to NiceHash stratum servers. Account holder may load funds on his NiceHash Wallet from his Secondary account. Account holder may be charged fees by the Secondary account provider or by the blockchain network for such transaction. NiceHash is not responsible for any fees charged by Secondary account providers or by the blockchain network or for the management and security of the Secondary accounts. Account holder is solely responsible for his use of Secondary accounts and Account holder agrees to comply with all terms and conditions applicable to any Secondary accounts. The timing associated with a load transaction will depend in part upon the performance of Secondary accounts providers, the performance of blockchain network and performance of the NiceHash Wallet provider. NiceHash makes no guarantee regarding the amount of time it may take to load funds on to NiceHash Wallet. NiceHash Wallet shall not be used by Account holders to keep, save and hold funds for longer period and also not for executing other transactions which are not related to the transactions regarding the NiceHash Platform. The NiceHash Wallet shall be used exclusively and only for current and ongoing transactions regarding the NiceHash Platform. Account holders shall promptly withdraw any funds kept on the NiceHash Wallet that will not be used and are not intended for the reasons described earlier. Commission fees may be charged by the NiceHash Wallet provider, by the blockchain network or by NiceHash for any NiceHash Wallet transactions. Please refer to the NiceHash Platform, for more information about the commission fees for NiceHash Wallet transactions which are applicable at the time of the transaction. NiceHash reserves the right to change these commission fees according to the provisions to change these Terms at any time for any reason. You have the right to use the NiceHash Account only in compliance with these Terms and other commercial terms and principles published on the NiceHash Platform. In particular, you must observe all regulations aimed at ensuring the security of funds and financial transactions. Provided that the balance of funds in your NiceHash Wallet is greater than any minimum balance requirements needed to satisfy any of your open orders, you may withdraw from your NiceHash Wallet any amount of funds, up to the total amount of funds in your NiceHash Wallet in excess of such minimum balance requirements, to Secondary Account, less any applicable withdrawal fees charged by NiceHash or by the blockchain network for such transaction. Withdrawals are not processed instantly and may be grouped with other withdrawal requests. Some withdrawals may require additional verification information which you will have to provide in order to process the withdrawal. It may take up to 24 hours before withdrawal is fully processed and distributed to the Blockchain network. Please refer to the NiceHash Platform for more information about the withdrawal fees and withdrawal processing. NiceHash reserves the right to change these fees according to the provisions to change these Terms at any time for any reason. You have the right to close the NiceHash Account. In case you have funds on your NiceHash Wallet you should withdraw funds from your account prior to requesting NiceHash Account closure. After we receive your NiceHash Account closure request we will deactivate your NiceHash Account. You can read more about closing the NiceHash Account in our Privacy Policy. Your NiceHash Account may be deactivated due to your inactivity. Your NiceHash account may be locked and a mandatory KYC procedure is applied for security reasons, if it has been more than 6 month since your last login. NiceHash or any of its partners or affiliates are not responsible for the loss of the funds, stored on or transferred from the NiceHash Wallet, as well as for the erroneous implementation of the transactions made via NiceHash Wallet, where such loss or faulty implementation of the transaction are the result of a malfunction of the NiceHash Wallet and the malfunction was caused by you or the NiceHash Wallet provider. You are obliged to inform NiceHash in case of loss or theft, as well as in the case of any possible misuse of the access data to your NiceHash Account, without any delay, and demand change of access data or closure of your existing NiceHash Account and submit a request for new access data. NiceHash will execute the change of access data or closure of the NiceHash Account and the opening of new NiceHash Account as soon as technically possible and without any undue delay. All information pertaining to registration, including a registration form, generation of NiceHash Wallet and detailed instructions on the use of the NiceHash Account and NiceHash Wallet are available at NiceHash Platform. The registration form as well as the entire system is properly protected from unwanted interference by third parties. KYC PROCEDURE NiceHash is appropriately implementing AML/CTF and security measures to diligently detect and prevent any malicious or unlawful use of NiceHash Services or use, which is strictly prohibited by these Terms, which are deemed as your agreement to provide required personal information for identity verification. Security measures include a KYC procedure, which is aimed at determining the identity of an individual user or an organisation. We may ask you to complete this procedure before enabling some or all functionalities of the NiceHash platform and provide its services. A KYC procedure might be applied as a security measure when: changing the email address linked to your NiceHash Account, 
 losing or changing your 2FA code; 
 logging in to your NiceHash Account for the first time after the launch of the new NiceHash Platform in August 2019, 
 gaining access to all or a portion of NiceHash Services, NiceHash Wallet and its related services or any portion thereof if they were disabled due to and 
 activating your NiceHash Account if it has been deactivated due to its inactivity and/or security or other reasons. 
 HASHING POWER TRANSACTIONS General NiceHash may, at any time and in our sole discretion, (i) refuse any order submitted or provided hashing power, (ii) cancel an order or part of the order before it is executed, (iii) impose limits on the order amount permitted or on provided hashing power or (iv) impose any other conditions or restrictions upon your use of the NiceHash Platform and Mining Services without prior notice. For example, but not limited to, NiceHash may limit the number of open orders that you may establish or limit the type of supported Hashing power rigs and mining algorithms or NiceHash may restrict submitting orders or providing hashing power from certain locations. Please refer to the NiceHash Platform, for more information about terminology, hashing power transactions’ definitions and descriptions, order types, order submission, order procedure, order rules and other restrictions and limitations of the hashing power transactions. NiceHash reserves the right to change any transaction, definitions, description, order types, procedure, rules, restrictions and limitations at any time for any reason. Orders, provision of hashing power, payments, deposits, withdrawals and other transactions are accepted only through the interface of the NiceHash Platform, NiceHash API and NiceHash Account and are fixed by the software and hardware tools of the NiceHash Platform. If you do not understand the meaning of any transaction option, NiceHash strongly encourages you not to utilize any of those options. Hashing Power Order In order to submit an Hashing Power Order via the NiceHash Account, the Hashing power buyer must have available funds in his NiceHash Wallet. Hashing power buyer submits a new order to buy hashing power via the NiceHash Platform or via the NiceHash API by setting the following parameters in the order form: NiceHash service server location, third-party mining pool, algorithm to use, order type, set amount he is willing to spend on this order, set price per hash he is willing to pay, optionally approximate limit maximum hashing power for his order and other parameters as requested and by confirming his order. Hashing power buyer may submit an order in maximum amount of funds available on his NiceHash Wallet at the time of order submission. Order run time is only approximate since order’s lifetime is based on the number of hashes that it delivers. Particularly during periods of high volume, illiquidity, fast movement or volatility in the marketplace for any digital assets or hashing power, the actual price per hash at which some of the orders are executed may be different from the prevailing price indicated on NiceHash Platform at the time of your order. You understand that NiceHash is not liable for any such price fluctuations. In the event of market disruption, NiceHash Services disruption, NiceHash Hashing Power Marketplace disruption or manipulation or Force Majeure Event, NiceHash may do one or more of the following: (i) suspend access to the NiceHash Account or NiceHash Platform, or (ii) prevent you from completing any actions in the NiceHash Account, including closing any open orders. Following any such event, when trading resumes, you acknowledge that prevailing market prices may differ significantly from the prices available prior to such event. When Hashing power buyer submits an order for purchasing of the Hashing power via NiceHash Platform or via the NiceHash API he authorizes NiceHash to execute the order on his behalf and for his account in accordance with such order. Hashing power buyer acknowledges and agrees that NiceHash is not acting as his broker, intermediary, agent or advisor or in any fiduciary capacity. NiceHash executes the order in set order amount minus NiceHash’s processing fee. Once the order is successfully submitted the order amount starts to decrease in real time according to the payments for the provided hashing power. Hashing power buyer agrees to pay applicable processing fee to NiceHash for provided services. The NiceHash’s fees are deducted from Hashing power buyer’s NiceHash Wallet once the whole order is exhausted and completed. Please refer to the NiceHash Platform, for more information about the fees which are applicable at the time of provision of services. NiceHash reserves the right to change these fees according to the provisions to change these Terms at any time for any reason. The changed fees will apply only for the NiceHash Services provided after the change of the fees. All orders submitted prior the fee change but not necessary completed prior the fee change will be charged according to the fees applicable at the time of the submission of the order. NiceHash will attempt, on a commercially reasonable basis, to execute the Hashing power buyer’s purchase of the hashing power on the Hashing power marketplace under these Terms according to the best-effort delivery approach. In this respect NiceHash does not guarantee that the hashing power will actually be delivered or verified and does not guarantee any quality of the NiceHash Services. Hashing power buyer may cancel a submitted order during order’s lifetime. If an order has been partially executed, Hashing power buyer may cancel the unexecuted remainder of the order. In this case the NiceHash’s processing fee will apply only for the partially executed order. NiceHash reserves the right to refuse any order cancellation request once the order has been submitted. Selling Hashing Power and the Provision of Hashing Power In order to submit the hashing power to the NiceHash stratum server the Hashing power provider must first point its Hashing power rig to the NiceHash stratum server. Hashing power provider is solely responsible for configuration of his Hashing power rig. The Hashing power provider gets paid by Hashing power buyers for all validated and accepted work that his Hashing power rig has produced. The provided hashing power is validated by NiceHash’s stratum engine and validator. Once the hashing power is validated the Hashing power provider is entitled to receive the payment for his work. NiceHash logs all validated hashing power which was submitted by the Hashing power provider. The Hashing power provider receives the payments of current globally weighted average price on to his NiceHash Wallet or his selected personal Bitcoin address. The payments are made periodically depending on the height of payments. NiceHash reserves the right to hold the payments any time and for any reason by indicating the reason, especially if the payments represent smaller values. Please refer to the NiceHash Platform, for more information about the height of payments for provided hashing power, how the current globally weighted average price is calculated, payment periods, payment conditions and conditions for detention of payments. NiceHash reserves the right to change this payment policy according to the provisions to change these Terms at any time for any reason. All Hashing power rig’s earnings and profitability calculations on NiceHash Platform are only for informational purposes. NiceHash does not warrant that your Hashing power rigs would achieve the same profitability or earnings as calculated on NiceHash Platform. You hereby acknowledge that it is possible that your Hashing power rigs would not be as profitable as indicated in our informational calculations or would not be profitable at all. Hashing power provider agrees to pay applicable processing fee to NiceHash for provided Services. The NiceHash’s fees are deducted from all the payments made to the Hashing power provider for his provided work. Please refer to the NiceHash Platform, for more information about the fees which are applicable at the time of provision of services. Hashing power provider which has not submitted any hashing power to the NiceHash stratum server for a period of 90 days agrees that a processing fee of 0.00001000 BTC or less, depending on the unpaid mining balance, will be deducted from his unpaid mining balance. NiceHash reserves the right to change these fees according to the provisions to change these Terms at any time for any reason. The changed fees will apply only for the NiceHash Services provided after the change of the fees. NiceHash will attempt, on a commercially reasonable basis, to execute the provision of Hashing power providers’ hashing power on the Hashing power marketplace under these Terms according to the best-effort delivery approach. In this respect NiceHash does not guarantee that the hashing power will actually be delivered or verified and does not guarantee any quality of the NiceHash Services. Hashing power provider may disconnect the Hashing power rig from the NiceHash stratum server any time. NiceHash reserves the right to refuse any Hashing power rig once the Hashing power rig has been pointed towards NiceHash stratum server. RESTRICTIONS When accessing the NiceHash Platform or using the Mining Services or NiceHash Wallet, you warrant and agree that you: will not use the Services for any purpose that is unlawful or prohibited by these Terms,
 will not violate any law, contract, intellectual property or other third-party right or commit a tort,
 are solely responsible for your conduct while accessing the NiceHash Platform or using the Mining Services or NiceHash Wallet,
 will not access the NiceHash Platform or use the Mining Services in any manner that could damage, disable, overburden, or impair the provision of the Services or interfere with any other party's use and enjoyment of the Services, 
 will not misuse and/or maliciously use Hashing power rigs, you will particularly refrain from using network botnets or using NiceHash Platform or Mining Services with Hashing power rigs without the knowledge or awareness of Hashing power rig owner(s), 
 will not perform or attempt to perform any kind of malicious attacks on blockchains with the use of the NiceHash Platform or Mining Services, intended to maliciously gain control of more than 50% of the network's mining hash rate, 
 will not use the NiceHash Platform or Mining Services for any kind of market manipulation or disruption, such as but not limited to NiceHash Mining Services disruption and NiceHash Hashing Power Marketplace manipulation.
 In case of any of the above mentioned events, NiceHash reserves the right to immediately suspend your NiceHash Account, freeze or block the funds in the NiceHash Wallet, and suspend your access to NiceHash Platform, particularly if NiceHash believes that such NiceHash Account are in violation of these Terms or Privacy Policy, or any applicable laws and regulation. RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS In the event of disputes with you, NiceHash is obliged to prove that the NiceHash service which is the subject of the dispute was not influenced by technical or other failure. You will have possibility to check at any time, subject to technical availability, the transactions details, statistics and available balance of the funds held on the NiceHash Wallet, through access to the NiceHash Account. You may not obtain or attempt to obtain any materials or information through any means not intentionally made available or provided to you or public through the NiceHash Platform or Mining Services. We may, in our sole discretion, at any time, for any or no reason and without liability to you, with prior notice (i) terminate all rights and obligations between you and NiceHash derived from these Terms, (ii) suspend your access to all or a portion of NiceHash Services, NiceHash Wallet and its related services or any portion thereof and delete or deactivate your NiceHash Account and all related information and files in such account (iii) modify, suspend or discontinue, temporarily or permanently, any portion of NiceHash Platform or (iv) provide enhancements or improvements to the features and functionality of the NiceHash Platform, which may include patches, bug fixes, updates, upgrades and other modifications. Any such change may modify or delete certain portion, features or functionalities of the NiceHash Services. You agree that NiceHash has no obligation to (i) provide any updates, or (ii) continue to provide or enable any particular portion, features or functionalities of the NiceHash Services to you. You further agree that all changes will be (i) deemed to constitute an integral part of the NiceHash Platform, and (ii) subject to these Terms. In the event of your breach of these Terms, including but not limited to, for instance, in the event that you breach any term of these Terms, due to legal grounds originating in anti-money laundering and know your client regulation and procedures, or any other relevant applicable regulation, all right and obligations between you and NiceHash derived from these Terms terminate automatically if you fail to comply with these Terms within the notice period of 8 days after you have been warned by NiceHash about the breach and given 8 days period to cure the breaches. NiceHash reserves the right to keep these rights and obligations in force despite your breach of these Terms. In the event of termination, NiceHash will attempt to return you any funds stored on your NiceHash Wallet not otherwise owed to NiceHash, unless NiceHash believes you have committed fraud, negligence or other misconduct. You acknowledge that the NiceHash Services and NiceHash Wallet may be suspended for maintenance. Technical information about the hashing power transactions, including information about chosen server locations, algorithms used, selected mining pools, your business or activities, including all financial and technical information, specifications, technology together with all details of prices, current transaction performance and future business strategy represent confidential information and trade secrets. NiceHash shall, preserve the confidentiality of all before mentioned information and shall not disclose or cause or permit to be disclosed without your permission any of these information to any person save to the extent that such disclosure is strictly to enable you to perform or comply with any of your obligations under these Terms, or to the extent that there is an irresistible legal requirement on you or NiceHash to do so; or where the information has come into the public domain otherwise than through a breach of any of the terms of these Terms. NiceHash shall not be entitled to make use of any of these confidential information and trade secrets other than during the continuance of and pursuant to these Terms and then only for the purpose of carrying out its obligations pursuant to these Terms. NICEHASH MINER LICENSE (NICEHASH MINING SOFTWARE LICENSE) NiceHash Mining Software whether on disk, in read only memory, or any other media or in any other form is licensed, not sold, to you by NiceHash for use only under these Terms. NiceHash retains ownership of the NiceHash Mining Software itself and reserves all rights not expressly granted to you. Subject to these Terms, you are granted a limited, non-transferable, non-exclusive and a revocable license to download, install and use the NiceHash Mining Software. You may not distribute or make the NiceHash Mining Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple devices at the same time. You may not rent, lease, lend, sell, redistribute, assign, sublicense host, outsource, disclose or otherwise commercially exploit the NiceHash Mining Software or make it available to any third party. There is no license fee for the NiceHash Mining Software. NiceHash reserves the right to change the license fee policy according to the provisions to change these Terms any time and for any reason, including to decide to start charging the license fee for the NiceHash Mining Software. You are responsible for any and all applicable taxes. You may not, and you agree not to or enable others to, copy, decompile, reverse engineer, reverse compile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, decrypt, modify, or create derivative works of the NiceHash Mining Software or any services provided by the NiceHash Mining Software, or any part thereof (except as and only to the extent any foregoing restriction is prohibited by applicable law or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of open-sourced components included with the NiceHash Mining Software). If you choose to allow automatic updates, your device will periodically check with NiceHash for updates and upgrades to the NiceHash Mining Software and, if an update or upgrade is available, the update or upgrade will automatically download and install onto your device and, if applicable, your peripheral devices. You can turn off the automatic updates altogether at any time by changing the automatic updates settings found within the NiceHash Mining Software. You agree that NiceHash may collect and use technical and related information, including but not limited to technical information about your computer, system and application software, and peripherals, that is gathered periodically to facilitate the provision of software updates, product support and other services to you (if any) related to the NiceHash Mining Software and to verify compliance with these Terms. NiceHash may use this information, as long as it is in a form that does not personally identify you, to improve our NiceHash Services. NiceHash Mining Software contains features that rely upon information about your selected mining pools. You agree to our transmission, collection, maintenance, processing, and use of all information obtained from you about your selected mining pools. You can opt out at any time by going to settings in the NiceHash Mining Software. NiceHash may provide interest-based advertising to you. If you do not want to receive relevant ads in the NiceHash Mining Software, you can opt out at any time by going to settings in the NiceHash Mining Software. If you opt out, you will continue to receive the same number of ads, but they may be less relevant because they will not be based on your interest. NiceHash Mining Software license is effective until terminated. All provisions of these Terms regarding the termination apply also for the NiceHash Mining Software license. Upon the termination of NiceHash Mining Software license, you shall cease all use of the NiceHash Mining Software and destroy or delete all copies, full or partial, of the NiceHash Mining Software. THIRD PARTY MINERS AND PLUGINS Third Party Miners and Plugins are a third party software which enables the best and most efficient mining operations. NiceHash Miner integrates third party mining software using a third party miner plugin system. Third Party Mining Software is a closed source software which supports mining algorithms for cryptocurrencies and can be integrated into NiceHash Mining Software. Third Party Miner Plugin enables the connection between NiceHash Mining Software and Third Party Mining Software and it can be closed, as well as open sourced. NiceHash Mining Software user interface enables the user to manually select which available Third Party Miners and Plugins will be downloaded and integrated. Users can select or deselect Third Party Miners and Plugins found in the Plugin Manager window. Some of the available Third Party Miners and Plugins which are most common are preselected by NiceHash, but can be deselected, depending on users' needs. The details of the Third Party Miners and Plugins available for NiceHash Mining Software are accessible within the NiceHash Mining Software user interface. The details include, but not limited to, the author of the software and applicable license information, if applicable information about developer fee for Third Party Miners, software version etc. Developer fees may apply to the use of Third Party Miners and Plugins. NiceHash will not be liable, to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, for any damages of any kind, including, but not limited to, direct, consequential, incidental, special or indirect damages, arising out of using Third Party Miners and Plugins. The latter includes, but is not limited to: i) any power outages, maintenance, defects, system failures, mistakes, omissions, errors, defects, viruses, delays in operation or transmission or any failure of performance; ii) any unauthorized access, alteration, deletion, destruction, damage, loss or failure to store any data, including records, private key or other credentials, associated with usage of Third Party Miners and Plugins and ii) Force Majeure Event, communications failure, theft or other interruptions. If you choose to allow automatic updates, your device will periodically check with NiceHash for updates and upgrades to the installed Third Party Miners and Plugins, if an update or upgrade is available, the update or upgrade will automatically download and install onto your device and, if applicable, your peripheral devices. You can turn off the automatic updates altogether at any time by changing the automatic updates settings found within the NiceHash Mining Software. NICEHASH QUICKMINER NiceHash QuickMiner is a software application that allows the visitors of the NiceHash Quick Miner web page, accessible athttps://www.nicehash.com/quick-miner, to connect their PC or a mining rig to the NiceHash Hashing Power Marketplace. Visitors of the NiceHash Quick Miner web page can try out and experience crypto currency mining without having to register on the NiceHash Platform and create a NiceHash Account. Users are encouraged to do so as soon as possible in order to collect the funds earned using NiceHash Quick Miner. Users can download NiceHash QuickMiner free of charge. In order to operate NiceHash QuickMiner software needs to automatically detect technical information about users' computer hardware. You agree that NiceHash may collect and use technical and related information. For more information please refer to NiceHash Privacy Policy. Funds arising from the usage of NiceHash QuickMiner are transferred to a dedicated cryptocurrency wallet owned and managed by NiceHash. NiceHash QuickMiner Users expressly agree and acknowledge that completing the registration process and creating a NiceHash Account is necessary in order to collect the funds arising from the usage of NiceHash QuickMiner. Users of NiceHash QuickMiner who do not successfully register a NiceHash Account will lose their right to claim funds arising from their usage of NiceHash QuickMiner. Those funds, in addition to the condition that the user has not been active on the NiceHash QuickMiner web page for consecutive 7 days, will be donated to the charity of choice. NICEHASH PRIVATE ENDPOINT NiceHash Private Endpoint is a network interface that connects users privately and securely to NiceHash Stratum servers. Private Endpoint uses a private IP address and avoids additional latency caused by DDOS protection. All NiceHash Private Mining Proxy servers are managed by NiceHash and kept up-to-date. Users can request a dedicated private access endpoint by filling in the form for NiceHash Private Endpoint Solution available at the NiceHash Platform. In the form the user specifies the email address, country, number of connections and locations and algorithms used. Based on the request NiceHash prepares an individualized offer based on the pricing stipulated on the NiceHash Platform, available at https://www.nicehash.com/private-endpoint-solution. NiceHash may request additional information from the users of the Private Endpoint Solution in order to determine whether we are obligated to collect VAT from you, including your VAT identification number. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY NiceHash retains all copyright and other intellectual property rights, including inventions, discoveries, knowhow, processes, marks, methods, compositions, formulae, techniques, information and data, whether or not patentable, copyrightable or protectable in trademark, and any trademarks, copyrights or patents based thereon over all content and other materials contained on NiceHash Platform or provided in connection with the Services, including, without limitation, the NiceHash logo and all designs, text, graphics, pictures, information, data, software, source code, as well as the compilation thereof, sound files, other files and the selection and arrangement thereof. This material is protected by international copyright laws and other intellectual property right laws, namely trademark. These Terms shall not be understood and interpreted in a way that they would mean assignment of copyright or other intellectual property rights, unless it is explicitly defined so in these Terms. NiceHash hereby grants you a limited, nonexclusive and non-sublicensable license to access and use NiceHash’s copyrighted work and other intellectual property for your personal or internal business use. Such license is subject to these Terms and does not permit any resale, the distribution, public performance or public display, modifying or otherwise making any derivative uses, use, publishing, transmission, reverse engineering, participation in the transfer or sale, or any way exploit any of the copyrighted work and other intellectual property other than for their intended purposes. This granted license will automatically terminate if NiceHash suspends or terminates your access to the Services, NiceHash Wallet or closes your NiceHash Account. NiceHash will own exclusive rights, including all intellectual property rights, to any feedback including, but not limited to, suggestions, ideas or other information or materials regarding NiceHash Services or related products that you provide, whether by email, posting through our NiceHash Platform, NiceHash Account or otherwise and you irrevocably assign any and all intellectual property rights on such feedback unlimited in time, scope and territory. Any Feedback you submit is non-confidential and shall become the sole property of NiceHash. NiceHash will be entitled to the unrestricted use, modification or dissemination of such feedback for any purpose, commercial or otherwise, without acknowledgment or compensation to you. You waive any rights you may have to the feedback. We have the right to remove any posting you make on NiceHash Platform if, in our opinion, your post does not comply with the content standards defined by these Terms. PRIVACY POLICY Please refer to our NiceHash Platform and Mining Services Privacy Policy published on the NiceHash Platform for information about how we collect, use and share your information, as well as what options do you have with regards to your personal information. COMMUNICATION AND SUPPORT You agree and consent to receive electronically all communications, agreements, documents, receipts, notices and disclosures that NiceHash provides in connection with your NiceHash Account or use of the NiceHash Platform and Services. You agree that NiceHash may provide these communications to you by posting them via the NiceHash Account or by emailing them to you at the email address you provide. You should maintain copies of electronic communications by printing a paper copy or saving an electronic copy. It is your responsibility to keep your email address updated in the NiceHash Account so that NiceHash can communicate with you electronically. You understand and agree that if NiceHash sends you an electronic communication but you do not receive it because your email address is incorrect, out of date, blocked by your service provider, or you are otherwise unable to receive electronic communications, it will be deemed that you have been provided with the communication. You can update your NiceHash Account preferences at any time by logging into your NiceHash Account. If your email address becomes invalid such that electronic communications sent to you by NiceHash are returned, NiceHash may deem your account to be inactive and close it. You may give NiceHash a notice under these Terms by sending an email to support@nicehash.com or contact NiceHash through support located on the NiceHash Platform. All communication and notices pursuant to these Terms must be given in English language. FEES Please refer to the NiceHash Platform for more information about the fees or administrative costs which are applicable at the time of provision of services. NiceHash reserves the right to change these fees according to the provisions to change these Terms at any time for any reason. The changed fees will apply only for the Services provided after the change of the fees. You authorize us, or our designated payment processor, to charge or deduct your NiceHash Account for any applicable fees in connection with the transactions completed via the Services. TAX It is your responsibility to determine what, if any, taxes apply to the transactions you complete or services you provide via the NiceHash Platform, Mining Services and NiceHash Wallet, it is your responsibility to report and remit the correct tax to the appropriate tax authority and all your factual and potential tax obligations are your concern. You agree that NiceHash is not in any case and under no conditions responsible for determining whether taxes apply to your transactions or services or for collecting, reporting, withholding or remitting any taxes arising from any transactions or services. You also agree that NiceHash is not in any case and under no conditions bound to compensate for your tax obligation or give you any advice related to tax issues. All fees and charges payable by you to NiceHash are exclusive of any taxes, and shall certain taxes be applicable, they shall be added on top of the payable amounts. Upon our request, you will provide to us any information that we reasonably request to determine whether we are obligated to collect VAT from you, including your VAT identification number. If any deduction or withholding is required by law, you will notify NiceHash and will pay NiceHash any additional amounts necessary to ensure that the net amount received by NiceHash, after any deduction and withholding, equals the amount NiceHash would have received if no deduction or withholding had been required. Additionally, you will provide NiceHash with documentation showing that the withheld and deducted amounts have been paid to the relevant taxing authority. FINAL PROVISIONS Natural persons and legal entities that are not capable of holding legal rights and obligations are not allowed to create NiceHash Account and use NiceHash Platform or other related services. If NiceHash becomes aware that such natural person or legal entity has created the NiceHash Account or has used NiceHash Services, NiceHash will delete such NiceHash Account and disable any Services and block access to NiceHash Account and NiceHash Services to such natural person or legal entity. If you register to use the NiceHash Services on behalf of a legal entity, you represent and warrant that (i) such legal entity is duly organized and validly existing under the applicable laws of the jurisdiction of its organization; and (ii) you are duly authorized by such legal entity to act on its behalf. These Terms do not create any third-party beneficiary rights in any individual or entity. These Terms forms the entire agreement and understanding relating to the subject matter hereof and supersede any previous and contemporaneous agreements, arrangements or understandings relating to the subject matter hereof to the exclusion of any terms implied by law that may be excluded by contract. If at any time any provision of these Terms is or becomes illegal, invalid or unenforceable, the legality, validity and enforceability of every other provisions will not in any way be impaired. Such illegal, invalid or unenforceable provision of these Terms shall be deemed to be modified and replaced by such legal, valid and enforceable provision or arrangement, which corresponds as closely as possible to our and your will and business purpose pursued and reflected in these Terms. Headings of sections are for convenience only and shall not be used to limit or construe such sections. No failure to enforce nor delay in enforcing, on our side to the Terms, any right or legal remedy shall function as a waiver thereof, nor shall any individual or partial exercise of any right or legal remedy prevent any further or other enforcement of these rights or legal remedies or the enforcement of any other rights or legal remedies. NiceHash reserves the right to make changes, amendments, supplementations or modifications from time to time to these Terms including but not limited to changes of licence agreement for NiceHash Mining Software and of any fees and compensations policies, in its sole discretion and for any reason. We suggest that you review these Terms periodically for changes. If we make changes to these Terms, we will provide you with notice of such changes, such as by sending an email, providing notice on the NiceHash Platform, placing a popup window after login to the NiceHash Account or by posting the amended Terms on the NiceHash Platform and updating the date at the top of these Terms. The amended Terms will be deemed effective immediately upon posting for any new users of the NiceHash Services. In all other cases, the amended Terms will become effective for preexisting users upon the earlier of either: (i) the date users click or press a button to accept such changes in their NiceHash Account, or (ii) continued use of NiceHash Services 30 days after NiceHash provides notice of such changes. Any amended Terms will apply prospectively to use of the NiceHash Services after such changes become effective. The notice of change of these Terms is considered as notice of termination of all rights and obligations between you and NiceHash derived from these Terms with notice period of 30 days, if you do not accept the amended Terms. If you do not agree to any amended Terms, (i) the agreement between you and NiceHash is terminated by expiry of 30 days period which starts after NiceHash provides you a notice of change of these Terms, (ii) you must discontinue using NiceHash Services and (iii) you must inform us regarding your disagreement with the changes and request closure of your NiceHash Account. If you do not inform us regarding your disagreement and do not request closure of you NiceHash Account, we will deem that you agree with the changed Terms. You may not assign or transfer your rights or obligations under these Terms without the prior written consent of NiceHash. NiceHash may assign or transfer any or all of its rights under these Terms, in whole or in part, without obtaining your consent or approval. These Terms shall be governed by and construed and enforced in accordance with the Laws of the British Virgin Islands, and shall be interpreted in all respects as a British Virgin Islands contract. Any transaction, dispute, controversy, claim or action arising from or related to your access or use of the NiceHash Platform or these Terms of Service likewise shall be governed by the Laws of the British Virgin Islands, exclusive of choice-of-law principles. The rights and remedies conferred on NiceHash by, or pursuant to, these Terms are cumulative and are in addition, and without prejudice, to all other rights and remedies otherwise available to NiceHash at law. NiceHash may transfer its rights and obligations under these Terms to other entities which include, but are not limited to H-BIT, d.o.o. and NICEX Ltd, or any other firm or business entity that directly or indirectly acquires all or substantially all of the assets or business of NICEHASH Ltd. If you do not consent to any transfer, you may terminate this agreement and close your NiceHash Account. These Terms are not boilerplate. If you disagree with any of them, believe that any should not apply to you, or wish to negotiate these Terms, please contact NiceHash and immediately navigate away from the NiceHash Platform. Do not use the NiceHash Mining Services, NiceHash Wallet or other related services until you and NiceHash have agreed upon new terms of service. Last updated: March 1, 2021

What is JavaScript and what does it do? Before you start learning something new, it’s important to understand exactly what it is and what it does. This is especially useful when it comes to mastering a new programming language. In simple terms, JavaScript is a programming language used to make websites interactive. If you think about the basic makeup of a website, you have HTML, which describes and defines the basic content and structure of the website, then you have CSS, which tells the browser how this HTML content should be displayed—determining things like color and font. With just HTML and CSS, you have a website that looks good but doesn’t actually do much. JavaScript brings the website to life by adding functionality. JavaScript is responsible for elements that the user can interact with, such as drop-down menus, modal windows, and contact forms. It is also used to create things like animations, video players, and interactive maps. Nowadays, JavaScript is an all-purpose programming language—meaning it runs across the entire software stack. The most popular application of JavaScript is on the client side (aka frontend), but since Node.js came on the scene, many people run JavaScript on the server side (aka backend) as well. When used on the client side, JavaScript code is read, interpreted, and executed in the user’s web browser. When used on the server side, it is run on a remote computer. You can learn more about the difference between frontend and backend programming here. JavaScript isn’t only used to create websites. It can also be used to build browser-based games and, with the help of certain frameworks, mobile apps for different operating systems. The creation of new libraries and frameworks is also making it possible to build backend programs with JavaScript, such as web apps and server apps. Is it still worth learning JavaScript in 2021? The world of web development is constantly moving. With so many new tools popping up all the time, it can be extremely difficult to know where you should focus your efforts. As an aspiring developer, you’ll want to make sure that what you’re learning is still relevant in today’s industry. If you’re having doubts about JavaScript, it’s important to know that, since its creation in 1995, JavaScript is pretty much everywhere on the web—and that’s not likely to change any time soon. According to the 2020 StackOverflow developer survey, JavaScript is the most commonly used programming language for the eighth year in a row. It is currently used by 94.5% of all websites and, despite originally being designed as a client-side language, JavaScript has now made its way to the server-side of websites (thanks to Node.js), mobile devices (thanks to React Native and Ionic) and desktop (courtesy of Electron). As long as people are interacting with the web, you can assume that JavaScript is highly relevant—there’s no doubt that this is a language worth knowing! With that in mind, let’s look at some of the key benefits of becoming a JavaScript expert. Why learn JavaScript? The most obvious reason for learning JavaScript is if you have hopes of becoming a web developer. Even if you haven’t got your heart set on a tech career, being proficient in JavaScript will enable you to build websites from scratch—a pretty useful skill to have in today’s job market! If you do want to become a web developer, here are some of the main reasons why you should learn JavaScript: JavaScript experts are versatile JavaScript is an extremely versatile language. Once you’ve mastered it, the possibilities are endless: you can code on the client-side (frontend) using Angular and on the server-side (backend) using Node.js. You can also develop web, mobile, and desktop apps using React, React Native, and Electron, and you can even get involved in machine learning. If you want to become a frontend developer, JavaScript is a prerequisite. However, that’s not the only career path open to you as a JavaScript expert. Mastering this key programming language could see you go on to work in full-stack development, games development, information security software engineering, machine learning, and artificial intelligence—to name just a few! Ultimately, if you want any kind of development or engineering career, proficiency in JavaScript is a must. JavaScript experts are in-demand (and well-paid) JavaScript is the most popular programming language in the world, so it’s no wonder that JavaScript is one of the most sought-after skills in the web development industry today. According to the Devskiller IT Skills and Hiring Report 2020, 72% of companies are looking to hire JavaScript experts. Enter the search term “JavaScript” on job site Indeed and you’ll find over 40,000 jobs requiring this skill (in the US). Run the same search on LinkedIn and the results are in excess of 125,000. At the same time, the global demand for JavaScript seems to outweigh the expertise available on the market. According to this 2018 HackerRank report, 48% of employers worldwide need developers with JavaScript skills, while only 42% of student developers claim to be proficient in JavaScript. And, in their most recent report for 2020, HackerRank once again reports that JavaScript is the most popular language that hiring mangers look for in a web developer candidate. Not only are JavaScript experts in demand—they are also well-paid. In the United States, JavaScript developers earn an average yearly salary of $111,953 per year. We’ve covered this topic in more detail in our JavaScript salary guide, but as you can see, learning JavaScript can really boost your earning potential as a developer. JavaScript is beginner-friendly Compared to many other programming languages, JavaScript offers one of the more beginner-friendly entry points into the world of coding. The great thing about JavaScript is that it comes installed on every modern web browser—there’s no need to set up any kind of development environment, which means you can start coding with JavaScript right away! Another advantage of learning JavaScript as your first programming language is that you get instant feedback; with a minimal amount of JavaScript code, you’ll immediately see visible results. There’s also a huge JavaScript community on sites like Stack Overflow, so you’ll find plenty of support as you learn. Not only is JavaScript beginner-friendly; it will also set you up with some extremely valuable transferable skills. JavaScript supports object-oriented, functional, and imperative styles of programming—skills which can be transferred to any new language you might learn later on, such as Python, Java, or C++. JavaScript provides a crucial introduction to key principles and practices that you’ll take with you throughout your career as a developer. Should you learn plain JavaScript first or can you skip to frameworks and libraries? When deciding whether or not to learn JavaScript, what you’re really asking is whether or not you should learn “vanilla” JavaScript. Vanilla JavaScript just means plain JavaScript without any libraries or frameworks. Let’s explore what this means in more detail now. What is meant by vanilla JavaScript, libraries, and frameworks? If you research the term “vanilla JavaScript”, you might run into some confusion; however, all you need to know is that vanilla JavaScript is used to refer to native, standards-based, non-extended JavaScript. There is no difference between vanilla JavaScript and JavaScript—it’s just there to emphasize the usage of plain JavaScript without the use of libraries and frameworks. So what are libraries and frameworks? JavaScript libraries and frameworks both contain sets of prewritten, ready-to-use JavaScript code—but they’re not the same thing. You can think of a framework as your blueprint for building a website: it gives you a structure to work from, and contains ready-made components and tools that help you to build certain elements much quicker than if you were to code them from scratch. Some popular JavaScript frameworks include Angular, React, Vue, and Node.js. Frameworks also contain libraries. Libraries are smaller than frameworks, and tend to be used for more specific cases. A JavaScript library contains sets of JavaScript code which can be called upon to implement certain functions and features. Let’s imagine you want to code a particular element into your website. You could write, say, ten lines of JavaScript from scratch—or you could take the condensed, ready-made version from your chosen JavaScript library. Some examples of JavaScript libraries include jQuery, Lodash, and Underscore. The easiest way to understand how frameworks and libraries work together is to imagine you are building a house. The framework provides the foundation and the structure, while the library enables you to add in ready-made components (like furniture) rather than building your own from scratch. You can learn more about the relationship between languages and libraries in this post explaining the main differences between JavaScript and jQuery. For now, let’s go back to our original question: How important is it to learn vanilla JavaScript? Should you learn vanilla JavaScript first? When it comes to learning JavaScript, it can be tempting to skip ahead to those time-saving frameworks and libraries we just talked about—and many developers do. However, there are many compelling arguments for learning plain JavaScript first. While JavaScript frameworks may help you get the job done quicker, there’s only so far you can go if you don’t understand the core concepts behind these frameworks. Frontend developer Abhishek Nagekar describes how not learning vanilla JavaScript came back to bite him when he started learning the JavaScript frameworks Node and Express: “As I went to write more and more code in Node and Express, I began to get stuck at even the tiniest problems. Suddenly, I was surrounded with words like callbacks, closures, event loop and prototype. It felt like I got a reintroduction to JavaScript, but this time, it was not a toddler playing in its cradle, it was something of a mysterious monster, challenging me on every other step for not having taken it seriously.” The above Tweet references a long-running joke within the developer community, and although it dates way back to 2015, it’s still highly relevant today. If you want to become a developer who can innovate, not just execute, you need to understand the underlying principles of the web—not just the shortcuts. This means learning vanilla JavaScript before you move on to frameworks. In fact, understanding plain JavaScript will help you later on when it comes to deciding whether to use a framework for a certain project, and if so, which framework to use. Why Study JavaScript? JavaScript is one of the 3 languages all web developers must learn: 1. HTML to define the content of web pages 2. CSS to specify the layout of web pages 3. JavaScript to program the behavior of web pages Learning Speed In this tutorial, the learning speed is your choice. Everything is up to you. If you are struggling, take a break, or re-read the material. Always make sure you understand all the "Try-it-Yourself" examples. The only way to become a clever programmer is to: Practice. Practice. Practice. Code. Code. Code ! Commonly Asked Questions How do I get JavaScript? Where can I download JavaScript? Is JavaScript Free? You don't have to get or download JavaScript. JavaScript is already running in your browser on your computer, on your tablet, and on your smart-phone. JavaScript is free to use for everyone.

Software Design by Example in Roc

# Liberty House Club **A Parallel Binance Chain to Enable Smart Contracts** _NOTE: This document is under development. Please check regularly for updates!_ ## Table of Contents - [Motivation](#motivation) - [Design Principles](#design-principles) - [Consensus and Validator Quorum](#consensus-and-validator-quorum) * [Proof of Staked Authority](#proof-of-staked-authority) * [Validator Quorum](#validator-quorum) * [Security and Finality](#security-and-finality) * [Reward](#reward) - [Token Economy](#token-economy) * [Native Token](#native-token) * [Other Tokens](#other-tokens) - [Cross-Chain Transfer and Communication](#cross-chain-transfer-and-communication) * [Cross-Chain Transfer](#cross-chain-transfer) * [BC to BSC Architecture](#bc-to-bsc-architecture) * [BSC to BC Architecture](#bsc-to-bc-architecture) * [Timeout and Error Handling](#timeout-and-error-handling) * [Cross-Chain User Experience](#cross-chain-user-experience) * [Cross-Chain Contract Event](#cross-chain-contract-event) - [Staking and Governance](#staking-and-governance) * [Staking on BC](#staking-on-bc) * [Rewarding](#rewarding) * [Slashing](#slashing) - [Relayers](#relayers) * [BSC Relayers](#bsc-relayers) * [Oracle Relayers](#oracle-relayers) - [Outlook](#outlook) # Motivation After its mainnet community [launch](https://www.binance.com/en/blog/327334696200323072/Binance-DEX-Launches-on-Binance-Chain-Invites-Further-Community-Development) in April 2019, [Binance Chain](https://www.binance.org) has exhibited its high speed and large throughput design. Binance Chain’s primary focus, its native [decentralized application](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Decentralized_application) (“dApp”) [Binance DEX](https://www.binance.org/trade), has demonstrated its low-latency matching with large capacity headroom by handling millions of trading volume in a short time. Flexibility and usability are often in an inverse relationship with performance. The concentration on providing a convenient digital asset issuing and trading venue also brings limitations. Binance Chain's most requested feature is the programmable extendibility, or simply the [Smart Contract](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Smart_contract) and Virtual Machine functions. Digital asset issuers and owners struggle to add new decentralized features for their assets or introduce any sort of community governance and activities. Despite this high demand for adding the Smart Contract feature onto Binance Chain, it is a hard decision to make. The execution of a Smart Contract may slow down the exchange function and add non-deterministic factors to trading. If that compromise could be tolerated, it might be a straightforward idea to introduce a new Virtual Machine specification based on [Tendermint](https://tendermint.com/core/), based on the current underlying consensus protocol and major [RPC](https://docs.binance.org/api-reference/node-rpc.html) implementation of Binance Chain. But all these will increase the learning requirements for all existing dApp communities, and will not be very welcomed. We propose a parallel blockchain of the current Binance Chain to retain the high performance of the native DEX blockchain and to support a friendly Smart Contract function at the same time. # Design Principles After the creation of the parallel blockchain into the Binance Chain ecosystem, two blockchains will run side by side to provide different services. The new parallel chain will be called “**Binance Smart Chain**” (short as “**BSC**” for the below sections), while the existing mainnet remains named “**Binance Chain**” (short as “**BC**” for the below sections). Here are the design principles of **BSC**: 1. **Standalone Blockchain**: technically, BSC is a standalone blockchain, instead of a layer-2 solution. Most BSC fundamental technical and business functions should be self-contained so that it can run well even if the BC stopped for a short period. 2. **Ethereum Compatibility**: The first practical and widely-used Smart Contract platform is Ethereum. To take advantage of the relatively mature applications and community, BSC chooses to be compatible with the existing Ethereum mainnet. This means most of the **dApps**, ecosystem components, and toolings will work with BSC and require zero or minimum changes; BSC node will require similar (or a bit higher) hardware specification and skills to run and operate. The implementation should leave room for BSC to catch up with further Ethereum upgrades. 3. **Staking Involved Consensus and Governance**: Staking-based consensus is more environmentally friendly and leaves more flexible option to the community governance. Expectedly, this consensus should enable better network performance over [proof-of-work](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Proof_of_work) blockchain system, i.e., faster blocking time and higher transaction capacity. 4. **Native Cross-Chain Communication**: both BC and BSC will be implemented with native support for cross-chain communication among the two blockchains. The communication protocol should be bi-directional, decentralized, and trustless. It will concentrate on moving digital assets between BC and BSC, i.e., [BEP2](https://github.com/binance-chain/BEPs/blob/master/BEP2.md) tokens, and eventually, other BEP tokens introduced later. The protocol should care for the minimum of other items stored in the state of the blockchains, with only a few exceptions. # Consensus and Validator Quorum Based on the above design principles, the consensus protocol of BSC is to fulfill the following goals: 1. Blocking time should be shorter than Ethereum network, e.g. 5 seconds or even shorter. 2. It requires limited time to confirm the finality of transactions, e.g. around 1-min level or shorter. 3. There is no inflation of native token: BNB, the block reward is collected from transaction fees, and it will be paid in BNB. 4. It is compatible with Ethereum system as much as possible. 5. It allows modern [proof-of-stake](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Proof_of_stake) blockchain network governance. ## Proof of Staked Authority Although Proof-of-Work (PoW) has been recognized as a practical mechanism to implement a decentralized network, it is not friendly to the environment and also requires a large size of participants to maintain the security. Ethereum and some other blockchain networks, such as [MATIC Bor](https://github.com/maticnetwork/bor), [TOMOChain](https://tomochain.com/), [GoChain](https://gochain.io/), [xDAI](https://xdai.io/), do use [Proof-of-Authority(PoA)](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Proof_of_authority) or its variants in different scenarios, including both testnet and mainnet. PoA provides some defense to 51% attack, with improved efficiency and tolerance to certain levels of Byzantine players (malicious or hacked). It serves as an easy choice to pick as the fundamentals. Meanwhile, the PoA protocol is most criticized for being not as decentralized as PoW, as the validators, i.e. the nodes that take turns to produce blocks, have all the authorities and are prone to corruption and security attacks. Other blockchains, such as EOS and Lisk both, introduce different types of [Delegated Proof of Stake (DPoS)](https://en.bitcoinwiki.org/wiki/DPoS) to allow the token holders to vote and elect the validator set. It increases the decentralization and favors community governance. BSC here proposes to combine DPoS and PoA for consensus, so that: 1. Blocks are produced by a limited set of validators 2. Validators take turns to produce blocks in a PoA manner, similar to [Ethereum’s Clique](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-225) consensus design 3. Validator set are elected in and out based on a staking based governance ## Validator Quorum In the genesis stage, a few trusted nodes will run as the initial Validator Set. After the blocking starts, anyone can compete to join as candidates to elect as a validator. The staking status decides the top 21 most staked nodes to be the next validator set, and such an election will repeat every 24 hours. **BNB** is the token used to stake for BSC. In order to remain as compatible as Ethereum and upgradeable to future consensus protocols to be developed, BSC chooses to rely on the **BC** for staking management (Please refer to the below “[Staking and Governance](#staking-and-governance)” section). There is a **dedicated staking module for BSC on BC**. It will accept BSC staking from BNB holders and calculate the highest staked node set. Upon every UTC midnight, BC will issue a verifiable `ValidatorSetUpdate` cross-chain message to notify BSC to update its validator set. While producing further blocks, the existing BSC validators check whether there is a `ValidatorSetUpdate` message relayed onto BSC periodically. If there is, they will update the validator set after an **epoch period**, i.e. a predefined number of blocking time. For example, if BSC produces a block every 5 seconds, and the epoch period is 240 blocks, then the current validator set will check and update the validator set for the next epoch in 1200 seconds (20 minutes). ## Security and Finality Given there are more than ½\*N+1 validators are honest, PoA based networks usually work securely and properly. However, there are still cases where certain amount Byzantine validators may still manage to attack the network, e.g. through the “[Clone Attack](https://arxiv.org/pdf/1902.10244.pdf)”. To secure as much as BC, BSC users are encouraged to wait until receiving blocks sealed by more than ⅔\*N+1 different validators. In that way, the BSC can be trusted at a similar security level to BC and can tolerate less than ⅓\*N Byzantine validators. With 21 validators, if the block time is 5 seconds, the ⅔\*N+1 different validator seals will need a time period of (⅔\*21+1)*5 = 75 seconds. Any critical applications for BSC may have to wait for ⅔\*N+1 to ensure a relatively secure finality. However, besides such arrangement, BSC does introduce **Slashing** logic to penalize Byzantine validators for **double signing** or **inavailability**, which will be covered in the “Staking and Governance” section later. This Slashing logic will expose the malicious validators in a very short time and make the “Clone Attack” very hard or extremely non-beneficial to execute. With this enhancement, ½\*N+1 or even fewer blocks are enough as confirmation for most transactions. ## Reward All the BSC validators in the current validator set will be rewarded with transaction **fees in BNB**. As BNB is not an inflationary token, there will be no mining rewards as what Bitcoin and Ethereum network generate, and the gas fee is the major reward for validators. As BNB is also utility tokens with other use cases, delegators and validators will still enjoy other benefits of holding BNB. The reward for validators is the fees collected from transactions in each block. Validators can decide how much to give back to the delegators who stake their BNB to them, in order to attract more staking. Every validator will take turns to produce the blocks in the same probability (if they stick to 100% liveness), thus, in the long run, all the stable validators may get a similar size of the reward. Meanwhile, the stakes on each validator may be different, so this brings a counter-intuitive situation that more users trust and delegate to one validator, they potentially get less reward. So rational delegators will tend to delegate to the one with fewer stakes as long as the validator is still trustful (insecure validator may bring slashable risk). In the end, the stakes on all the validators will have less variation. This will actually prevent the stake concentration and “winner wins forever” problem seen on some other networks. Some parts of the gas fee will also be rewarded to relayers for Cross-Chain communication. Please refer to the “[Relayers](#relayers)” section below. # Token Economy BC and BSC share the same token universe for BNB and BEP2 tokens. This defines: 1. The same token can circulate on both networks, and flow between them bi-directionally via a cross-chain communication mechanism. 2. The total circulation of the same token should be managed across the two networks, i.e. the total effective supply of a token should be the sum of the token’s total effective supply on both BSC and BC. 3. The tokens can be initially created on BSC in a similar format as ERC20 token standard, or on BC as a BEP2, then created on the other. There are native ways on both networks to link the two and secure the total supply of the token. ## Native Token BNB will run on BSC in the same way as ETH runs on Ethereum so that it remains as “native token” for both BSC and BC. This means, in addition to BNB is used to pay most of the fees on Binance Chain and Binance DEX, BNB will be also used to: 1. pay “fees“ to deploy smart contracts on BSC 2. stake on selected BSC validators, and get corresponding rewards 3. perform cross-chain operations, such as transfer token assets across BC and BSC ### Seed Fund Certain amounts of BNB will be burnt on BC and minted on BSC during its genesis stage. This amount is called “Seed Fund” to circulate on BSC after the first block, which will be dispatched to the initial BC-to-BSC Relayer(described in later sections) and initial validator set introduced at genesis. These BNBs are used to pay transaction fees in the early stage to transfer more BNB from BC onto BSC via the cross-chain mechanism. The BNB cross-chain transfer is discussed in a later section, but for BC to BSC transfer, it is generally to lock BNB on BC from the source address of the transfer to a system-controlled address and unlock the corresponding amount from special contract to the target address of the transfer on BSC, or reversely, when transferring from BSC to BC, it is to lock BNB from the source address on BSC into a special contract and release locked amount on BC from the system address to the target address. The logic is related to native code on BC and a series of smart contracts on BSC. ## Other Tokens BC supports BEP2 tokens and upcoming [BEP8 tokens](https://github.com/binance-chain/BEPs/pull/69), which are native assets transferrable and tradable (if listed) via fast transactions and sub-second finality. Meanwhile, as BSC is Ethereum compatible, it is natural to support ERC20 tokens on BSC, which here is called “**BEP2E**” (with the real name to be introduced by the future BEPs,it potentially covers BEP8 as well). BEP2E may be “Enhanced” by adding a few more methods to expose more information, such as token denomination, decimal precision definition and the owner address who can decide the Token Binding across the chains. BSC and BC work together to ensure that one token can circulate in both formats with confirmed total supply and be used in different use cases. ### Token Binding BEP2 tokens will be extended to host a new attribute to associate the token with a BSC BEP2E token contract, called “**Binder**”, and this process of association is called “**Token Binding**”. Token Binding can happen at any time after BEP2 and BEP2E are ready. The token owners of either BEP2 or BEP2E don’t need to bother about the Binding, until before they really want to use the tokens on different scenarios. Issuers can either create BEP2 first or BEP2E first, and they can be bound at a later time. Of course, it is encouraged for all the issuers of BEP2 and BEP2E to set the Binding up early after the issuance. A typical procedure to bind the BEP2 and BEP2E will be like the below: 1. Ensure both the BEP2 token and the BEP2E token both exist on each blockchain, with the same total supply. BEP2E should have 3 more methods than typical ERC20 token standard: * symbol(): get token symbol * decimals(): get the number of the token decimal digits * owner(): get **BEP2E contract owner’s address.** This value should be initialized in the BEP2E contract constructor so that the further binding action can verify whether the action is from the BEP2E owner. 2. Decide the initial circulation on both blockchains. Suppose the total supply is *S*, and the expected initial circulating supply on BC is *K*, then the owner should lock S-K tokens to a system controlled address on BC. 3. Equivalently, *K* tokens is locked in the special contract on BSC, which handles major binding functions and is named as **TokenHub**. The issuer of the BEP2E token should lock the *K* amount of that token into TokenHub, resulting in *S-K* tokens to circulate on BSC. Thus the total circulation across 2 blockchains remains as *S*. 4. The issuer of BEP2 token sends the bind transaction on BC. Once the transaction is executed successfully after proper verification: * It transfers *S-K* tokens to a system-controlled address on BC. * A cross-chain bind request package will be created, waiting for Relayers to relay. 5. BSC Relayers will relay the cross-chain bind request package into **TokenHub** on BSC, and the corresponding request and information will be stored into the contract. 6. The contract owner and only the owner can run a special method of TokenHub contract, `ApproveBind`, to verify the binding request to mark it as a success. It will confirm: * the token has not been bound; * the binding is for the proper symbol, with proper total supply and decimal information; * the proper lock are done on both networks; 10. Once the `ApproveBind` method has succeeded, TokenHub will mark the two tokens are bounded and share the same circulation on BSC, and the status will be propagated back to BC. After this final confirmation, the BEP2E contract address and decimals will be written onto the BEP2 token as a new attribute on BC, and the tokens can be transferred across the two blockchains bidirectionally. If the ApproveBind fails, the failure event will also be propagated back to BC to release the locked tokens, and the above steps can be re-tried later. # Cross-Chain Transfer and Communication Cross-chain communication is the key foundation to allow the community to take advantage of the dual chain structure: * users are free to create any tokenization, financial products, and digital assets on BSC or BC as they wish * the items on BSC can be manually and programmingly traded and circulated in a stable, high throughput, lighting fast and friendly environment of BC * users can operate these in one UI and tooling ecosystem. ## Cross-Chain Transfer The cross-chain transfer is the key communication between the two blockchains. Essentially the logic is: 1. the `transfer-out` blockchain will lock the amount from source owner addresses into a system controlled address/contracts; 2. the `transfer-in` blockchain will unlock the amount from the system controlled address/contracts and send it to target addresses. The cross-chain transfer package message should allow the BSC Relayers and BC **Oracle Relayers** to verify: 1. Enough amount of token assets are removed from the source address and locked into a system controlled addresses/contracts on the source blockchain. And this can be confirmed on the target blockchain. 2. Proper amounts of token assets are released from a system controlled addresses/contracts and allocated into target addresses on the target blockchain. If this fails, it can be confirmed on source blockchain, so that the locked token can be released back (may deduct fees). 3. The sum of the total circulation of the token assets across the 2 blockchains are not changed after this transfer action completes, no matter if the transfer succeeds or not.  The architecture of cross-chain communication is as in the above diagram. To accommodate the 2 heteroid systems, communication handling is different in each direction. ## BC to BSC Architecture BC is a Tendermint-based, instant finality blockchain. Validators with at least ⅔\*N+1 of the total voting power will co-sign each block on the chain. So that it is practical to verify the block transactions and even the state value via **Block Header** and **Merkle Proof** verification. This has been researched and implemented as “**Light-Client Protocol**”, which are intensively discussed in [the Ethereum](https://github.com/ethereum/wiki/wiki/Light-client-protocol) community, studied and implemented for [Cosmos inter-chain communication](https://github.com/cosmos/ics/blob/a4173c91560567bdb7cc9abee8e61256fc3725e9/spec/ics-007-tendermint-client/README.md). BC-to-BSC communication will be verified in an “**on-chain light client**” implemented via BSC **Smart Contracts** (some of them may be **“pre-compiled”**). After some transactions and state change happen on BC, if a transaction is defined to trigger cross-chain communication,the Cross-chain “**package**” message will be created and **BSC Relayers** will pass and submit them onto BSC as data into the "build-in system contracts". The build-in system contracts will verify the package and execute the transactions if it passes the verification. The verification will be guaranteed with the below design: 1. BC blocking status will be synced to the light client contracts on BSC from time to time, via block header and pre-commits, for the below information: * block and app hash of BC that are signed by validators * current validatorset, and validator set update 2. the key-value from the blockchain state will be verified based on the Merkle Proof and information from above #1. After confirming the key-value is accurate and trustful, the build-in system contracts will execute the actions corresponding to the cross-chain packages. Some examples of such packages that can be created for BC-to-BSC are: 1. Bind: bind the BEP2 tokens and BEP2E 2. Transfer: transfer tokens after binding, this means the circulation will decrease (be locked) from BC and appear in the target address balance on BSC 3. Error Handling: to handle any timeout/failure event for BSC-to-BC communication 4. Validatorset update of BSC To ensure no duplication, proper message sequence and timely timeout, there is a “Channel” concept introduced on BC to manage any types of the communication. For relayers, please also refer to the below “Relayers” section. ## BSC to BC Architecture BSC uses Proof of Staked Authority consensus protocol, which has a chance to fork and requires confirmation of more blocks. One block only has the signature of one validator, so that it is not easy to rely on one block to verify data from BSC. To take full advantage of validator quorum of BC, an idea similar to many [Bridge ](https://github.com/poanetwork/poa-bridge)or Oracle blockchains is adopted: 1. The cross-chain communication requests from BSC will be submitted and executed onto BSC as transactions. The execution of the transanction wil emit `Events`, and such events can be observed and packaged in certain “**Oracle**” onto BC. Instead of Block Headers, Hash and Merkle Proof, this type of “Oracle” package directly contains the cross-chain information for actions, such as sender, receiver and amount for transfer. 2. To ensure the security of the Oracle, the validators of BC will form anothe quorum of “**Oracle Relayers**”. Each validator of the BC should run a **dedicated process** as the Oracle Relayer. These Oracle Relayers will submit and vote for the cross-chain communication package, like Oracle, onto BC, using the same validator keys. Any package signed by more than ⅔\*N+1 Oracle Relayers’ voting power is as secure as any block signed by ⅔\*N+1 of the same quorum of validators’ voting power. By using the same validator quorum, it saves the light client code on BC and continuous block updates onto BC. Such Oracles also have Oracle IDs and types, to ensure sequencing and proper error handling. ## Timeout and Error Handling There are scenarios that the cross-chain communication fails. For example, the relayed package cannot be executed on BSC due to some coding bug in the contracts. **Timeout and error handling logics are** used in such scenarios. For the recognizable user and system errors or any expected exceptions, the two networks should heal themselves. For example, when BC to BSC transfer fails, BSC will issue a failure event and Oracle Relayers will execute a refund on BC; when BSC to BC transfer fails, BC will issue a refund package for Relayer to relay in order to unlock the fund. However, unexpected error or exception may still happen on any step of the cross-chain communication. In such a case, the Relayers and Oracle Relayers will discover that the corresponding cross-chain channel is stuck in a particular sequence. After a Timeout period, the Relayers and Oracle Relayers can request a “SkipSequence” transaction, the stuck sequence will be marked as “Unexecutable”. A corresponding alerts will be raised, and the community has to discuss how to handle this scenario, e.g. payback via the sponsor of the validators, or event clear the fund during next network upgrade. ## Cross-Chain User Experience Ideally, users expect to use two parallel chains in the same way as they use one single chain. It requires more aggregated transaction types to be added onto the cross-chain communication to enable this, which will add great complexity, tight coupling, and maintenance burden. Here BC and BSC only implement the basic operations to enable the value flow in the initial launch and leave most of the user experience work to client side UI, such as wallets. E.g. a great wallet may allow users to sell a token directly from BSC onto BC’s DEX order book, in a secure way. ## Cross-Chain Contract Event Cross-Chain Contract Event (CCCE) is designed to allow a smart contract to trigger cross-chain transactions, directly through the contract code. This becomes possible based on: 1. Standard system contracts can be provided to serve operations callable by general smart contracts; 2. Standard events can be emitted by the standard contracts; 3. Oracle Relayers can capture the standard events, and trigger the corresponding cross-chain operations; 4. Dedicated, code-managed address (account) can be created on BC and accessed by the contracts on the BSC, here it is named as **“Contract Address on BC” (CAoB)**. Several standard operations are implemented: 1. BSC to BC transfer: this is implemented in the same way as normal BSC to BC transfer, by only triggered via standard contract. The fund can be transferred to any addresses on BC, including the corresponding CAoB of the transfer originating contract. 2. Transfer on BC: this is implemented as a special cross-chain transfer, while the real transfer is from **CAoB** to any other address (even another CAoB). 3. BC to BSC transfer: this is implemented as two-pass cross-chain communication. The first is triggered by the BSC contract and propagated onto BC, and then in the second pass, BC will start a normal BC to BSC cross-chain transfer, from **CAoB** to contract address on BSC. A special note should be paid on that the BSC contract only increases balance upon any transfer coming in on the second pass, and the error handling in the second pass is the same as the normal BC to BSC transfer. 4. IOC (Immediate-Or-Cancel) Trade Out: the primary goal of transferring assets to BC is to trade. This event will instruct to trade a certain amount of an asset in CAoB into another asset as much as possible and transfer out all the results, i.e. the left the source and the traded target tokens of the trade, back to BSC. BC will handle such relayed events by sending an “Immediate-Or-Cancel”, i.e. IOC order onto the trading pairs, once the next matching finishes, the result will be relayed back to BSC, which can be in either one or two assets. 5. Auction Trade Out: Such event will instruct BC to send an auction order to trade a certain amount of an asset in **CAoB** into another asset as much as possible and transfer out all the results back to BSC at the end of the auction. Auction function is upcoming on BC. There are some details for the Trade Out: 1. both can have a limit price (absolute or relative) for the trade; 2. the end result will be written as cross-chain packages to relay back to BSC; 3. cross-chain communication fees may be charged from the asset transferred back to BSC; 4. BSC contract maintains a mirror of the balance and outstanding orders on CAoB. No matter what error happens during the Trade Out, the final status will be propagated back to the originating contract and clear its internal state. With the above features, it simply adds the cross-chain transfer and exchange functions with high liquidity onto all the smart contracts on BSC. It will greatly add the application scenarios on Smart Contract and dApps, and make 1 chain +1 chain > 2 chains. # Staking and Governance Proof of Staked Authority brings in decentralization and community involvement. Its core logic can be summarized as the below. You may see similar ideas from other networks, especially Cosmos and EOS. 1. Token holders, including the validators, can put their tokens “**bonded**” into the stake. Token holders can **delegate** their tokens onto any validator or validator candidate, to expect it can become an actual validator, and later they can choose a different validator or candidate to **re-delegate** their tokens¹. 2. All validator candidates will be ranked by the number of bonded tokens on them, and the top ones will become the real validators. 3. Validators can share (part of) their blocking reward with their delegators. 4. Validators can suffer from “**Slashing**”, a punishment for their bad behaviors, such as double sign and/or instability. 5. There is an “**unbonding period**” for validators and delegators so that the system makes sure the tokens remain bonded when bad behaviors are caught, the responsible will get slashed during this period. ## Staking on BC Ideally, such staking and reward logic should be built into the blockchain, and automatically executed as the blocking happens. Cosmos Hub, who shares the same Tendermint consensus and libraries with Binance Chain, works in this way. BC has been preparing to enable staking logic since the design days. On the other side, as BSC wants to remain compatible with Ethereum as much as possible, it is a great challenge and efforts to implement such logic on it. This is especially true when Ethereum itself may move into a different Proof of Stake consensus protocol in a short (or longer) time. In order to keep the compatibility and reuse the good foundation of BC, the staking logic of BSC is implemented on BC: 1. The staking token is BNB, as it is a native token on both blockchains anyway 2. The staking, i.e. token bond and delegation actions and records for BSC, happens on BC. 3. The BSC validator set is determined by its staking and delegation logic, via a staking module built on BC for BSC, and propagated every day UTC 00:00 from BC to BSC via Cross-Chain communication. 4. The reward distribution happens on BC around every day UTC 00:00. ## Rewarding Both the validator update and reward distribution happen every day around UTC 00:00. This is to save the cost of frequent staking updates and block reward distribution. This cost can be significant, as the blocking reward is collected on BSC and distributed on BC to BSC validators and delegators. (Please note BC blocking fees will remain rewarding to BC validators only.) A deliberate delay is introduced here to make sure the distribution is fair: 1. The blocking reward will not be sent to validator right away, instead, they will be distributed and accumulated on a contract; 2. Upon receiving the validator set update into BSC, it will trigger a few cross-chain transfers to transfer the reward to custody addresses on the corresponding validators. The custody addresses are owned by the system so that the reward cannot be spent until the promised distribution to delegators happens. 3. In order to make the synchronization simpler and allocate time to accommodate slashing, the reward for N day will be only distributed in N+2 days. After the delegators get the reward, the left will be transferred to validators’ own reward addresses. ## Slashing Slashing is part of the on-chain governance, to ensure the malicious or negative behaviors are punished. BSC slash can be submitted by anyone. The transaction submission requires **slash evidence** and cost fees but also brings a larger reward when it is successful. So far there are two slashable cases. ### Double Sign It is quite a serious error and very likely deliberate offense when a validator signs more than one block with the same height and parent block. The reference protocol implementation should already have logic to prevent this, so only the malicious code can trigger this. When Double Sign happens, the validator should be removed from the Validator **Set** right away. Anyone can submit a slash request on BC with the evidence of Double Sign of BSC, which should contain the 2 block headers with the same height and parent block, sealed by the offending validator. Upon receiving the evidence, if the BC verifies it to be valid: 1. The validator will be removed from validator set by an instance BSC validator set update Cross-Chain update; 2. A predefined amount of BNB would be slashed from the **self-delegated** BNB of the validator; Both validator and its delegators will not receive the staking rewards. 3. Part of the slashed BNB will allocate to the submitter’s address, which is a reward and larger than the cost of submitting slash request transaction 4. The rest of the slashed BNB will allocate to the other validators’ custody addresses, and distributed to all delegators in the same way as blocking reward. ### Inavailability The liveness of BSC relies on everyone in the Proof of Staked Authority validator set can produce blocks timely when it is their turn. Validators can miss their turn due to any reason, especially problems in their hardware, software, configuration or network. This instability of the operation will hurt the performance and introduce more indeterministic into the system. There can be an internal smart contract responsible for recording the missed blocking metrics of each validator. Once the metrics are above the predefined threshold, the blocking reward for validator will not be relayed to BC for distribution but shared with other better validators. In such a way, the poorly-operating validator should be gradually voted out of the validator set as their delegators will receive less or none reward. If the metrics remain above another higher level of threshold, the validator will be dropped from the rotation, and this will be propagated back to BC, then a predefined amount of BNB would be slashed from the **self-delegated** BNB of the validator. Both validators and delegators will not receive their staking rewards. ### Governance Parameters There are many system parameters to control the behavior of the BSC, e.g. slash amount, cross-chain transfer fees. All these parameters will be determined by BSC Validator Set together through a proposal-vote process based on their staking. Such the process will be carried on BC, and the new parameter values will be picked up by corresponding system contracts via a cross-chain communication. # Relayers Relayers are responsible to submit Cross-Chain Communication Packages between the two blockchains. Due to the heterogeneous parallel chain structure, two different types of Relayers are created. ## BSC Relayers Relayers for BC to BSC communication referred to as “**BSC Relayers**”, or just simply “Relayers”. Relayer is a standalone process that can be run by anyone, and anywhere, except that Relayers must register themselves onto BSC and deposit a certain refundable amount of BNB. Only relaying requests from the registered Relayers will be accepted by BSC. The package they relay will be verified by the on-chain light client on BSC. The successful relay needs to pass enough verification and costs gas fees on BSC, and thus there should be incentive reward to encourage the community to run Relayers. ### Incentives There are two major communication types: 1. Users triggered Operations, such as `token bind` or `cross chain transfer`. Users must pay additional fee to as relayer reward. The reward will be shared with the relayers who sync the referenced blockchain headers. Besides, the reward won't be paid the relayers' accounts directly. A reward distribution mechanism will be brought in to avoid monopolization. 2. System Synchronization, such as delivering `refund package`(caused by failures of most oracle relayers), special blockchain header synchronization(header contains BC validatorset update), BSC staking package. System reward contract will pay reward to relayers' accounts directly. If some Relayers have faster networks and better hardware, they can monopolize all the package relaying and leave no reward to others. Thus fewer participants will join for relaying, which encourages centralization and harms the efficiency and security of the network. Ideally, due to the decentralization and dynamic re-election of BSC validators, one Relayer can hardly be always the first to relay every message. But in order to avoid the monopolization further, the rewarding economy is also specially designed to minimize such chance: 1. The reward for Relayers will be only distributed in batches, and one batch will cover a number of successful relayed packages. 2. The reward a Relayer can get from a batch distribution is not linearly in proportion to their number of successful relayed packages. Instead, except the first a few relays, the more a Relayer relays during a batch period, the less reward it will collect. ## Oracle Relayers Relayers for BSC to BC communication are using the “Oracle” model, and so-called “**Oracle Relayers**”. Each of the validators must, and only the ones of the validator set, run Oracle Relayers. Each Oracle Relayer watches the blockchain state change. Once it catches Cross-Chain Communication Packages, it will submit to vote for the requests. After Oracle Relayers from ⅔ of the voting power of BC validators vote for the changes, the cross-chain actions will be performed. Oracle Replayers should wait for enough blocks to confirm the finality on BSC before submitting and voting for the cross-chain communication packages onto BC. The cross-chain fees will be distributed to BC validators together with the normal BC blocking rewards. Such oracle type relaying depends on all the validators to support. As all the votes for the cross-chain communication packages are recorded on the blockchain, it is not hard to have a metric system to assess the performance of the Oracle Relayers. The poorest performer may have their rewards clawed back via another Slashing logic introduced in the future. # Outlook It is hard to conclude for Binance Chain, as it has never stopped evolving. The dual-chain strategy is to open the gate for users to take advantage of the fast transferring and trading on one side, and flexible and extendable programming on the other side, but it will be one stop along the development of Binance Chain. Here below are the topics to look into so as to facilitate the community better for more usability and extensibility: 1. Add different digital asset model for different business use cases 2. Enable more data feed, especially DEX market data, to be communicated from Binance DEX to BSC 3. Provide interface and compatibility to integrate with Ethereum, including its further upgrade, and other blockchain 4. Improve client side experience to manage wallets and use blockchain more conveniently ------ [1]: BNB business practitioners may provide other benefits for BNB delegators, as they do now for long term BNB holders.

A chatbot (also known as a talkbot, chatterbot, Bot, IM bot, interactive agent, or Artificial Conversational Entity)The classic historic early chatbots are ELIZA (1966) and PARRY (1972).More recent notable programs include A.L.I.C.E., Jabberwacky and D.U.D.E (Agence Nationale de la Recherche and CNRS 2006). While ELIZA and PARRY were used exclusively to simulate typed conversation, many chatbots now include functional features such as games and web searching abilities. In 1984, a book called The Policeman's Beard is Half Constructed was published, allegedly written by the chatbot Racter (though the program as released would not have been capable of doing so). One pertinent field of AI research is natural language processing. Usually, weak AI fields employ specialized software or programming languages created specifically for the narrow function required. For example, A.L.I.C.E. uses a markup language called AIML, which is specific to its function as a conversational agent, and has since been adopted by various other developers of, so called, Alicebots. Nevertheless, A.L.I.C.E. is still purely based on pattern matching techniques without any reasoning capabilities, the same technique ELIZA was using back in 1966. This is not strong AI, which would require sapience and logical reasoning abilities. Jabberwacky learns new responses and context based on real-time user interactions, rather than being driven from a static database. Some more recent chatbots also combine real-time learning with evolutionary algorithms that optimise their ability to communicate based on each conversation held. Still, there is currently no general purpose conversational artificial intelligence, and some software developers focus on the practical aspect, information retrieval. Chatbot competitions focus on the Turing test or more specific goals. Two such annual contests are the Loebner Prize and The Chatterbox Challenge (offline since 2015, materials can still be found from web archives). According to Forrester (2015), AI will replace 16 percent of American jobs by the end of the decade.Chatbots have been used in applications such as customer service, sales and product education. However, a study conducted by Narrative Science in 2015 found that 80 percent of their respondents believe AI improves worker performance and creates jobs.[citation needed] is a computer program or an artificial intelligence which conducts a conversation via auditory or textual methods. Such programs are often designed to convincingly simulate how a human would behave as a conversational partner, thereby passing the Turing test. Chatbots are typically used in dialog systems for various practical purposes including customer service or information acquisition. Some chatterbots use sophisticated natural language processing systems, but many simpler systems scan for keywords within the input, then pull a reply with the most matching keywords, or the most similar wording pattern, from a database. The term "ChatterBot" was originally coined by Michael Mauldin (creator of the first Verbot, Julia) in 1994 to describe these conversational programs.Today, most chatbots are either accessed via virtual assistants such as Google Assistant and Amazon Alexa, via messaging apps such as Facebook Messenger or WeChat, or via individual organizations' apps and websites. Chatbots can be classified into usage categories such as conversational commerce (e-commerce via chat), analytics, communication, customer support, design, developer tools, education, entertainment, finance, food, games, health, HR, marketing, news, personal, productivity, shopping, social, sports, travel and utilities. Background

This project was created as a simple example to show how we can implement the hexagonal architecture(software design) proposed by Netflix.

Copyright 2012 United States Government as represented by the # Administrator of the National Aeronautics and Space Administration. # All Rights Reserved. # # Copyright 2012 Nebula, Inc. # # Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may # not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain # a copy of the License at # # http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 # # Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software # distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT # WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the # License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations # under the License. import glob import logging import os import sys import warnings from django.utils.translation import pgettext_lazy from django.utils.translation import ugettext_lazy as _ from horizon.utils.escape import monkeypatch_escape from openstack_dashboard import enabled from openstack_dashboard import exceptions from openstack_dashboard.local import enabled as local_enabled from openstack_dashboard import theme_settings from openstack_dashboard.utils import config from openstack_dashboard.utils import settings as settings_utils monkeypatch_escape() _LOG = logging.getLogger(__name__) warnings.formatwarning = lambda message, category, *args, **kwargs: \ '%s: %s' % (category.__name__, message) ROOT_PATH = os.path.dirname(os.path.abspath(__file__)) if ROOT_PATH not in sys.path: sys.path.append(ROOT_PATH) DEBUG = False SITE_BRANDING = 'OpenStack Dashboard' WEBROOT = '/' LOGIN_URL = None LOGOUT_URL = None LOGIN_ERROR = None LOGIN_REDIRECT_URL = None MEDIA_ROOT = None MEDIA_URL = None STATIC_ROOT = None STATIC_URL = None SELECTABLE_THEMES = None INTEGRATION_TESTS_SUPPORT = False NG_TEMPLATE_CACHE_AGE = 2592000 ROOT_URLCONF = 'openstack_dashboard.urls' HORIZON_CONFIG = { 'user_home': 'openstack_dashboard.views.get_user_home', 'ajax_queue_limit': 10, 'auto_fade_alerts': { 'delay': 3000, 'fade_duration': 1500, 'types': ['alert-success', 'alert-info'] }, 'bug_url': None, 'help_url': "https://docs.openstack.org/", 'exceptions': {'recoverable': exceptions.RECOVERABLE, 'not_found': exceptions.NOT_FOUND, 'unauthorized': exceptions.UNAUTHORIZED}, 'modal_backdrop': 'static', 'angular_modules': [], 'js_files': [], 'js_spec_files': [], 'external_templates': [], 'plugins': [], 'integration_tests_support': INTEGRATION_TESTS_SUPPORT } # The OPENSTACK_IMAGE_BACKEND settings can be used to customize features # in the OpenStack Dashboard related to the Image service, such as the list # of supported image formats. OPENSTACK_IMAGE_BACKEND = { 'image_formats': [ ('', _('Select format')), ('aki', _('AKI - Amazon Kernel Image')), ('ami', _('AMI - Amazon Machine Image')), ('ari', _('ARI - Amazon Ramdisk Image')), ('docker', _('Docker')), ('iso', _('ISO - Optical Disk Image')), ('ova', _('OVA - Open Virtual Appliance')), ('ploop', _('PLOOP - Virtuozzo/Parallels Loopback Disk')), ('qcow2', _('QCOW2 - QEMU Emulator')), ('raw', _('Raw')), ('vdi', _('VDI - Virtual Disk Image')), ('vhd', _('VHD - Virtual Hard Disk')), ('vhdx', _('VHDX - Large Virtual Hard Disk')), ('vmdk', _('VMDK - Virtual Machine Disk')), ] } MIDDLEWARE = ( 'openstack_auth.middleware.OpenstackAuthMonkeyPatchMiddleware', 'debreach.middleware.RandomCommentMiddleware', 'django.middleware.common.CommonMiddleware', 'django.middleware.csrf.CsrfViewMiddleware', 'django.contrib.sessions.middleware.SessionMiddleware', 'django.contrib.auth.middleware.AuthenticationMiddleware', 'horizon.middleware.OperationLogMiddleware', 'django.contrib.messages.middleware.MessageMiddleware', 'horizon.middleware.HorizonMiddleware', 'horizon.themes.ThemeMiddleware', 'django.middleware.locale.LocaleMiddleware', 'django.middleware.clickjacking.XFrameOptionsMiddleware', 'openstack_dashboard.contrib.developer.profiler.middleware.' 'ProfilerClientMiddleware', 'openstack_dashboard.contrib.developer.profiler.middleware.' 'ProfilerMiddleware', ) CACHED_TEMPLATE_LOADERS = [ 'django.template.loaders.filesystem.Loader', 'django.template.loaders.app_directories.Loader', 'horizon.loaders.TemplateLoader' ] ADD_TEMPLATE_LOADERS = [] ADD_TEMPLATE_DIRS = [] TEMPLATES = [ { 'BACKEND': 'django.template.backends.django.DjangoTemplates', 'DIRS': [os.path.join(ROOT_PATH, 'templates')], 'OPTIONS': { 'context_processors': [ 'django.template.context_processors.debug', 'django.template.context_processors.i18n', 'django.template.context_processors.request', 'django.template.context_processors.media', 'django.template.context_processors.static', 'django.contrib.messages.context_processors.messages', 'horizon.context_processors.horizon', 'openstack_dashboard.context_processors.openstack', ], 'loaders': [ 'horizon.themes.ThemeTemplateLoader' ], }, }, ] STATICFILES_FINDERS = ( 'django.contrib.staticfiles.finders.FileSystemFinder', 'horizon.contrib.staticfiles.finders.HorizonStaticFinder', 'compressor.finders.CompressorFinder', ) COMPRESS_PRECOMPILERS = ( ('text/scss', 'horizon.utils.scss_filter.HorizonScssFilter'), ) COMPRESS_CSS_FILTERS = ( 'compressor.filters.css_default.CssAbsoluteFilter', ) COMPRESS_ENABLED = True COMPRESS_OUTPUT_DIR = 'dashboard' COMPRESS_CSS_HASHING_METHOD = 'hash' COMPRESS_PARSER = 'compressor.parser.HtmlParser' INSTALLED_APPS = [ 'openstack_dashboard', 'django.contrib.contenttypes', 'django.contrib.auth', 'django.contrib.sessions', 'django.contrib.messages', 'django.contrib.staticfiles', 'django.contrib.humanize', 'django_pyscss', 'debreach', 'openstack_dashboard.django_pyscss_fix', 'compressor', 'horizon', 'openstack_auth', ] AUTHENTICATION_BACKENDS = ('openstack_auth.backend.KeystoneBackend',) AUTHENTICATION_URLS = ['openstack_auth.urls'] AUTH_USER_MODEL = 'openstack_auth.User' MESSAGE_STORAGE = 'django.contrib.messages.storage.fallback.FallbackStorage' SESSION_ENGINE = 'django.contrib.sessions.backends.cache' CACHES = { 'default': { 'BACKEND': 'django.core.cache.backends.memcached.MemcachedCache', 'LOCATION': '127.0.0.1:11211', }, } SESSION_COOKIE_HTTPONLY = True SESSION_EXPIRE_AT_BROWSER_CLOSE = True SESSION_COOKIE_SECURE = False # Control whether the SESSION_TIMEOUT period is refreshed due to activity. If # False, SESSION_TIMEOUT acts as a hard limit. SESSION_REFRESH = True # This SESSION_TIMEOUT is a method to supercede the token timeout with a # shorter horizon session timeout (in seconds). If SESSION_REFRESH is True (the # default) SESSION_TIMEOUT acts like an idle timeout rather than being a hard # limit, but will never exceed the token expiry. If your token expires in 60 # minutes, a value of 1800 will log users out after 30 minutes of inactivity, # or 60 minutes with activity. Setting SESSION_REFRESH to False will make # SESSION_TIMEOUT act like a hard limit on session times. SESSION_TIMEOUT = 3600 # When using cookie-based sessions, log error when the session cookie exceeds # the following size (common browsers drop cookies above a certain size): SESSION_COOKIE_MAX_SIZE = 4093 # when doing upgrades, it may be wise to stick to PickleSerializer # NOTE(berendt): Check during the K-cycle if this variable can be removed. # https://bugs.launchpad.net/horizon/+bug/1349463 SESSION_SERIALIZER = 'django.contrib.sessions.serializers.PickleSerializer' # MEMOIZED_MAX_SIZE_DEFAULT allows setting a global default to help control # memory usage when caching. It should at least be 2 x the number of threads # with a little bit of extra buffer. MEMOIZED_MAX_SIZE_DEFAULT = 25 CSRF_FAILURE_VIEW = 'openstack_dashboard.views.csrf_failure' LANGUAGES = ( ('cs', 'Czech'), ('de', 'German'), ('en', 'English'), ('en-au', 'Australian English'), ('en-gb', 'British English'), ('eo', 'Esperanto'), ('es', 'Spanish'), ('fr', 'French'), ('id', 'Indonesian'), ('it', 'Italian'), ('ja', 'Japanese'), ('ko', 'Korean (Korea)'), ('pl', 'Polish'), ('pt-br', 'Portuguese (Brazil)'), ('ru', 'Russian'), ('tr', 'Turkish'), ('zh-cn', 'Simplified Chinese'), ('zh-tw', 'Chinese (Taiwan)'), ) LANGUAGE_CODE = 'en' LANGUAGE_COOKIE_NAME = 'horizon_language' USE_I18N = True USE_L10N = True USE_TZ = True # Set OPENSTACK_CLOUDS_YAML_NAME to provide a nicer name for this cloud for # the clouds.yaml file than "openstack". OPENSTACK_CLOUDS_YAML_NAME = 'openstack' # If this cloud has a vendor profile in os-client-config, put it's name here. OPENSTACK_CLOUDS_YAML_PROFILE = '' OPENSTACK_KEYSTONE_DEFAULT_ROLE = '_member_' DEFAULT_EXCEPTION_REPORTER_FILTER = 'horizon.exceptions.HorizonReporterFilter' POLICY_FILES_PATH = os.path.join(ROOT_PATH, "conf") # Map of local copy of service policy files POLICY_FILES = { 'identity': 'keystone_policy.json', 'compute': 'nova_policy.json', 'volume': 'cinder_policy.json', 'image': 'glance_policy.json', 'network': 'neutron_policy.json', } # Services for which horizon has extra policies are defined # in POLICY_DIRS by default. POLICY_DIRS = { 'compute': ['nova_policy.d'], 'volume': ['cinder_policy.d'], } SECRET_KEY = None LOCAL_PATH = None SECURITY_GROUP_RULES = { 'all_tcp': { 'name': _('All TCP'), 'ip_protocol': 'tcp', 'from_port': '1', 'to_port': '65535', }, 'all_udp': { 'name': _('All UDP'), 'ip_protocol': 'udp', 'from_port': '1', 'to_port': '65535', }, 'all_icmp': { 'name': _('All ICMP'), 'ip_protocol': 'icmp', 'from_port': '-1', 'to_port': '-1', }, } ADD_INSTALLED_APPS = [] # NOTE: The default value of USER_MENU_LINKS will be set after loading # local_settings if it is not configured. USER_MENU_LINKS = None # 'key', 'label', 'path' AVAILABLE_THEMES = [ ( 'default', pgettext_lazy('Default style theme', 'Default'), 'themes/default' ), ( 'material', pgettext_lazy("Google's Material Design style theme", "Material"), 'themes/material' ), ] # The default theme if no cookie is present DEFAULT_THEME = 'default' # Theme Static Directory THEME_COLLECTION_DIR = 'themes' # Theme Cookie Name THEME_COOKIE_NAME = 'theme' POLICY_CHECK_FUNCTION = 'openstack_auth.policy.check' CSRF_COOKIE_AGE = None COMPRESS_OFFLINE_CONTEXT = 'horizon.themes.offline_context' SHOW_KEYSTONE_V2_RC = False SHOW_OPENRC_FILE = True SHOW_OPENSTACK_CLOUDS_YAML = True # Dictionary of currently available angular features ANGULAR_FEATURES = { 'images_panel': True, 'key_pairs_panel': True, 'flavors_panel': False, 'domains_panel': False, 'users_panel': False, 'groups_panel': False, 'roles_panel': True } # Notice all customizable configurations should be above this line XSTATIC_MODULES = settings_utils.BASE_XSTATIC_MODULES OPENSTACK_PROFILER = { 'enabled': False } if not LOCAL_PATH: LOCAL_PATH = os.path.join(ROOT_PATH, 'local') LOCAL_SETTINGS_DIR_PATH = os.path.join(LOCAL_PATH, "local_settings.d") _files = glob.glob(os.path.join(LOCAL_PATH, 'local_settings.conf')) _files.extend( sorted(glob.glob(os.path.join(LOCAL_SETTINGS_DIR_PATH, '*.conf')))) _config = config.load_config(_files, ROOT_PATH, LOCAL_PATH) # Apply the general configuration. config.apply_config(_config, globals()) try: from local.local_settings import * # noqa: F403,H303 except ImportError: _LOG.warning("No local_settings file found.") # configure templates if not TEMPLATES[0]['DIRS']: TEMPLATES[0]['DIRS'] = [os.path.join(ROOT_PATH, 'templates')] TEMPLATES[0]['DIRS'] += ADD_TEMPLATE_DIRS # configure template debugging TEMPLATES[0]['OPTIONS']['debug'] = DEBUG # Template loaders if DEBUG: TEMPLATES[0]['OPTIONS']['loaders'].extend( CACHED_TEMPLATE_LOADERS + ADD_TEMPLATE_LOADERS ) else: TEMPLATES[0]['OPTIONS']['loaders'].extend( [('django.template.loaders.cached.Loader', CACHED_TEMPLATE_LOADERS)] + ADD_TEMPLATE_LOADERS ) # allow to drop settings snippets into a local_settings_dir LOCAL_SETTINGS_DIR_PATH = os.path.join(ROOT_PATH, "local", "local_settings.d") if os.path.exists(LOCAL_SETTINGS_DIR_PATH): for (dirpath, dirnames, filenames) in os.walk(LOCAL_SETTINGS_DIR_PATH): for filename in sorted(filenames): if filename.endswith(".py"): try: with open(os.path.join(dirpath, filename)) as f: # pylint: disable=exec-used exec(f.read()) except Exception as e: _LOG.exception( "Can not exec settings snippet %s", filename) # The purpose of OPENSTACK_IMAGE_FORMATS is to provide a simple object # that does not contain the lazy-loaded translations, so the list can # be sent as JSON to the client-side (Angular). OPENSTACK_IMAGE_FORMATS = [fmt for (fmt, name) in OPENSTACK_IMAGE_BACKEND['image_formats']] if USER_MENU_LINKS is None: USER_MENU_LINKS = [] if SHOW_KEYSTONE_V2_RC: USER_MENU_LINKS.append({ 'name': _('OpenStack RC File v2'), 'icon_classes': ['fa-download', ], 'url': 'horizon:project:api_access:openrcv2', }) if SHOW_OPENRC_FILE: USER_MENU_LINKS.append({ 'name': (_('OpenStack RC File v3') if SHOW_KEYSTONE_V2_RC else _('OpenStack RC File')), 'icon_classes': ['fa-download', ], 'url': 'horizon:project:api_access:openrc', }) if not WEBROOT.endswith('/'): WEBROOT += '/' if LOGIN_URL is None: LOGIN_URL = WEBROOT + 'auth/login/' if LOGOUT_URL is None: LOGOUT_URL = WEBROOT + 'auth/logout/' if LOGIN_ERROR is None: LOGIN_ERROR = WEBROOT + 'auth/error/' if LOGIN_REDIRECT_URL is None: LOGIN_REDIRECT_URL = WEBROOT if MEDIA_ROOT is None: MEDIA_ROOT = os.path.abspath(os.path.join(ROOT_PATH, '..', 'media')) if MEDIA_URL is None: MEDIA_URL = WEBROOT + 'media/' if STATIC_ROOT is None: STATIC_ROOT = os.path.abspath(os.path.join(ROOT_PATH, '..', 'static')) if STATIC_URL is None: STATIC_URL = WEBROOT + 'static/' AVAILABLE_THEMES, SELECTABLE_THEMES, DEFAULT_THEME = ( theme_settings.get_available_themes( AVAILABLE_THEMES, DEFAULT_THEME, SELECTABLE_THEMES ) ) # Discover all the directories that contain static files STATICFILES_DIRS = theme_settings.get_theme_static_dirs( AVAILABLE_THEMES, THEME_COLLECTION_DIR, ROOT_PATH) # Ensure that we always have a SECRET_KEY set, even when no local_settings.py # file is present. See local_settings.py.example for full documentation on the # horizon.utils.secret_key module and its use. if not SECRET_KEY: if not LOCAL_PATH: LOCAL_PATH = os.path.join(os.path.dirname(os.path.abspath(__file__)), 'local') # pylint: disable=ungrouped-imports from horizon.utils import secret_key SECRET_KEY = secret_key.generate_or_read_from_file(os.path.join(LOCAL_PATH, '.secret_key_store')) # populate HORIZON_CONFIG with auto-discovered JavaScript sources, mock files, # specs files and external templates. settings_utils.find_static_files(HORIZON_CONFIG, AVAILABLE_THEMES, THEME_COLLECTION_DIR, ROOT_PATH) INSTALLED_APPS = list(INSTALLED_APPS) # Make sure it's mutable settings_utils.update_dashboards( [ enabled, local_enabled, ], HORIZON_CONFIG, INSTALLED_APPS, ) INSTALLED_APPS[0:0] = ADD_INSTALLED_APPS NG_TEMPLATE_CACHE_AGE = NG_TEMPLATE_CACHE_AGE if not DEBUG else 0 # Include xstatic_modules specified in plugin XSTATIC_MODULES += HORIZON_CONFIG['xstatic_modules'] # Discover all the xstatic module entry points to embed in our HTML STATICFILES_DIRS += settings_utils.get_xstatic_dirs( XSTATIC_MODULES, HORIZON_CONFIG) # This base context objects gets added to the offline context generator # for each theme configured. HORIZON_COMPRESS_OFFLINE_CONTEXT_BASE = { 'WEBROOT': WEBROOT, 'STATIC_URL': STATIC_URL, 'HORIZON_CONFIG': HORIZON_CONFIG, 'NG_TEMPLATE_CACHE_AGE': NG_TEMPLATE_CACHE_AGE, } if DEBUG: logging.basicConfig(level=logging.DEBUG) # Here comes the Django settings deprecation section. Being at the very end # of settings.py allows it to catch the settings defined in local_settings.py # or inside one of local_settings.d/ snippets.

Privacy Policy introduction We understand the importance of personal information to you and will do our utmost to protect your personal information. We are committed to maintaining your trust in us and to abide by the following principles to protect your personal information: the principle of consistency of rights and responsibilities, the principle of purpose , choose the principle of consent, at least the principle of sufficient use, ensure the principle of security, the principle of subject participation, the principle of openness and transparency, and so on. At the same time, we promise that we will take appropriate security measures to protect your personal information according to the industry's mature security solutions. In view of this, we have formulated this "Private Privacy Policy" (hereinafter referred to as "this policy" /This Privacy Policy") and remind you: This policy applies to products or services on this platform. If the products or services provided by the platform are used in the products or services of our affiliates (for example, using the platform account directly) but there is no independent privacy policy, this policy also applies to the products or services. It is important to note that this policy does not apply to other third-party services provided by you, nor to products or services on this platform that have been independently set up with a privacy policy. Before using the products or services on this platform, please read and understand this policy carefully, and use the related products or services after confirming that you fully understand and agree. By using the products or services on this platform, you understand and agree to this policy. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions about the content of this policy, you can contact us through various contact methods provided by this platform. This privacy policy section will help you understand the following: How we collect and use your personal information How do we use cookies and similar technologies? How do we share, transfer, and publicly disclose your personal information? How we protect your personal information How do you manage your personal information? How do we deal with the personal information of minors? How your personal information is transferred globally How to update this privacy policy How to contact us 一、How we collect and use your personal information Personal information refers to various information recorded electronically or otherwise that can identify a specific natural person or reflect the activities of a particular natural person, either alone or in combination with other information. We collect and use your information for the purposes described in this policy. Personal information: （一）Help you become our user To create an account so that we can serve you, you will need to provide the following information: your nickname, avatar, gender, date of birth, mobile number/signal/QQ number, and create a username and password. During the registration process, if you provide the following additional information to supplement your personal information, it will help us to provide you with better service and experience: your real name, real ID information, hometown, emotional status, constellation, occupation, school Your real avatar. However, if you do not provide this information, it will not affect the basic functions of using the platform products or services. The above information provided by you will continue to authorize us during your use of the Service. When you voluntarily cancel your account, we will make it anonymous or delete your personal information as soon as possible in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. （二）Show and push goods or services for you In order to improve our products or services and provide you with personalized information search and transaction services, we will extract your browsing, search preferences, behavioral habits based on your browsing and search history, device information, location information, and transaction information. Features such as location information, indirect crowd portraits based on feature tags, and display and push information. If you do not want to accept commercials that we send to you, you can cancel them at any time through the product unsubscribe feature. （三）Provide goods or services to you 1、Information you provide to us Relevant personal information that you provide to us when registering for an account or using our services, such as phone numbers, emails, bank card numbers or Alipay accounts; The shared information that you provide to other parties through our services and the information that you store when you use our services. Before providing the platform with the aforementioned personal information of the other party, you need to ensure that you have obtained your authorization. 2、Information we collect during your use of the service In order to provide you with page display and search results that better suit your needs, understand product suitability, and identify account anomalies, we collect and correlate information about the services you use and how they are used, including: Device Information: We will receive and record information about the device you are using (such as device model, operating system version, device settings, unique device identifier, etc.) based on the specific permissions you have granted during software installation and use. Information about the location of the device (such as Idiv address, GdivS location, and Wi-Fi that can provide relevant information) Sensor information such as access points, Bluetooth and base stations. Since the services we provide are based on the mobile social services provided by the geographic location, you confirm that the successful registration of the "this platform" account is deemed to confirm the authorization to extract, disclose and use your geographic location information. . If you need to terminate your location information to other users, you can set it to be invisible at any time. Log information: When you use our website or the products or services provided by the client, we will automatically collect your detailed usage of our services as a related web log. For example, your search query content, Idiv address, browser type, telecom carrier, language used, date and time of access, and web page history you visit. Please note that separate device information, log information, etc. are information that does not identify a particular natural person. If we combine such non-personal information with other information to identify a particular natural person or use it in conjunction with personal information, such non-personal information will be treated as personal information during the combined use, except for your authorization. Or as otherwise provided by laws and regulations, we will anonymize and de-identify such personal information. When you contact us, we may save information such as your communication/call history and content or the contact information you left in order to contact you or help you solve the problem or to document the resolution and results of the problem. 3、Your personal information collected through indirect access You can use the products or services provided by our affiliates through the link of the platform provided by our platform account. In order to facilitate our one-stop service based on the linked accounts and facilitate your unified management, we will show you on this platform. Information or recommendations for information you are interested in, including information from live broadcasts and games. You can discover and use the above services through the homepage of the platform, "More" and other functions. When you use the above services through our products or services, you authorize us to receive, aggregate, and analyze from our affiliates based on actual business and cooperation needs, we confirm that their source is legal or that you authorize to consent to your personal information provided to us or Trading Information. If you refuse to provide the above information or refuse to authorize, you may not be able to use the corresponding products or services of our affiliates, or can not display relevant information, but does not affect the use of the platform to browse, chat, release dynamics and other core services. （四）Provide you with security Please note that in order to ensure the authenticity of the user's identity and provide you with better security, you can provide us with identification information such as identity card, military officer's card, passport, driver's license, social security card, residence permit, facial identification, and other biometric information. Personally sensitive information such as Sesame Credit and other real-name certifications. If you refuse to provide the above information, you may not be able to use services such as account management, live broadcast, and continuing risky transactions, but it will not affect your use of browsing, chat and other services. To improve the security of your services provided by us and our affiliates and partners, protect the personal and property of you or other users or the public from being compromised, and better prevent phishing websites, fraud, network vulnerabilities, computer viruses, cyber attacks , security risks such as network intrusion, more accurately identify violations of laws and regulations or the relevant rules of the platform, we may use or integrate your user information, transaction information, equipment information, related web logs and our affiliates, partners to obtain You authorize or rely on the information shared by law to comprehensively judge your account and transaction risks, conduct identity verification, detect and prevent security incidents, and take necessary records, audits, analysis, and disposal measures in accordance with the law. （五）Other uses When we use the information for other purposes not covered by this policy, or if the information collected for a specific purpose is used for other purposes, you will be asked for your prior consent. （六）Exception for authorization of consent According to relevant laws and regulations, collecting your personal information in the following situations does not require your authorized consent: 1、Related to national security and national defense security； 2、Related to public safety, public health, and major public interests； 3、Related to criminal investigation, prosecution, trial and execution of judgments, etc.； 4、It is difficult to obtain your own consent for the maintenance of the important legal rights of the personal information or other individuals’ lives and property； 5、The personal information collected is disclosed to the public by yourself; 二、How do we use cookies and similar technologies? （一）Cookies To ensure that your site is up and running, to give you an easier access experience, and to recommend content that may be of interest to you, we store a small data file called a cookie on your computer or mobile device. Cookies usually contain an identifier, a site name, and some numbers and characters. With cookies, websites can store data such as your preferences. （二）Website Beacons and Pixel Labels In addition to cookies, we use other technologies like web beacons and pixel tags on our website. For example, the email we send to you may contain an address link to the content of our website. If you click on the link, we will track the click to help us understand your product or service preferences so that we can proactively improve customer service. Experience. A web beacon is usually a transparent image that is embedded in a website or email. With the pixel tags in the email, we can tell if the email is open. If you don't want your event to be tracked this way, you can unsubscribe from our mailing list at any time. 三、How do we share, transfer, and publicly disclose your personal information? （一）shared We do not share your personal information with companies, organizations, and individuals other than the platform's service providers, with the following exceptions: 1、Sharing with explicit consent: We will share your personal information with others after obtaining your explicit consent. 2、Sharing under statutory circumstances: We may share your personal information in accordance with laws and regulations, litigation dispute resolution needs, or in accordance with the requirements of the administrative and judicial authorities. 3. Sharing with affiliates: In order to facilitate our services to you based on linked accounts, we recommend information that may be of interest to you or protect the personal property of affiliates or other users or the public of this platform from being infringed. Personal information may be shared with our affiliates. We will only share the necessary personal information (for example, to facilitate the use of our affiliated company products or services, we will share your necessary account information with affiliates) if we share your personal sensitive information or affiliate changes The use of personal information and the purpose of processing will be re-examined for your authorization. 4. Sharing with Authorized Partners: For the purposes stated in this Privacy Policy, some of our services will be provided by us and our authorized partners. We may share some of your personal information with our partners to provide better customer service and user experience. For example, arrange a partner to provide services. We will only share your personal information for legitimate, legitimate, necessary, specific, and specific purposes, and will only share the personal information necessary to provide the service. Our partners are not authorized to use shared personal information for other purposes unrelated to the product or service. Currently, our authorized partners include the following types: (2) Suppliers, service providers and other partners. We send information to suppliers, service providers and other partners who support our business, including providing technical infrastructure services, analyzing how our services are used, measuring the effectiveness of advertising and services, providing customer service, and facilitating payments. Or conduct academic research and investigations. (1) Authorized partners in advertising and analytics services. We will not use your personally identifiable information (information that identifies you, such as your name or email address, which can be used to contact you or identify you) and provide advertising and analytics services, unless you have your permission. Shared by partners. We will provide these partners with information about their advertising coverage and effectiveness, without providing your personally identifiable information, or we may aggregate this information so that it does not identify you personally. For example, we’ll only tell advertisers how effective their ads are when they agree to comply with our advertising guidelines, or how many people see their ads or install apps after seeing ads, or work with them. Partners provide statistical information that does not identify individuals (eg “male, 25-29 years old, in Beijing”) to help them understand their audience or customers. For companies, organizations and individuals with whom we share personal information, we will enter into strict data protection agreements with them to process individuals in accordance with our instructions, this Privacy Policy and any other relevant confidentiality and security measures. information. (2) Transfer We do not transfer your personal information to any company, organization or individual, except: Transfer with the express consent: After obtaining your explicit consent, we will transfer your personal information to other parties; 2, in the case of mergers, acquisitions or bankruptcy liquidation, or other circumstances involving mergers, acquisitions or bankruptcy liquidation, if it involves the transfer of personal information, we will require new companies and organizations that hold your personal information to continue to receive This policy is bound, otherwise we will ask the company, organization and individual to re-seek your consent. (3) Public disclosure We will only publicly disclose your personal information in the following circumstances: We may publicly disclose your personal information by obtaining your explicit consent or based on your active choice; 2, if we determine that you have violated laws and regulations or serious violations of the relevant rules of the platform, or to protect the personal safety of the platform and its affiliates users or the public from infringement, we may be based on laws and regulations or The relevant agreement rules of this platform disclose your personal information, including related violations, and the measures that the platform has taken against you, with your consent. (4) Exceptions for prior authorization of consent when sharing, transferring, and publicly disclosing personal information In the following situations, sharing, transferring, and publicly disclosing your personal information does not require prior authorization from you: Related to national security and national defense security; Related to public safety, public health, and major public interests; 3, related to criminal investigation, prosecution, trial and judgment execution; 4, in order to protect your or other individuals' life, property and other important legal rights but it is difficult to get my consent; Personal information that you disclose to the public on your own; Collect personal information from legally publicly disclosed information, such as legal news reports and government information disclosure. According to the law, sharing, transferring and de-identifying personal information, and ensuring that the data recipient cannot recover and re-identify the personal information subject, does not belong to the external sharing, transfer and public disclosure of personal information. The preservation and processing of the class data will not require additional notice and your consent. How do we protect your personal information? (1) We have taken reasonable and feasible security measures in accordance with the industry's general solutions to protect the security of personal information provided by you, and to prevent unauthorized access, public disclosure, use, modification, damage or loss of personal information. For example, SSL (Secure Socket) when exchanging data (such as credit card information) between your browser and the server Layer) protocol encryption protection; we use encryption technology to improve the security of personal information; we use a trusted protection mechanism to prevent personal information from being maliciously attacked; we will deploy access control mechanisms to ensure that only authorized personnel can access individuals Information; and we will conduct security and privacy protection training courses to enhance employees' awareness of the importance of protecting personal information. (2) We have advanced data security management system around the data life cycle, which enhances the security of the whole system from organizational construction, system design, personnel management, product technology and other aspects. (3) We will take reasonable and feasible measures and try our best to avoid collecting irrelevant personal information. We will only retain your personal information for the period of time required to achieve the purposes stated in this policy, unless the retention period is extended or permitted by law. (4) The Internet is not an absolutely secure environment. We strongly recommend that you do not use personal communication methods that are not recommended by this platform. You can connect and share with each other through our services. When you create communications, transactions, or sharing through our services, you can choose who you want to communicate, trade, or share as a third party who can see your trading content, contact information, exchange information, or share content. If you find that your personal information, especially your account or password, has been leaked, please contact our customer service immediately so that we can take appropriate measures according to your application. Please note that the information you voluntarily share or even share publicly when using our services may involve personal information of you or others or even sensitive personal information, such as when you post a news or choose to upload in public in group chats, circles, etc. A picture containing personal information. Please consider more carefully whether you share or even share information publicly when using our services. Please use complex passwords to help us keep your account secure. We will do our best to protect the security of any information you send us. At the same time, we will report the handling of personal information security incidents in accordance with the requirements of the regulatory authorities. V. How your personal information is transferred globally Personal information collected and generated by us during our operations in the People's Republic of China is stored in China, with the following exceptions: Laws and regulations have clear provisions; 2, get your explicit authorization; 3, you through the Internet for cross-border live broadcast / release dynamics and other personal initiatives. In response to the above, we will ensure that your personal information is adequately protected in accordance with this Privacy Policy.

What is C++? C++ is a general-purpose, object-oriented programming language. It was created by Bjarne Stroustrup at Bell Labs circa 1980. C++ is very similar to C (invented by Dennis Ritchie in the early 1970s). C++ is so compatible with C that it will probably compile over 99% of C programs without changing a line of source code. Though C++ is a lot of well-structured and safer language than C as it OOPs based. Some computer languages are written for a specific purpose. Like, Java was initially devised to control toasters and some other electronics. C was developed for programming OS. Pascal was conceptualized to teach proper programming techniques. But C++ is a general-purpose language. It well deserves the widely acknowledged nickname "Swiss Pocket Knife of Languages." C++ is a cross-platform language that can be used to create high-performance applications. C++ was developed by Bjarne Stroustrup, as an extension to the C language. C++ gives programmers a high level of control over system resources and memory. The language was updated 3 major times in 2011, 2014, and 2017 to C++11, C++14, and C++17. About C++ Programming Multi-paradigm Language - C++ supports at least seven different styles of programming. Developers can choose any of the styles. General Purpose Language - You can use C++ to develop games, desktop apps, operating systems, and so on. Speed - Like C programming, the performance of optimized C++ code is exceptional. Object-oriented - C++ allows you to divide complex problems into smaller sets by using objects. Why Learn C++? C++ is used to develop games, desktop apps, operating systems, browsers, and so on because of its performance. After learning C++, it will be much easier to learn other programming languages like Java, Python, etc. C++ helps you to understand the internal architecture of a computer, how computer stores and retrieves information. How to learn C++? C++ tutorial from Programiz - We provide step by step C++ tutorials, examples, and references. Get started with C++. Official C++ documentation - Might be hard to follow and understand for beginners. Visit official C++ documentation. Write a lot of C++ programming code- The only way you can learn programming is by writing a lot of code. Read C++ code- Join Github's open-source projects and read other people's code. C++ best programming language? The answer depends on perspective and requirements. Some tasks can be done in C++, though not very quickly. For example, designing GUI screens for applications. Other languages like Visual Basic, Python have GUI design elements built into them. Therefore, they are better suited for GUI type of task. Some of the scripting languages that provide extra programmability to applications. Such as MS Word and even photoshop tend to be variants of Basic, not C++. C++ is still used widely, and the most famous software have their backbone in C++. This tutorial will help you learn C++ basic and the advanced concepts. Who uses C++? Some of today's most visible used systems have their critical parts written in C++. Examples are Amadeus (airline ticketing) Bloomberg (financial formation), Amazon (Web commerce), Google (Web search) Facebook (social media) Many programming languages depend on C++'s performance and reliability in their implementation. Examples include: Java Virtual Machines JavaScript interpreters (e.g., Google's V8) Browsers (e.g., Internet Explorer, Mozilla's Firefox, Apple's Safari, and Google's Chrome) Application and Web frameworks (e.g., Microsoft's .NET Web services framework). Applications that involve local and wide area networks, user interaction, numeric, graphics, and database access highly depend on C++ language. Why Use C++ C++ is one of the world's most popular programming languages. C++ can be found in today's operating systems, Graphical User Interfaces, and embedded systems. C++ is an object-oriented programming language which gives a clear structure to programs and allows code to be reused, lowering development costs. C++ is portable and can be used to develop applications that can be adapted to multiple platforms. C++ is fun and easy to learn! As C++ is close to C# and Java, it makes it easy for programmers to switch to C++ or vice versa Definition - What does C++ Programming Language mean? C++ is an object oriented computer language created by notable computer scientist Bjorne Stroustrop as part of the evolution of the C family of languages. Some call C++ “C with classes” because it introduces object oriented programming principles, including the use of defined classes, to the C programming language framework. C++ is pronounced "see-plus-plus." C++ Variables Variables are the backbone of any programming language. A variable is merely a way to store some information for later use. We can retrieve this value or data by referring to a "word" that will describe this information. Once declared and defined they may be used many times within the scope in which they were declared. C++ Control Structures When a program runs, the code is read by the compiler line by line (from top to bottom, and for the most part left to right). This is known as "code flow." When the code is being read from top to bottom, it may encounter a point where it needs to make a decision. Based on the decision, the program may jump to a different part of the code. It may even make the compiler re-run a specific piece again, or just skip a bunch of code. You could think of this process like if you were to choose from different courses from Guru99. You decide, click a link and skip a few pages. In the same way, a computer program has a set of strict rules to decide the flow of program execution. C++ Syntax The syntax is a layout of words, expression, and symbols. Well, it's because an email address has its well-defined syntax. You need some combination of letters, numbers, potentially with underscores (_) or periods (.) in between, followed by an at the rate (@) symbol, followed by some website domain (company.com). So, syntax in a programming language is much the same. They are some well-defined set of rules that allow you to create some piece of well-functioning software. But, if you don't abide by the rules of a programming language or syntax, you'll get errors. C++ Tools In the real world, a tool is something (usually a physical object) that helps you to get a certain job done promptly. Well, this holds true with the programming world too. A tool in programming is some piece of software which when used with the code allows you to program faster. There are probably tens of thousands, if not millions of different tools across all the programming languages. Most crucial tool, considered by many, is an IDE, an Integrated Development Environment. An IDE is a software which will make your coding life so much easier. IDEs ensure that your files and folders are organized and give you a nice and clean way to view them. Types of C++ Errors Another way to look at C++ in a practical sense is to start enumerating different kinds of errors that occur as the written code makes its way to final execution. First, there are syntax errors where the code is actually written in an illegible way. This can be a misuse of punctuation, or the misspelling of a function command or anything else that compromises the integrity of the syntax as it is written. Another fundamental type of error is a compiler error that simply tells the programmer the compiler was not able to do its work effectively. As a compiler language, C++ relies on the compiler to make the source code into machine readable code and optimize it in various ways. A third type of error happens after the program has been successfully compiled. Runtime errors are not uncommon in C++ executables. What they represent is some lack of designated resource or non-working command in the executable program. In other words, the syntax is right, and the program was compiled successfully, but as the program is doing its work, it encounters a problem, whether that has to do with interdependencies, operating system requirements or anything else in the general environment in which the program is trying to work. Over time, C++ has remained a very useful language not only in computer programming itself, but in teaching new programmers about how object oriented programming works.

# Cmder [](https://gitter.im/cmderdev/cmder?utm_source=badge&utm_medium=badge&utm_campaign=pr-badge&utm_content=badge) [](https://ci.appveyor.com/project/MartiUK/cmder) Cmder is a **software package** created out of pure frustration over absence of usable console emulator on Windows. It is based on [ConEmu](https://conemu.github.io/) with *major* config overhaul, comes with a Monokai color scheme, amazing [clink](https://chrisant996.github.io/clink/) (further enhanced by [clink-completions](https://github.com/vladimir-kotikov/clink-completions)) and a custom prompt layout.  ## Why use it The main advantage of Cmder is portability. It is designed to be totally self-contained with no external dependencies, which makes it great for **USB Sticks** or **cloud storage**. So you can carry your console, aliases and binaries (like wget, curl and git) with you anywhere. The Cmder's user interface is also designed to be more eye pleasing, and you can compare the main differences between Cmder and ConEmu [here](https://conemu.github.io/en/cmder.html). ## Installation ### Single User Portable Config 1. Download the [latest release](https://github.com/cmderdev/cmder/releases/) 2. Extract the archive. *Note: This path should not be `C:\Program Files` or anywhere else that would require Administrator access for modifying configuration files* 3. (optional) Place your own executable files into the `%cmder_root%\bin` folder to be injected into your PATH. 4. Run `Cmder.exe` ### Shared Cmder install with Non-Portable Individual User Config 1. Download the [latest release](https://github.com/cmderdev/cmder/releases/) 2. Extract the archive to a shared location. 3. (optional) Place your own executable files and custom app folders into the `%cmder_root%\bin`. See: [bin/README.md](./bin/Readme.md) - This folder to be injected into your PATH by default. - See `/max_depth [1-5]` in 'Command Line Arguments for `init.bat`' table to add subdirectories recursively. 4. (optional) Place your own custom app folders into the `%cmder_root%\opt`. See: [opt/README.md](./opt/Readme.md) - This folder will NOT be injected into your PATH so you have total control of what gets added. 5. Run `Cmder.exe` with `/C` command line argument. Example: `cmder.exe /C %userprofile%\cmder_config` * This will create the following directory structure if it is missing. ``` c:\users\[CH JaDi Rajput]\cmder_config ├───bin ├───config │ └───profile.d └───opt ``` - (optional) Place your own executable files and custom app folders into `%userprofile%\cmder_config\bin`. - This folder to be injected into your PATH by default. - See `/max_depth [1-5]` in 'Command Line Arguments for `init.bat`' table to add subdirectories recursively. - (optional) Place your own custom app folders into the `%user_profile%\cmder_config\opt`. - This folder will NOT be injected into your PATH so you have total control of what gets added. * Both the shared install and the individual user config locations can contain a full set of init and profile.d scripts enabling shared config with user overrides. See below. ## Cmder.exe Command Line Arguments | Argument | Description | | ------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | | `/C [user_root_path]` | Individual user Cmder root folder. Example: `%userprofile%\cmder_config` | | `/M` | Use `conemu-%computername%.xml` for ConEmu settings storage instead of `user_conemu.xml` | | `/REGISTER [ALL, USER]` | Register a Windows Shell Menu shortcut. | | `/UNREGISTER [ALL, USER]` | Un-register a Windows Shell Menu shortcut. | | `/SINGLE` | Start Cmder in single mode. | | `/START [start_path]` | Folder path to start in. | | `/TASK [task_name]` | Task to start after launch. | | `/X [ConEmu extras pars]` | Forwards parameters to ConEmu | ## Context Menu Integration So you've experimented with Cmder a little and want to give it a shot in a more permanent home; ### Shortcut to open Cmder in a chosen folder 1. Open a terminal as an Administrator 2. Navigate to the directory you have placed Cmder 3. Execute `.\cmder.exe /REGISTER ALL` _If you get a message "Access Denied" ensure you are executing the command in an **Administrator** prompt._ In a file explorer window right click in or on a directory to see "Cmder Here" in the context menu. ## Keyboard shortcuts ### Tab manipulation * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>T</kbd> : New tab dialog (maybe you want to open cmd as admin?) * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>W</kbd> : Close tab * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>D</kbd> : Close tab (if pressed on empty command) * <kbd>Shift</kbd> + <kbd>Alt</kbd> + <kbd>#Number</kbd> : Fast new tab: <kbd>1</kbd> - CMD, <kbd>2</kbd> - PowerShell * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>Tab</kbd> : Switch to next tab * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>Shift</kbd> + <kbd>Tab</kbd> : Switch to previous tab * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>#Number</kbd> : Switch to tab #Number * <kbd>Alt</kbd> + <kbd>Enter</kbd>: Fullscreen ### Shell * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>Alt</kbd> + <kbd>U</kbd> : Traverse up in directory structure (lovely feature!) * <kbd>End</kbd>, <kbd>Home</kbd>, <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> : Traversing text with as usual on Windows * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>R</kbd> : History search * <kbd>Shift</kbd> + Mouse : Select and copy text from buffer _(Some shortcuts are not yet documented, though they exist - please document them here)_ ## Features ### Access to multiple shells in one window using tabs You can open multiple tabs each containing one of the following shells: | Task | Shell | Description | | ---- | ----- | ----------- | | Cmder | `cmd.exe` | Windows `cmd.exe` shell enhanced with Git, Git aware prompt, Clink (GNU Readline), and Aliases. | | Cmder as Admin | `cmd.exe` | Administrative Windows `cmd.exe` Cmder shell. | | PowerShell | `powershell.exe` | Windows PowerShell enhanced with Git and Git aware prompt . | | PowerShell as Admin | `powershell.exe` | Administrative Windows `powershell.exe` Cmder shell. | | Bash | `bash.exe` | Unix/Linux like bash shell running on Windows. | | Bash as Admin | `bash.exe` | Administrative Unix/Linux like bash shell running on Windows. | | Mintty | `bash.exe` | Unix/Linux like bash shell running on Windows. See below for Mintty configuration differences | | Mintty as Admin | `bash.exe` | Administrative Unix/Linux like bash shell running on Windows. See below for Mintty configuration differences | Cmder, PowerShell, and Bash tabs all run on top of the Windows Console API and work as you might expect in Cmder with access to use ConEmu's color schemes, key bindings and other settings defined in the ConEmu Settings dialog. ⚠ *NOTE:* Only the full edition of Cmder comes with a pre-installed bash, using a vendored [git-for-windows](https://gitforwindows.org/) installation. The pre-configured Bash tabs may not work on Cmder mini edition without additional configuration. You may however, choose to use an external installation of bash, such as Microsoft's [Subsystem for Linux](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/wsl/install-win10) (called WSL) or the [Cygwin](https://cygwin.com/) project which provides POSIX support on windows. ⚠ *NOTE:* Mintty tabs use a program called 'mintty' as the terminal emulator that is not based on the Windows Console API, rather it's rendered graphically by ConEmu. Mintty differs from the other tabs in that it supports xterm/xterm-256color TERM types, and does not work with ConEmu settings like color schemes and key bindings. As such, some differences in functionality are to be expected, such as Cmder not being able to apply a system-wide configuration to it. As a result mintty specific config is done via the `[%USERPROFILE%|$HOME]/.minttyrc` file. You may read more about Mintty and its config file [here](https://github.com/mintty/mintty). An example of setting Cmder portable terminal colors for mintty: From a bash/mintty shell: ``` cd $CMDER_ROOT/vendor git clone https://github.com/karlin/mintty-colors-solarized.git cd mintty-colors-solarized/ echo source \$CMDER_ROOT/vendor/mintty-colors-solarized/mintty-solarized-dark.sh>>$CMDER_ROOT/config/user_profile.sh ``` You may find some Monokai color schemes for mintty to match Cmder [here](https://github.com/oumu/mintty-color-schemes/blob/master/base16-monokai-mod.minttyrc). ### Changing Cmder Default `cmd.exe` Prompt Config File The default Cmder shell `cmd::Cmder` prompt is customized using `Clink` and is configured by editing a config file that exists in one of two locations: - Single User Portable Config `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\cmder_prompt_config.lua` - Shared Cmder install with Non-Portable Individual User Config `%CMDER_USER_CONFIG%\cmder_prompt_config.lua` If your Cmder setup does not have this file create it from `%CMDER_ROOT%\vendor\cmder_prompt_config.lua.default` Customizations include: - Colors. - Single/Multi-line. - Full path/Folder only. - `[user]@[host]` to the beginning of the prompt. - `~` for home directory. - `λ` symbol Documentation is in the file for each setting. ### Changing Cmder Default `cmd.exe` Shell Startup Behaviour Using Task Arguments 1. Press <kbd>Win</kbd> + <kbd>Alt</kbd> + <kbd>T</kbd> 1. Click either: * `1. {cmd::Cmder as Admin}` * `2. {cmd::Cmder}` 1. Add command line arguments where specified below: *Note: Pay attention to the quotes!* ``` cmd /s /k ""%ConEmuDir%\..\init.bat" [ADD ARGS HERE]" ``` ##### Command Line Arguments for `init.bat` | Argument | Description | Default | | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------- | | `/c [user cmder root]` | Enables user bin and config folders for 'Cmder as admin' sessions due to non-shared environment. | not set | | `/d` | Enables debug output. | not set | | `/f` | Enables Cmder Fast Init Mode. This disables some features, see pull request [#1492](https://github.com/cmderdev/cmder/pull/1942) for more details. | not set | | `/t` | Enables Cmder Timed Init Mode. This displays the time taken run init scripts | not set | | `/git_install_root [file path]` | User specified Git installation root path. | `%CMDER_ROOT%\vendor\Git-for-Windows` | | `/home [home folder]` | User specified folder path to set `%HOME%` environment variable. | `%userprofile%` | | `/max_depth [1-5]` | Define max recurse depth when adding to the path for `%cmder_root%\bin` and `%cmder_user_bin%` | 1 | | `/nix_tools [0-2]` | Define how `*nix` tools are added to the path. Prefer Windows Tools: 1, Prefer *nix Tools: 2, No `/usr/bin` in `%PATH%`: 0 | 1 | | `/svn_ssh [path to ssh.exe]` | Define `%SVN_SSH%` so we can use git svn with ssh svn repositories. | `%GIT_INSTALL_ROOT%\bin\ssh.exe` | | `/user_aliases [file path]` | File path pointing to user aliases. | `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\user_aliases.cmd` | | `/v` | Enables verbose output. | not set | | (custom arguments) | User defined arguments processed by `cexec`. Type `cexec /?` for more usage. | not set | ### Cmder Shell User Config Single user portable configuration is possible using the cmder specific shell config files. Edit the below files to add your own configuration: | Shell | Cmder Portable User Config | | ------------- | ----------------------------------------- | | Cmder | `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\user_profile.cmd` | | PowerShell | `$ENV:CMDER_ROOT\config\user_profile.ps1` | | Bash/Mintty | `$CMDER_ROOT/config/user_profile.sh` | Note: Bash and Mintty sessions will also source the `$HOME/.bashrc` file if it exists after it sources `$CMDER_ROOT/config/user_profile.sh`. You can write `*.cmd|*.bat`, `*.ps1`, and `*.sh` scripts and just drop them in the `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\profile.d` folder to add startup config to Cmder. | Shell | Cmder `Profile.d` Scripts | | ------------- | -------------------------------------------------- | | Cmder | `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\profile.d\*.bat and *.cmd` | | PowerShell | `$ENV:CMDER_ROOT\config\profile.d\*.ps1` | | Bash/Mintty | `$CMDER_ROOT/config/profile.d/*.sh` | #### Git Status Opt-Out To disable Cmder prompt git status globally add the following to `~/.gitconfig` or locally for a single repo `[repo]/.git/config` and start a new session. *Note: This configuration is not portable* ``` [cmder] status = false # Opt out of Git status for 'ALL' Cmder supported shells. cmdstatus = false # Opt out of Git status for 'Cmd.exe' shells. psstatus = false # Opt out of Git status for 'Powershell.exe and 'Pwsh.exe' shells. shstatus = false # Opt out of Git status for 'bash.exe' shells. ``` ### Aliases #### Cmder(`Cmd.exe`) Aliases You can define simple aliases for `cmd.exe` sessions with a command like `alias name=command`. Cmd.exe aliases support optional parameters through the `$1-9` or the `$*` special characters so the alias `vi=vim.exe $*` typed as `vi [filename]` will open `[filename]` in `vim.exe`. Cmd.exe aliases can also be more complex. See: [DOSKEY.EXE documentation](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows-server/administration/windows-commands/doskey) for additional details on complex aliases/macros for `cmd.exe` Aliases defined using the `alias.bat` command will automatically be saved in the `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\user_aliases.cmd` file To make an alias and/or any other profile settings permanent add it to one of the following: Note: These are loaded in this order by `$CMDER_ROOT/vendor/init.bat`. Anything stored in `%CMDER_ROOT%` will be a portable setting and will follow cmder to another machine. * `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\profile.d\*.cmd` and `\*.bat` * `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\user_aliases.cmd` * `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\user_profile.cmd` #### Bash.exe|Mintty.exe Aliases Bash shells support simple and complex aliases with optional parameters natively so they work a little different. Typing `alias name=command` will create an alias only for the current running session. To make an alias and/or any other profile settings permanent add it to one of the following: Note: These are loaded in this order by `$CMDER_ROOT/vendor/git-for-windows/etc/profile.d/cmder.sh`. Anything stored in `$CMDER_ROOT` will be a portable setting and will follow cmder to another machine. * `$CMDER_ROOT/config/profile.d/*.sh` * `$CMDER_ROOT/config/user_profile.sh` * `$HOME/.bashrc` If you add bash aliases to `$CMDER_ROOT/config/user_profile.sh` they will be portable and follow your Cmder folder if you copy it to another machine. `$HOME/.bashrc` defined aliases are not portable. #### PowerShell.exe Aliases PowerShell has native simple alias support, for example `[new-alias | set-alias] alias command`, so complex aliases with optional parameters are not supported in PowerShell sessions. Type `get-help [new-alias|set-alias] -full` for help on PowerShell aliases. To make an alias and/or any other profile settings permanent add it to one of the following: Note: These are loaded in this order by `$ENV:CMDER_ROOT\vendor\user_profile.ps1`. Anything stored in `$ENV:CMDER_ROOT` will be a portable setting and will follow cmder to another machine. * `$ENV:CMDER_ROOT\config\profile.d\*.ps1` * `$ENV:CMDER_ROOT\config\user_profile.ps1` ### SSH Agent To start the vendored SSH agent simply call `start-ssh-agent`, which is in the `vendor/git-for-windows/cmd` folder. If you want to run SSH agent on startup, include the line `@call "%GIT_INSTALL_ROOT%/cmd/start-ssh-agent.cmd"` in `%CMDER_ROOT%/config/user_profile.cmd` (usually just uncomment it). ### Vendored Git Cmder is by default shipped with a vendored Git installation. On each instance of launching Cmder, an attempt is made to locate any other user provided Git binaries. Upon finding a `git.exe` binary, Cmder further compares its version against the vendored one _by executing_ it. The vendored `git.exe` binary is _only_ used when it is more recent than the user-installed one. You may use your favorite version of Git by including its path in the `%PATH%` environment variable. Moreover, the **Mini** edition of Cmder (found on the [downloads page](https://github.com/cmderdev/cmder/releases)) excludes any vendored Git binaries. ### Using external Cygwin/Babun, MSys2, WSL, or Git for Windows SDK with Cmder. You may run bash (the default shell used on Linux, macOS and GNU/Hurd) externally on Cmder, using the following instructions: 1. Setup a new task by pressing <kbd>Win</kbd> +<kbd>Alt</kbd> + <kbd>T</kbd>. 1. Click the `+` button to add a task. 1. Name the new task in the top text box. 1. Provide task parameters, this is optional. 1. Add `cmd /c "[path_to_external_env]\bin\bash --login -i" -new_console` to the `Commands` text box. **Recommended Optional Steps:** Copy the `vendor/cmder_exinit` file to the Cygwin/Babun, MSys2, or Git for Windows SDK environments `/etc/profile.d/` folder to use portable settings in the `$CMDER_ROOT/config` folder. Note: MinGW could work if the init scripts include `profile.d` but this has not been tested. The destination file extension depends on the shell you use in that environment. For example: * bash - Copy to `/etc/profile.d/cmder_exinit.sh` * zsh - Copy to `/etc/profile.d/cmder_exinit.zsh` Uncomment and edit the below line in the script to use Cmder config even when launched from outside Cmder. ``` # CMDER_ROOT=${USERPROFILE}/cmder # This is not required if launched from Cmder. ``` ### Customizing user sessions using `init.bat` custom arguments. You can pass custom arguments to `init.bat` and use `cexec.cmd` in your `user_profile.cmd` to evaluate these arguments then execute commands based on a particular flag being detected or not. `init.bat` creates two shortcuts for using `cexec.cmd` in your profile scripts. #### `%ccall%` - Evaluates flags, runs commands if found, and returns to the calling script and continues. ``` ccall=call C:\Users\user\cmderdev\vendor\bin\cexec.cmd ``` Example: `%ccall% /startnotepad start notepad.exe` #### `%cexec%` - Evaluates flags, runs commands if found, and does not return to the calling script. ``` cexec=C:\Users\user\cmderdev\vendor\bin\cexec.cmd ``` Example: `%cexec% /startnotepad start notepad.exe` It is useful when you have multiple tasks to execute `cmder` and need it to initialize the session differently depending on the task chosen. To conditionally start `notepad.exe` when you start a specific `cmder` task: * Press <kbd>win</kbd>+<kbd>alt</kbd>+<kbd>t</kbd> * Click `+` to add a new task. * Add the below to the `Commands` block: ```batch cmd.exe /k ""%ConEmuDir%\..\init.bat" /startnotepad" ``` * Add the below to your `%cmder_root%\config\user_profile.cmd` ```batch %ccall% "/startNotepad" "start" "notepad.exe"` ``` To see detailed usage of `cexec`, type `cexec /?` in cmder. ### Integrating Cmder with [Hyper](https://github.com/zeit/hyper), [Microsoft VS Code](https://code.visualstudio.com/), and your favorite IDEs Cmder by default comes with a vendored ConEmu installation as the underlying terminal emulator, as stated [here](https://conemu.github.io/en/cmder.html). However, Cmder can in fact run in a variety of other terminal emulators, and even integrated IDEs. Assuming you have the latest version of Cmder, follow the following instructions to get Cmder working with your own terminal emulator. For instructions on how to integrate Cmder with your IDE, please read our [Wiki section](https://github.com/cmderdev/cmder/wiki#cmder-integration). ## Upgrading The process of upgrading Cmder depends on the version/build you are currently running. If you have a `[cmder_root]/config/user[-|_]conemu.xml`, you are running a newer version of Cmder, follow the below process: 1. Exit all Cmder sessions and relaunch `[cmder_root]/cmder.exe`, this backs up your existing `[cmder_root]/vendor/conemu-maximus5/conemu.xml` to `[cmder_root]/config/user[-|_]conemu.xml`. * The `[cmder_root]/config/user[-|_]conemu.xml` contains any custom settings you have made using the 'Setup Tasks' settings dialog. 2. Exit all Cmder sessions and backup any files you have manually edited under `[cmder_root]/vendor`. * Editing files under `[cmder_root]/vendor` is not recommended since you will need to re-apply these changes after any upgrade. All user customizations should go in `[cmder_root]/config` folder. 3. Delete the `[cmder_root]/vendor` folder. 4. Extract the new `cmder.zip` or `cmder_mini.zip` into `[cmder_root]/` overwriting all files when prompted. If you do not have a `[cmder_root]/config/user[-|_]conemu.xml`, you are running an older version of cmder, follow the below process: 1. Exit all Cmder sessions and backup `[cmder_root]/vendor/conemu-maximus5/conemu.xml` to `[cmder_root]/config/user[-|_]conemu.xml`. 2. Backup any files you have manually edited under `[cmder_root]/vendor`. * Editing files under `[cmder_root]/vendor` is not recommended since you will need to re-apply these changes after any upgrade. All user customizations should go in `[cmder_root]/config` folder. 3. Delete the `[cmder_root]/vendor` folder. 4. Extract the new `cmder.zip` or `cmder_mini.zip` into `[cmder_root]/` overwriting all files when prompted. ## Current development builds You can download builds of the current development branch by going to AppVeyor via the following link: [](https://ci.appveyor.com/project/MartiUK/cmder/branch/master/artifacts) ## License All software included is bundled with own license The MIT License (MIT) Copyright (c) 2016 Samuel Vasko Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

A 30-day hands-on journal exploring software design, rendering, and performance patterns — with notes, code examples, and daily reflections inspired by Patterns.dev.

This is a comprehensive MATLAB-based software platform developed for real-time measurement and feedback control of a custom mask-projection photopolymerization based additive manufacturing system (referred as "ECPL", i.e., Exposure Controlled Projection Lithography) using a lab-built interferometry (referred as "ICM&M", i.e., Interferometric Curing Monitoring and Measurement). A graphical user interface using the graphical user interface development environment (GUIDE) of MATLAB was created to implement the ICM&M method for the ECPL process. The software interfaces with the hardware of the ECPL system’s ultraviolet lamp and DMD, and the ICM&M system’s camera. It was designed to streamline the operation of the ECPL process with the aid of parallel computing that implements online both the ICM&M acquisition and measurement analysis as well as the feedback control method. The application logs the acquired interferogram video data, performs numerical computations for the ICM&M measurement algorithms and control law, saves the real-time data and measurement results for all voxels in the region of interest. Meanwhile, it displays interferogram frames and visualize the photocuring process without a substantial sacrifice in temporal performance of other key functions such as data acquisition and measurement & control analysis. The software could be extended to real-time process measurement and control for other additive manufacturing systems, for example, metal based additive manufacturing aided by in-situ thermal images analysis.

I'd like to share my experience of using a free software to create ebooks, and describe the steps I followed to achieve that. One of the great things about this software is the ability to add interactive objects inside your ebook. Although it's a free software, no ads appear in your ebook, and you can actually replace the Kotobee logo with your own! The software I'm using to create ebooks is called Kotobee Author. Hope you enjoy this tutorial. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/author.gif[/IMG] [B]How to create an interactive ebook[/B] Download [URL="https://www.kotobee.com/"]Kotobee Author[/URL] from their website's [URL="https://www.kotobee.com/pricing"]Downloads & Pricing[/URL] page here: [URL="www.kotobee.com/pricing"]www.kotobee.com/pricing[/URL]. Choose your operating system: Windows 32-bit, 64-bit, or Mac OS. The download will start immediately. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-a.jpg[/IMG] Run the installer and follow the instructions as needed. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-b.jpg[/IMG] To start creating ebooks, open [URL="https://www.kotobee.com/"]Kotobee Autho[/URL]r. Note it may take a while to open at the first run. You will see an editor similar to Microsoft Word where you can start writing the content of your book, using standard text formatting tools. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-1.jpg[/IMG] There is an initial chapter created for you by default but you can add more chapters anytime. You can also add subchapters to any chapter by clicking on the + button next to it. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-2.jpg[/IMG] Once you've entered a substantial amount of text, it's time to add some images. Drag and drop images into the editor, or add them using the Image tool from the toolbox on the right. A popup will appear giving you several options to choose from (i.e. dimensions, text-wrapping, etc). [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-3.jpg[/IMG] I won't go into all the details, but I'd like to particularly mention the animation options. Below the Animation on click label, you will be able to choose the kind of animation that happens once the user clicks on the image. You can make the image wiggle, jump, or scale in and out. You can also make the image open in a popup window once clicked. Simple to create, and appealing to the user. Since you're working inside the editor, interactive components won't display their interaction. You need to go into preview mode to do that. Click on Preview Mode at the bottom right. Post title: How to create an interactive ebook User name: Adam Forum categories: Forums related to ebooks, digital publishing, education technology. The forums should equally fall within all categories [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-4.jpg[/IMG] Click on the image and see the image animating as you specified. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-15.jpg[/IMG] As another example, let's add a YouTube video. Click on the Video tool button. Paste the URL of the YouTube video, and click on Create. It's as simple as that! Enter preview mode to see the video in action. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-6.jpg[/IMG] One of the impressive things worth looking into are ebook widgets. They are like mini-apps you put inside your ebook, that open in a popup once clicked by your users. There are like thousands of widgets available online for download (free and commercial). Two popular widget providers I like are www.bookry.com and www.bookwidgets.com. Sign up for a free account, and download any of their free widgets. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/bookry.png[/IMG] [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/bookwidgets.png[/IMG] The widget file is basically a zip file format. Click on the Widget tool button and browse to the widget file. Enter preview mode again, and check out the widget in action. This is an example of a calculator widget: [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-7.jpg[/IMG] Now that the ebook has enough content, it's time to export it. But before doing that, let's customize the interface, and choose the components we'd like available in the ebook. Click on the Customize tab at the top. From the left panel, you have many design options to choose from. You can add your own logo, startup image, header colors, and endless other options. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-8.jpg[/IMG] You can also choose the components you'd like in your ebook, such as search, google lookup, text-to-speech, and others. You can also specify the default language for the interface. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-9.jpg[/IMG] Now's a good time to preview your entire ebook. You can preview it on different devices (e.g. iPad, iPhone, Samsung Galaxy Tab, Nexus, etc). The different devices are available from the Platform list. Click on the Components tab. Now to publish your ebook. Click the Export tab. You'll find a list of different export formats that are supported, such as web apps (HTML5), desktop apps (Windows and Mac), Android apps, iOS apps (iPad & iPhone), LMS SCORM components, etc. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-10.jpg[/IMG] I'm assuming that you're interested in publishing a web app of your ebook, and hosting it on a server via FTP. Click on Export Web Applications, and then on Enter serial number... The login dialog box will appear. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-11.jpg[/IMG] Click on Register a free serial number. You will be required to fill a registration form. A free serial number will be emailed to you. Simply enter it into the same dialog box, and you will be able to export the Web app. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-13.jpg[/IMG] Select the destination folder to save the files. If you enter the folder, you will find that they contain various HTML, JS, and CSS files. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-14.jpg[/IMG] Upload these files to your server and simply enter the URL in the browser to see your ebook in action. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-12.jpg[/IMG] [B]Hope you found that easy![/B] There's an online user guide available for Kotobee Author that can guide you step by step: http://support.kotobee.com. Let me know if that tutorial was useful for you! [B] Hope you found that easy![/B] There's an online user guide available for [URL="https://www.kotobee.com/products/author"]Kotobee Author[/URL] that can guide you step by step: [URL="http://support.kotobee.com"]http://support.kotobee.com[/URL]. Let me know if that tutorial was useful for you!

Introduction Note: This edition of the book is the same as The Rust Programming Language available in print and ebook format from No Starch Press. Welcome to The Rust Programming Language, an introductory book about Rust. The Rust programming language helps you write faster, more reliable software. High-level ergonomics and low-level control are often at odds in programming language design; Rust challenges that conflict. Through balancing powerful technical capacity and a great developer experience, Rust gives you the option to control low-level details (such as memory usage) without all the hassle traditionally associated with such control. Who Rust Is For Rust is ideal for many people for a variety of reasons. Let’s look at a few of the most important groups. Teams of Developers Rust is proving to be a productive tool for collaborating among large teams of developers with varying levels of systems programming knowledge. Low-level code is prone to a variety of subtle bugs, which in most other languages can be caught only through extensive testing and careful code review by experienced developers. In Rust, the compiler plays a gatekeeper role by refusing to compile code with these elusive bugs, including concurrency bugs. By working alongside the compiler, the team can spend their time focusing on the program’s logic rather than chasing down bugs. Rust also brings contemporary developer tools to the systems programming world: Cargo, the included dependency manager and build tool, makes adding, compiling, and managing dependencies painless and consistent across the Rust ecosystem. Rustfmt ensures a consistent coding style across developers. The Rust Language Server powers Integrated Development Environment (IDE) integration for code completion and inline error messages. By using these and other tools in the Rust ecosystem, developers can be productive while writing systems-level code. Students Rust is for students and those who are interested in learning about systems concepts. Using Rust, many people have learned about topics like operating systems development. The community is very welcoming and happy to answer student questions. Through efforts such as this book, the Rust teams want to make systems concepts more accessible to more people, especially those new to programming. Companies Hundreds of companies, large and small, use Rust in production for a variety of tasks. Those tasks include command line tools, web services, DevOps tooling, embedded devices, audio and video analysis and transcoding, cryptocurrencies, bioinformatics, search engines, Internet of Things applications, machine learning, and even major parts of the Firefox web browser. Open Source Developers Rust is for people who want to build the Rust programming language, community, developer tools, and libraries. We’d love to have you contribute to the Rust language. People Who Value Speed and Stability Rust is for people who crave speed and stability in a language. By speed, we mean the speed of the programs that you can create with Rust and the speed at which Rust lets you write them. The Rust compiler’s checks ensure stability through feature additions and refactoring. This is in contrast to the brittle legacy code in languages without these checks, which developers are often afraid to modify. By striving for zero-cost abstractions, higher-level features that compile to lower-level code as fast as code written manually, Rust endeavors to make safe code be fast code as well. The Rust language hopes to support many other users as well; those mentioned here are merely some of the biggest stakeholders. Overall, Rust’s greatest ambition is to eliminate the trade-offs that programmers have accepted for decades by providing safety and productivity, speed and ergonomics. Give Rust a try and see if its choices work for you. Who This Book Is For This book assumes that you’ve written code in another programming language but doesn’t make any assumptions about which one. We’ve tried to make the material broadly accessible to those from a wide variety of programming backgrounds. We don’t spend a lot of time talking about what programming is or how to think about it. If you’re entirely new to programming, you would be better served by reading a book that specifically provides an introduction to programming. How to Use This Book In general, this book assumes that you’re reading it in sequence from front to back. Later chapters build on concepts in earlier chapters, and earlier chapters might not delve into details on a topic; we typically revisit the topic in a later chapter. You’ll find two kinds of chapters in this book: concept chapters and project chapters. In concept chapters, you’ll learn about an aspect of Rust. In project chapters, we’ll build small programs together, applying what you’ve learned so far. Chapters 2, 12, and 20 are project chapters; the rest are concept chapters. Chapter 1 explains how to install Rust, how to write a Hello, world! program, and how to use Cargo, Rust’s package manager and build tool. Chapter 2 is a hands-on introduction to the Rust language. Here we cover concepts at a high level, and later chapters will provide additional detail. If you want to get your hands dirty right away, Chapter 2 is the place for that. At first, you might even want to skip Chapter 3, which covers Rust features similar to those of other programming languages, and head straight to Chapter 4 to learn about Rust’s ownership system. However, if you’re a particularly meticulous learner who prefers to learn every detail before moving on to the next, you might want to skip Chapter 2 and go straight to Chapter 3, returning to Chapter 2 when you’d like to work on a project applying the details you’ve learned. Chapter 5 discusses structs and methods, and Chapter 6 covers enums, match expressions, and the if let control flow construct. You’ll use structs and enums to make custom types in Rust. In Chapter 7, you’ll learn about Rust’s module system and about privacy rules for organizing your code and its public Application Programming Interface (API). Chapter 8 discusses some common collection data structures that the standard library provides, such as vectors, strings, and hash maps. Chapter 9 explores Rust’s error-handling philosophy and techniques. Chapter 10 digs into generics, traits, and lifetimes, which give you the power to define code that applies to multiple types. Chapter 11 is all about testing, which even with Rust’s safety guarantees is necessary to ensure your program’s logic is correct. In Chapter 12, we’ll build our own implementation of a subset of functionality from the grep command line tool that searches for text within files. For this, we’ll use many of the concepts we discussed in the previous chapters. Chapter 13 explores closures and iterators: features of Rust that come from functional programming languages. In Chapter 14, we’ll examine Cargo in more depth and talk about best practices for sharing your libraries with others. Chapter 15 discusses smart pointers that the standard library provides and the traits that enable their functionality. In Chapter 16, we’ll walk through different models of concurrent programming and talk about how Rust helps you to program in multiple threads fearlessly. Chapter 17 looks at how Rust idioms compare to object-oriented programming principles you might be familiar with. Chapter 18 is a reference on patterns and pattern matching, which are powerful ways of expressing ideas throughout Rust programs. Chapter 19 contains a smorgasbord of advanced topics of interest, including unsafe Rust, macros, and more about lifetimes, traits, types, functions, and closures. In Chapter 20, we’ll complete a project in which we’ll implement a low-level multithreaded web server! Finally, some appendixes contain useful information about the language in a more reference-like format. Appendix A covers Rust’s keywords, Appendix B covers Rust’s operators and symbols, Appendix C covers derivable traits provided by the standard library, Appendix D covers some useful development tools, and Appendix E explains Rust editions. There is no wrong way to read this book: if you want to skip ahead, go for it! You might have to jump back to earlier chapters if you experience any confusion. But do whatever works for you. An important part of the process of learning Rust is learning how to read the error messages the compiler displays: these will guide you toward working code. As such, we’ll provide many examples that don’t compile along with the error message the compiler will show you in each situation. Know that if you enter and run a random example, it may not compile! Make sure you read the surrounding text to see whether the example you’re trying to run is meant to error. Ferris will also help you distinguish code that isn’t meant to work:

Research Software Design by Example

‘Generative House Algorithm’ was constructed for one simple reason, being one click away from creating a range of uniquely designed model houses. At the beginning of 2020, the start of the covid-19 pandemic, I started learning programming. My background is in developing 3D motion graphics, but my work goes into different directions. I feel inspired by trying out new things, but often feel constrained by the software I use. I never found the right software that could satisfy my every need. A few years back, I visited a motion graphics event in Prague. Here I saw a presentation by Simon Homedal from Man vs. Machine and he introduced me to procedural programming for digital art. And so my journey into learning to code started. Being stuck at home because of covid-19, I was presented with a change to really jump in and start developing a few coding projects. I started out with a simple board game in Java, where I was introduced to ‘object oriented programming’ and UI development and many other general concepts. At the end of this project I came to the conclusion that simple programming is not enough, I needed to combine with something I already have experience of. So I started using Python inside Maya, focusing on asset development of simple programs I could execute whenever I’m working on a 3D project. At the time I was wondering if I could deconstruct houses to an algorithm. The inspiration for this project came from wandering around the residential areas where I lived. Zandberg has very diverse styles of architecture; Terrace houses with high ceilings, classical villas with roofs made of straw and modern villas built after WWII. I was captivated by the diversity in design. Breakdown A simple UI inside Maya, where the uses can specify the value for generating a number of houses. Simple things like level and roof height, number of doors, max number of levels, etc. Lastly a button that would take in the value and run the algorithm. The back-end consists of a number of Python modules, textures and .obj files. One Python file called the “Main”, is where the files are assembled and executed. Process Developing a generative algorithm is a process of trial and error. At the start of the project I treated the project like any other modeling project, only every design decision was programmed in with a number of possible solutions. Over time this would become very complex and unstructured. It became impossible to go back and modify what I already wrote down. Another problem was that the algorithm was creating the model for running the code. This meant that selecting, adding and subtracting mesh to the model cost a lot of processing power, to the point my computer would freeze up. I needed to rethink my process and develop a framework which is easy to modify and light on the processor. My new plan of attack was to do as little as possible in Maya. All design instructions needed to be solved before anything can be created in Maya. Going into this direction was a hard choice. First off, it’s not a guarantee for success. The moment I would go too deep, things can get messy very easily. Besides I consider myself more of a visual thinker. Working outside of Maya meant every hurdle would be some sort of math problem. I already knew I had no choice, and understood this is the type of problem solving a programmer has to deal with. So I started out doing a little bit of RnD. My first test was to create a number of lists. Generally every list would hold some type of value. Like positional data, labels, dimensions, objects etc. and the rest would be a range of functions iterating, generating, gathering, and sorting data into these lists. These seemed flexible enough, if I needed to add new details to the model, I would make a new list and apply this into the framework. This type of framework was not very structured as I hoped. Luckily I discarded this ideal before it really began. I was already attracted by the idea of using a matrix instead of lists at the top of lists. The matrix would provide data in three dimensions, like a volume or a box made out of separate units. I would add an extra dimension to each unit, which is a list of six values. Each value would represent each side of a unit. The general ideal of a matrix is like a fluid simulation, which is made out of a matrix of voxels, or like Minecraft where each unit can be some type of block. This would create a data structure that is easy to modify. The next step would be to feed the matrix with values. A value can represent walls, doors, windows, levels, rooftops, position and direction. It starts with an empty matrix, and secondly fill it with values of 1 (later on inside Maya, value 1 would generate a wall, the location within the matrix would be translated to 3D space). If you’d stop here and translate the matrix to mesh in Maya, you would get a cluster of boxes stacked next or on top of each other. Adding more data to the matrix meant it needed to structure itself, so it would generate a cohesive design. If not the final result would be a house with holes in the wall or floating rooms. Therefore a number of functions are needed for searching for patterns, and modifying the data. A standard function would iterate over each unit in the matrix and check the neighboring values. If some sort of condition is met, the proper value will be modified. Going back to our cluster of boxes example. If a has a neighbouring box in front and to the left, but nothing on top, this would be a condition where a corner roof would be generated. And so different functions would solve design problems. In the end you would be left with a matrix of values that would serve as a blueprint for generating in house inside Maya. Finally the model needs to be made in Maya. A number of parts like a wall, door or window are generated or imported in Maya. When iterating over the finished matrix, a certain value in a certain place in the matrix will decide which objects (example wall or roof) needs to be instanced and placed in the right position and direction. When the matrix is fully realised in Maya the model gets a final cleanup, by merging the model, deleting unused parts and empty groups. What is left is the house model. If a range of houses needs to be generated, the process is simply looped over a number of times. Final word This project took way longer than I had anticipated and is far from finished. I learned a lot and at the same time it feels like I have only just begun. I hope to pick up this project again in the near future. I would love to add more elements to the house, like roof-windows or balconies and create procedural shaders. And possibly try out machine learning or some type of genetic algorithm. If you have any questions or are intrigued please contact me at ljh.hartman@gmail.com. Cheers!

Opensource for universities, educational institutions, research, IT / technology companies, NGOs, administrations, foundations, public institutions, authorities, banks and insurance companies, and the automotive industry. The platform offers project planning and visualization, application management, release planning, product management, team collaboration, task management, bug tracking, and budget planning. With this open-source solution, the users can record all processes in one central location, create product roadmaps, record all processes in one central location; create project templates; use widgets to visualize project status and progress; create detailed release planning, share the information with team and collect feedback from customers and employees. Apart from this Gantt charts/timeline management; custom fields for work packages; meetings management; scrum (backlogs and task board); calendar, time tracking, cost reporting, budgeting, bug tracking, wiki; twp-factor authentication, and more are some other features community edition offers. In Premium functions, OpenProject includes agile boards, logo and color schemes, your own design and logo, user-defined fields, single sign-on, individual help texts, highlighting of attributes, and more. One can get a complete function comparison amidst three versions, on the official page of this project. Contents [show] Steps to install OpenProject in Ubuntu 20.04 LTS Linux server 1. Add PGP Key The packages to install OpenProject are not available directly using the base repository of Ubuntu 20.04, hence we have to add a repository provided by the developers of this software platform. Well, but the system always needs to ensure that the packages it is getting are authentic and coming only from the source of repository added for it. And for that, we need to add the PGP key used to sign the OpenProject packages. Copy Me wget -qO- https://dl.packager.io/srv/opf/openproject/key | sudo apt-key add - GPG key for OpenProject 2. Integrate OpenProject repository in Ubuntu 20.04 As I mentioned above that we need to add manually a repository to get the OpenProject packages for installation, therefore, for that run the following given command: Copy-Past whole block of given command: Copy Me sudo wget -O /etc/apt/sources.list.d/openproject.list https://dl.packager.io/srv/opf/openproject/stable/12/installer/ubuntu/20.04.repo Add openproject repository on Ubuntu 20.04 3. Run system update To let the system know we have added a new repository to get a third-party application, run once the system update command: Copy Me sudo apt update 4. Command to install OpenProject in Ubuntu 20.04 LTS Finally, all the key things we require to get the OpenProject have been set, it’s time to use the APT package manager to start the installation process. Copy Me sudo apt install openproject sudo apt install openproject ubuntu 20.04 linux server 5. Start configuring OpenProject Well, the installation has been completed but yet has to be configured to get its web interface up and running. To start the further configuration run the given command: Copy Me sudo openproject configure Select Default OpenProject Users from the Construction field can go for the BIM one. default openproject BIM 6. Configure PostgreSQL To store its data we need a database server, here the OpenProject offers you an option to automatically install “Postgres“, however, if you already have an installed Postgres somewhere or on the same server then you can go for “Use an existing PostgreSQL database” option. However, here we are going for “Install a new PostgreSQL server and database locally“. Select it, Okay, and then hit the Enter key. PostgreSQL Auto Install for OpenProject 7. Install Apache Webserver Next, we need a webserver to serve web pages of OpenProject over a network. Hence, the installation wizard will let you install the Apache webserver if it is not already. install apache2 server Set Fully Qualified domain To access the OpenProject using FQDN, mention the same here. For example, here we are using demo.how2shout.com. You can use whatever you have. Alternatively, if you want to access it using a server IP address then mention that instead of a domain name. set fully qualified domain for OpenProject on Ubuntu Server Path (optional) This is optional. If you want to access your OpenProject web interface under some folder then you can mention it here. For example, let say you already have some website running on your server and to access it you are using your root domain then we cannot use the same domain to access another web platform. Therefore, to solve we can install another website under a subfolder. And the name of that subfolder you can mention here. server path prefix 8. Server SSL Those who already have SSL for the domain they want to use with OpenProject, do not need to install a new SSL certificate, even the ones who are using either Let’s Encrypt or Cloudflare. However, if you don’t have any existing SSL certificate then of course go for the Yes option otherwise NO. Server SSL for Project management Application 9. Install Subversion Just select the “Install Subversion repository support”. Subversion support Again hit the Enter key to set the default path and then install Git repository support, if you want. 10. STMP for Sending Emails Users who want to send emails to others from the web interface of OpenProject need to configure either SendMail or SMTP. We recommend using SMTP to route mail through your mail servers. Select it and configure the same. Or else just SKIP who don’t require emails service, right now. Next, select to install Memcache server for better cache performance or just skip if you don’t need it. Install a new memcached server Wait for a few minutes and the OpenProject open source project management will be on your server. 11. Access OpenProject Web interface Once the installation is completed, it’s time to access the Web interface of OpenProject to start managing our project through it. So, open any web browser on your local system that can access the server IP address where OpenProject is installed. In the URL either type the server IP address or Fully Qualified domain name associated with it. http://server-ip-address or http://your-domain.com If you have installed the OpenProject not in the root directory and with some server suffix or in simple words mentioned the folder name you have assigned during the installation of this project management platform. example: http://server-ip-address/your-sub-folder or http://your-domain.com/your-sub-foler Note: Replace- your-domain. com with the Domain you have added to use with OpenProject while configuring it. Whereas the sub-folder is the Server path suffix if you have mentioned while setting it up. Dashboard of project management Linux 12. Sign-in or Login OpenProject backend Now, let’s log in to the backend. The default username is admin and the password is also admin. Login openProject Backend Admin Change the default Admin password to something strong. Change Admin User 13. Admin Dashboard Finally, you have successfully installed the OpenProject on your Ubuntu 20.04 LTS Linux. Now you can start going through its learning curves to efficiently manage your projects. For more information once can visit its documentation page. OpenProject Installed in Ubuntu 20.04 Linux 14. Video Tutorial Video Player 00:00 14:15 Other Articles: • Top 3 Command Line Ubuntu Package Manager tools • How to install Gparted on Ubuntu 20.04 LTS • How to install Bitwarden server on Ubuntu 20.04 • Install VNC Server on Ubuntu 20.04 | 18.04 RELATED POSTS DaloRADIUS and FreeRADIUS install on Ubuntu 20.04 serverHeyan Maurya UBUNTUInstall FreeRadius & web GUI daloRADIUS on Ubuntu 20.04 serverSet Default Kernel Version of UbuntuHeyan Maurya UBUNTUHow to change default kernel in Ubuntu 22.04 | 20.04 LTSWSL Ubuntu 22.04 LTS Jammy Jelly FIshHeyan Maurya UBUNTUHow to Upgrade WSL 2 or 1 Ubuntu 20.04 to 22.04 LTSGoogle Drive in Ubuntu 20.04 LTSHeyan Maurya UBUNTU4153 VIEWSHow to Setup and use Google Drive on Ubuntu 20.04 LEAVE A REPLY Comment Text* Name* Email* Website Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment. This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

This repository contains detailed explanations and C# implementations of the most commonly used software design patterns. Each pattern is accompanied by examples that demonstrate its practical usage in real-world scenarios.

Author: Nathan Totorica Date: 5/14/2021 # Singularity Matrix Pertubation (SMP) This code was written for a class project in the course entitled ECE 504: "ST: Passive Electromagnetic Systems" taught in Spring 2021 by Dr. Ata Zadehgol at the University of Idaho in Moscow. This code was developed, in part, based on the code developed by Jennifer Houle in ECE 504 "ST: Modern Circuit Synthesis Algorithms" taught in Spring 2020 by Dr. Ata Zadehgol. Jennifer's code is available online at https://github.com/JenniferEHoule/Circuit_Synthesis. ## Overview Singular Matrix Perturbation (SMP) as introduced in [11], is a passivity enforcement algorithm for use on fitted models. This robust method is fast, computationally inexpensive, and accurate in enforcing passivity. This implementation using Python can easily be used with Vector Fitting algorithm implemented in [12]. Example cases to demonstrate passivity enforcmment were taken from [7][15], as well as custom examples designed in simulation software based off of multiport circuit synthesis as described in [6]. ## I/O and Flow Description - Instructions for input and output and flow description can be found in flow_diagram.pdf. ## Files - SMP.py: Singularity matrix perturbation implementation of [11] - s_compare.py: Compare ADS simulated S matrices. Calculate RMS error and plot - eig_plot.py: Plotting functions. Eigenvalue plots based off of plot.py in [12] - smp_ex.py: Example of how to pull .sp file in, parse parameters, send to vector fitting, enforce passivity, and generate new passive circuit. Imported from [12] - Ex2_y.py - vectfit3.py - intercheig.py - rot.py - pass_check.py - fitcalc.py - FRPY.py - intercheig.py - violextrema.py - plots.py - quadprog.py - pr2ss.py - utils.py ## Licensing GPL-3.0 License In addition to licensing: Embedding any of (or parts from) the routines of the Matrix Fitting Toolbox in a commercial software, or a software requiring licensing, is strictly prohibited. This applies to all routines, see Section 2.1. If the code is used in a scientific work, then reference should me made as follows: VFdriver.m and/or vectfit3.m: References [1],[2],[3] RPdriver.m and/or FRPY.m applied to Y-parameters: [8],[9] ## References [1] B. Gustavsen and A. Semlyen, "Rational approximation of frequency domain responses by Vector Fitting", IEEE Trans. Power Delivery, vol. 14, no. 3, pp. 1052-1061, July 1999. [2] B. Gustavsen, "Improving the pole relocating properties of vector fitting", IEEE Trans. Power Delivery, vol. 21, no. 3, pp. 1587-1592, July 2006. [3] D. Deschrijver, M. Mrozowski, T. Dhaene, and D. De Zutter, "Macromodeling of Multiport Systems Using a Fast Implementation of the Vector Fitting Method", IEEE Microwave and Wireless Components Letters, vol. 18, no. 6, pp. 383-385, June 2008. [4] B. Gustavsen, VFIT3, The Vector Fitting Website. March 20, 2013. Accessed on: Jan. 21, 2020. [Online]. Available: https://www.sintef.no/projectweb/vectfit/downloads/vfit3/. [5] A. Zadehgol, "A semi-analytic and cellular approach to rational system characterization through equivalent circuits", Wiley IJNM, 2015. [Online]. https://doi.org/10.1002/jnm.2119 [6] V. Avula and A. Zadehgol, "A Novel Method for Equivalent Circuit Synthesis from Frequency Response of Multi-port Networks", EMC EUR, pp. 79-84, 2016. [Online]. Available: ://WOS:000392194100012. [7] B. Gustavsen, Matrix Fitting Toolbox, The Vector Fitting Website. March 20, 2013. Accessed on: Feb. 25, 2020. [Online]. Available: https://www.sintef.no/projectweb/vectorfitting/downloads/matrix-fitting-toolbox/. [8] B. Gustavsen, "Fast passivity enforcement for S-parameter models by perturbation of residue matrix eigenvalues", IEEE Trans. Advanced Packaging, vol. 33, no. 1, pp. 257-265, Feb. 2010. [9] B. Gustavsen, "Fast Passivity Enforcement for Pole-Residue Models by Perturbation of Residue Matrix Eigenvalues", IEEE Trans. Power Delivery, vol. 23, no. 4, pp. 2278-2285, Oct. 2008. [10] A. Semlyen, B. Gustavsen, "A Half-Size Singularity Test Matrix for Fast and Reliable Passivity Assessment of Rational Models," IEEE Trans. Power Delivery, vol. 24, no. 1, pp. 345-351, Jan. 2009. [11] E. Medina, A. Ramirez, J. Morales and K. Sheshyekani, "Passivity Enforcement of FDNEs via Perturbation of Singularity Test Matrix," in IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 35, no. 4, pp. 1648-1655, Aug. 2020, doi: 10.1109/TPWRD.2019.2949216. [12] Houle, Jennifer, GitHub. May 10, 2020. Accessed on: February 3, 2021. [Online]. Available: https://github.com/jenniferEhoule/circuit_synthesis

The ESS Base Project is a repository designed to kickstart new projects for the Software Engineering and Systems discipline at CIn-UFPE. It aims to simplify the project initiation process providing a solid base by offering an initial structure, architecture, configurations, and implementation examples.

This is the integrated system software for the control of a small satellite designed by COEP students. It is an example of how moderately complex systems are built on Bare Metal.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3, 29 June 2007 Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0. Definitions. "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and "recipients" may be individuals or organizations. To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work. A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices" to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. 1. Source Code. The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. "Object code" means any non-source form of a work. A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A "Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. 2. Basic Permissions. All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. 3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. 4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. 5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to "keep intact all notices". c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate. 6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. 7. Additional Terms. "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further restrictions" within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. 8. Termination. You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. 10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. 11. Patents. A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version". A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To "grant" such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. "Knowingly relying" means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. 12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. 13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. 14. Revised Versions of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. 15. Disclaimer of Warranty. THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. Limitation of Liability. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. {one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.} Copyright (C) {year} {name of author} This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: {project} Copyright (C) {year} {fullname} This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box". You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.